JP7475688B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to an amusement machine.

There is a gaming machine that displays a start memory, which indicates the right to play a game, at a display position according to the execution order, and moves the display position of the start memory when a new game starts (updates the execution order).

JP 2015-20016 A

However, the pending display (start memory display) often attracts the player's attention when it moves around, and good visibility is required at the time when it attracts the player's attention.

In one aspect, the present invention aims to provide an amusement machine that improves the visibility of the hold display.

In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine as shown below is provided. The gaming machine includes a main control means for controlling the execution of a first game and a second game that can be alternatively executed, and a slave control means for receiving a command from the main control means and executing a predetermined effect. The slave control means is capable of transitioning between a first effect control state corresponding to the execution of the first game and a second effect control state corresponding to the execution of the second game, and includes a first hold display means, a second hold display means, a first shift display means, a second shift display means, and a hold effect means. The first hold display means is capable of displaying a pre-execution hold display on the first display unit before the execution of the first game or the second game corresponding to a start memory indicating the right to execute the first game or the second game. The second hold display means is capable of displaying an execution hold display on the second display unit corresponding to the first game being executed or the second game being executed. The first shift display means shifts and displays the pre-execution hold display in the first display unit for a first period as the first game or the second game progresses. The second shift display means shifts and displays the pre-execution pending display displayed on the first display unit as the first game or the second game progresses, as a pending execution display displayed on the second display unit, in a second period different from the first period. The pending performance means repeatedly displays the pre-execution pending display or the pending execution display with the third period being one cycle. Furthermore, the pending performance means sets the third period in the first performance control state to a size different from the second period and the third period in the second performance control state to a size different from the second period, while setting the third period in the first performance control state to a size different from the second period and the third period in the second performance control state to a size different from the second period .

In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine as described below is provided. The gaming machine includes a main control means for controlling the execution of a first game and a second game that can be alternatively executed, and a slave control means for receiving a command from the main control means and executing a predetermined effect. The slave control means is capable of transitioning between a first effect control state corresponding to the execution of the first game and a second effect control state corresponding to the execution of the second game, and includes a first hold display means, a second hold display means, a first shift display means, a second shift display means, and a hold effect means. The first hold display means is capable of displaying a pre-execution hold display on the first display unit before the execution of the first game or the second game corresponding to a start memory indicating the right to execute the first game or the second game. The second hold display means is capable of displaying an execution hold display on the second display unit corresponding to the first game being executed or the second game being executed. The first shift display means shifts and displays the pre-execution hold display in the first display unit for a first period as the first game or the second game progresses. The second shift display means shifts and displays the pre-execution pending display displayed on the first display unit as the first game or the second game progresses, as a pending execution display displayed on the second display unit, in a second period the same as the first period. The pending performance means repeatedly displays the pre-execution pending display or the pending execution display with the third period being one cycle. Furthermore, the pending performance means sets the third period in the first performance control state to a size different from the first period and the second period, and sets the third period in the second performance control state to a size different from the first period and the second period, while setting the third period in the first performance control state to a size different from the first period and the second period.

According to one embodiment, the visibility of the hold display is improved on the gaming machine.

1 is an oblique view showing an example of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 2 is a front view showing an example of a game board according to the first embodiment. 1 is a block diagram showing an example of a control system for a gaming machine according to a first embodiment; A block diagram showing an example of the configuration of a performance control device of the first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating an example of a collective display device according to a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a main process according to the first embodiment; FIG. 11 is a second flowchart showing the main process according to the first embodiment; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the main process according to the first embodiment (part 3); FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing the main process according to the first embodiment; FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the main process according to the first embodiment; FIG. 4 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process according to the first embodiment. A figure showing a flowchart of main processing in the performance control device of the first embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram (part 1) showing an example of a display screen during a game in the first embodiment. A figure showing an example of a decorative pattern of the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram (part 2) showing an example of a display screen during play in the first embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a temporary stop display using a decorative pattern according to the first embodiment. A figure showing an example of the oscillation of the background part of the decorative pattern A during the temporary stop display in the first embodiment. A figure showing an example of a temporary stop mode of decorative pattern A in the first embodiment. 1A to 1C are diagrams showing highlighted and ambiguous (non-highlighted) display of the outline of a pattern in the first embodiment; 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating an example of the timing of highlighting and ambiguous (non-highlighting) display of the outline of a pattern in the first embodiment. 13A to 13C are diagrams showing an example of the timing of highlighting and ambiguous (non-highlighting) display of the outline of a pattern in the modified example of the first embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a temporary stop display using decorative patterns according to a modified example of the first embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of a message display presentation in the first embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a contour display of a small pattern group according to the first embodiment. A figure showing an example of a temporary stopping mode of a decorative pattern in the second embodiment. A figure showing an example of a temporary stopping mode of a decorative pattern in a modified example of the second embodiment. A figure showing an example of a contour display switching target portion during temporary stop display of a decorative pattern in the second embodiment. FIG. 13 is a front view showing an example of a game board according to a third embodiment. A block diagram showing an example of a control system for a gaming machine of a third embodiment. FIG. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process according to the third embodiment. A figure showing an example of the gaming performance of a gaming machine of the third embodiment. A figure showing an example of a game state transition of a gaming machine of the third embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a game sequence of the gaming machine of the third embodiment (part 1). FIG. 13 is a diagram (part 2) showing an example of a game sequence of the gaming machine of the third embodiment. A figure showing an example of a variable display pattern selection table for the special chart 2 game of the third embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of an overview of a display device according to a third embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of an overview of a design display area according to a third embodiment. A figure showing an example of a pattern displayed in a pattern display area in a special game of the third embodiment. A figure showing an example of an overview of the hold display area in the third embodiment. A figure showing an example of an animation generated when a hold display is displayed in the third embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram (part 1) showing an example of a missing symbol effect in the third embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram (part 2) showing an example of a missing symbol effect in the third embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram (part 3) showing an example of a missing symbol effect in the third embodiment. A figure showing an example of a pattern missing effect in a modified example of the third embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a missing display when a hold display occurs in the third embodiment (part 1). FIG. 2 shows an example of a missing display when a hold display occurs in the third embodiment (part 2). A figure showing an example of the display mode of the hold display section of the third embodiment. A figure showing the highlighted and ambiguous (non-highlighted) display of the outline of the pattern during a missing effect in a modified example of the third embodiment. A figure showing an example of a temporary stop display using decorative patterns during a missing effect in a modified example of the third embodiment. A figure showing an example of a temporary stopping mode of a decorative pattern during a missing performance in a modified example of the third embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display mode corresponding to a variable display command A in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display mode corresponding to variable display command B in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display mode corresponding to a variable display command C in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram (part 1) showing an example of a display screen during play in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram (part 2) showing an example of a display screen during play in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram (part 3) showing an example of a display screen during play in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram (part 4) showing an example of a display screen during play in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during play in the fourth embodiment. A figure showing an example of a preview performance pattern selection table and a preview performance pattern reliability of the fourth embodiment. A figure showing an example of a specific effect pattern selection probability in the fourth embodiment. A figure showing an example of a specific pattern selection rate (hit) for each preview performance in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram (part 1) showing an example of a specific pattern selection rate (hit) for each preview performance in a modified example of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram (part 2) showing an example of a specific pattern selection rate (hit) for each preview performance in a modified example of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display mode corresponding to a variable display command B1 in a modified example of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display mode corresponding to a variable display command B2 in a modified example of the fourth embodiment. A figure showing an example of the appearance timing of a confirmed preview effect in a modified example of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during play in a modified example of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during a game in the fifth embodiment. A figure showing an example of a dual-structure display mode of a hold icon in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between the display mode of the core icon and the expectation level in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode for unclearly informing the expectation level of the core icon in the fifth embodiment. A figure showing an example of the relationship between the display mode of the shell icon and its changeability in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a change pattern of a hold icon in the fifth embodiment (part 1). FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of a change pattern of the hold icon in the fifth embodiment (part 2). A figure showing an example of a dual-structure display mode of a hold icon in a modified example of the fifth embodiment. A figure showing an example of a pending waiting display, a pending completion display, and an inner core icon column in a modified example of the fifth embodiment. A figure showing an example of a pending completion icon and a pending change in the pending icon in a modified example of the fifth embodiment. A figure showing an example of the display mode of the reserved icon after the reserved icon roulette performance in a modified example of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a reserved seat display in a modified example of the fifth embodiment (part 1). FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of a reserved seat display in a modified example of the fifth embodiment (part 2). FIG. 13 is a diagram (part 3) showing an example of a reserved seat display in a modified example of the fifth embodiment. A figure to explain the movement of the icon display indicating reserved memory as the game progresses in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram (part 1) showing an example of a timing chart showing the timing of the movement of the icon display indicating pending memory in the sixth embodiment as the game progresses. FIG. 23 is a diagram (part 2) showing an example of a timing chart showing the timing of the movement of the icon display indicating pending memory in the sixth embodiment as the game progresses. FIG. 23 is a diagram (part 3) showing an example of a timing chart showing the timing of the movement of the icon display indicating pending memory in the sixth embodiment as the game progresses. FIG. 23 is a diagram (part 4) showing an example of a timing chart showing the timing of the movement of the icon display indicating pending memory in the sixth embodiment as the game progresses. FIG. 5 is a diagram (part 5) showing an example of a timing chart showing the timing of the movement of the icon display indicating pending memory in the sixth embodiment as the game progresses. FIG. 6 is a diagram (part 6) showing an example of a timing chart showing the timing of the movement of the icon display indicating pending memory in the sixth embodiment as the game progresses. FIG. 23 is a diagram (part 7) showing an example of a timing chart showing the timing of the movement of the icon display indicating pending memory in the sixth embodiment as the game progresses. FIG. 8 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart showing the timing of the movement of the icon display indicating pending memory in the sixth embodiment as the game progresses. FIG. 9 is a diagram (part 9) showing an example of a timing chart showing the timing of the movement of the icon display indicating pending memory in the sixth embodiment as the game progresses. A figure showing an example of a hold display in the seventh embodiment. A figure showing an example of the execution timing of the hold display effect in the seventh embodiment. A figure showing an example of the relationship between the execution timing of pending static effects and pending dynamic effects in the seventh embodiment. A figure showing an example of synchronized control of the execution timing of pending static effects and pending dynamic effects in the seventh embodiment. A figure showing a modified example (part 1) of the synchronization control of the execution timing of the reserved static performance and the reserved dynamic performance in the seventh embodiment. A figure showing a modified example (part 2) of the synchronization control of the execution timing of the reserved static performance and the reserved dynamic performance in the seventh embodiment. A figure showing an example of visibility change between hold static presentation and hold dynamic presentation in the seventh embodiment. A figure showing an example of an execution period of a hold display effect in the seventh embodiment. A figure showing an example (part 1) of the execution timing of pending static effects and pending dynamic effects in a specific variation pattern of the seventh embodiment. A figure showing an example (part 2) of the execution timing of pending static effects and pending dynamic effects in a specific variation pattern of the seventh embodiment. A figure showing an example of a display screen in the variable display game of the seventh embodiment. A figure showing an example of the execution period of reserved static effects and reserved dynamic effects in a specified game state in the seventh embodiment.

Hereinafter, the embodiments will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
[First embodiment]
First, a first embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. Fig. 1 is a perspective view showing an example of a gaming machine according to the first embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment includes a front frame 12. The front frame 12 is an outer frame (support frame).
The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is stored in a storage section (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. A glass frame (transparent member holding frame) 15 including a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

In addition, on the left and right sides of the glass frame 15, there are provided frame decoration devices 18 that incorporate lamps and LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes) etc. for decoration and presentation, and for notification when an abnormality occurs (for example, if a dispensing abnormality occurs, the lamps and LEDs are turned on (blinked) in an abnormality notification color (for example, red)), and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effects). In addition, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided at the bottom of the front frame 12. In addition, when an abnormality occurs, the content of the abnormality is notified by voice from the speakers 19a, 19b. It is also possible to provide a lamp for notifying a dispensing abnormality at a specified position of the glass frame 15.

In addition, the lower part of the front frame 12 is provided with an upper tray (storage tray) 21 that supplies game balls to a ball launching device not shown, an upper tray ball outlet 22 through which game balls paid out from the payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10 flow out, a lower tray (receiving tray) 23 that stores game balls paid out when the upper tray 21 is full, and an operation unit 24 for the ball launching device.

Furthermore, on the upper edge of the upper tray 21, there is a performance button 25 used for intervention operations in the game performance.
The effect button 25 functions as an effect operation receiving section that receives an intervention operation in the game effect, and also functions as an effect section that can perform an effect in a required manner (for example, a light-emitting manner, a vibration, a protruding operation, etc.). In addition, an option setting section 29 is provided on the left edge of the upper tray 21, where the player can set various options. The option setting section 29 is provided with a cross cursor switch that can receive input operations in four directions, a central switch in the center of the cross cursor switch that can receive a decision operation, etc., and two auxiliary switches that are located on the periphery of the cross cursor switch and are used for volume control, etc. In addition, a keyhole 26 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12 for inserting a key to open or lock the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 operates (for example, presses) the effect button 25 (push button).
Based on the player's operation received from the effect button switch 25a (see FIG. 4) which detects the effect, an effect can be performed in which the player's operation is involved. For example, an effect in which the player's operation is involved is an effect in a variable display game (decorative special chart variable display game) on the display device (variable display device) 41 (see FIG. 2), and the gaming machine 10 can move a character displayed on the display device 41 or stop identification information in the decorative special chart variable display game displayed on the display device 41. Note that such player operation involvement can be achieved not only with the effect button 25 but also with switches in the option setting section 29 (cross cursor switch,
In FIG. 4, the switches in the option setting section 29 are collectively referred to as a setting switch 29a.
It is expressed as follows.

In addition, to the right of the effect button 25, there are provided a ball loan button 27 operated by the player when borrowing a ball from an adjacent ball loan machine, an ejection button 28 operated to eject a prepaid card from the card unit of the ball loan machine, and a balance display section (not shown) that displays the balance of the prepaid card. In the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, the player rotates the operation section 24, and the ball launching device launches the game balls supplied from the upper tray 21 toward the game area 32 (see FIG. 2) on the front side of the game board 30. In addition, the player can set, for example, the volume emitted from the speakers 19a and 19b or the brightness of the game board 30 by operating any one or more of the setting switches 29a (cross cursor switch, center switch, accessory switch) of the option setting section 29.

Next, the game board 30 will be described with reference to Fig. 2. Fig. 2 is a front view showing an example of the game board of the first embodiment.
A substantially circular play area 32 is formed on the surface of the play board 30 and is surrounded by guide rails 31. The play area 32 is formed by side cases 3 made of resin provided at the four corners of the play board 30.
3 and a guide rail 31. In the game area 32, a center case (game presentation structure) 40 having a display device (variable display device) 41 is disposed approximately in the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position recessed from the front surface of the center case 40. In other words, the center case 40 surrounds the periphery of the display area of the display device 41, protrudes forward beyond the display surface of the display device 41, and is formed so as to make it difficult for game balls to fly in from the surrounding game area 32.

The display device 41 is configured with a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) or a CRT (cathode ray tube). In an area (display area) on the display screen where images can be displayed, information related to the game, such as multiple identification information (special symbols), characters that create the special symbol variable display game, and background images that enhance the presentation effect, is displayed. On the display screen of the display device 41, multiple special symbols assigned as identification information are displayed in a variable manner (variable display), and a decorative special symbol variable display game corresponding to the special symbol variable display game is played. In addition, the display screen may display images for presentation based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image,
A fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) are displayed.

In addition, a board effect device 44 that performs game effects by operating is provided on the upper part of the center case 40. The board effect device 44 is configured to move from the state shown in FIG.
It is possible to operate toward the center of 1.

A normal symbol start gate (normal symbol start gate) 34 that provides the start condition for the normal symbol variable display game is provided on the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32. A game ball that enters the normal symbol start gate 34 (a game ball that passes through the normal symbol start gate 34) is detected by a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3).

In addition, on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, there are two general winning openings 3
5 are arranged in the center case 40, and one general winning port 35 is arranged on the lower right side of the center case 40 and to the right of a special variable winning device 38 described later. Game balls that win in these general winning ports 35 are detected by a winning port switch 35a (see FIG. 3).

In addition, a start winning hole 36 (start winning hole 1) which constitutes a first start winning hole (start winning area) which provides the starting condition of the first special symbol variable display game (special symbol 1 variable display game) is provided below the center case 40 in the game area 32. A game ball which enters the start winning hole 36 is detected by a start winning hole 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3).

In addition, below the start winning hole 36, an outlet 30a is provided for collecting game balls that do not win in the winning holes, etc.
In addition, it is located below the starting gate 34 and on the right side of the center case 40.
A normal variable winning device 37 (second start winning port, start winning area) is provided, which provides the start condition for the second special chart variable display game (special chart 2 variable display game). The normal variable winning device 37 (start winning port 2) is equipped with a movable member 37b that can be opened by rotating the upper end side in a direction that falls to the right, making it easy for game balls to flow in, and this movable member 37b is normally kept in a closed state (a state disadvantageous to the player) in which the game balls cannot flow in, being almost vertical.
When the result of the normal variable display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, the upper end side is rotated to the right by the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) as a drive device, and the normal variable winning device 37 is changed to an open state (a state advantageous to the player) in which game balls can easily flow into the normal variable winning device 37. The game ball that wins the normal variable winning device 37 is detected by the start hole 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). It is also possible to make it possible to win even when the normal variable winning device 37 is closed, and to make it more difficult to win when it is closed than when it is open. The normal variable winning device 37 corresponds to a normal electric device (normal electric).

A flow path 91 through which game balls can flow is formed to the right of the normal variable prize-winning device 37, and game balls that do not win in the normal variable prize-winning device 37 flow downward through the flow path 91. A guide section 93 is provided below this flow path 91. The guide section 93 has an upper surface 94 that is an inclined surface that slopes downward to the left, and the upper surface 94 receives game balls flowing downward and guides them to the left where the special variable prize-winning device 38 described later is located.

In addition, a special variable prize winning device (big prize winning port) 38 that can be changed between a state in which it does not accept game balls and a state in which it is easy to accept game balls depending on the result of the special chart variable display game is arranged at the lower right of the center case 40 in the game area 32. The special variable prize winning device 38 is an opening and closing member (opening and closing door) 3
8c, and the opening and closing member 3 is opened and closed depending on the result of the special chart variable display game as the auxiliary game.
The special variable winning device 38 converts the special variable winning opening 38 from a closed state (a blocked state disadvantageous to the player) in which the opening/closing member 38c closes the special variable winning opening 38 to an open state (a state advantageous to the player) in which the opening/closing member 38c retreats and can receive game balls flowing down the game area 32. That is, the special variable winning device 38 converts the special variable winning opening 38 to an open state (a state advantageous to the player) in which the opening/closing member 38c retreats and can receive game balls flowing down the game area 32.
During a big win game state (first special game state) resulting from the special chart 1 variable display game and the special chart 2 variable display game, or during a small win game state (second special game state) resulting from the special chart 2 variable display game, the big win port is converted from a closed state to an open state to facilitate the inflow of game balls into the big win port, and a predetermined game value (prize balls) is awarded to the player. Inside the big win port (winning area), a big win port switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 3) is provided as a detection means for detecting game balls that have entered the big win port.

The special variable winning device 38 also includes an induction flow path that induces the winning game ball into the winning port, and a V flow path that branches off from the induction flow path. The special variable winning device 38 is provided with a V door at a position that is the inflow portion of the V flow path. The V door is slid back and forth by a specific area solenoid 38d (see FIG. 3) to change between a blocking state that blocks the inflow of game balls into the V flow path and a permitting state that retreats backward to permit the inflow of game balls into the V flow path. The special variable winning device 38 also includes a specific area switch 38e (see FIG. 3) that detects game balls that have flowed into the V flow path.

In addition, in the first embodiment of the gaming machine 10, the probability state after the end of the special game state is not determined by the jackpot pattern, but rather the high probability state is determined based on the game ball flowing into the V flow path during the special game state and being detected by the specific area switch 38e.

The special variable prize winning device 38 may be provided with a plurality of large prize winning port switches 38a (for example, two). The special variable prize winning device 38 may be provided with two large prize winning port switches 38a instead of one, and when there are a plurality of large prize winning ports, the large prize winning port switches 38a may be provided with one or two switches for each large prize winning port, totaling x switches (see FIG. 3).

A warp port (warp entrance) 39a is provided on the left side of the center case 40. The game balls that flow into the warp flow path from the warp port 39a roll on the stage inside the center case 40, and some of them are guided to the warp exit 39b. The warp exit 39b is located directly above the start winning opening 36, and the game balls guided to the warp exit 39b are guided to the start winning opening 36.
It will be easier to win.

In the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, the area to the left of the center case 40 in the gaming area 32 where the gaming balls flow down is the left gaming area, and the area to the right of the center case 40 is the right gaming area. The player can aim to win at the start winning gate 36 or the general winning gate 35 (excluding the general winning gate 35 to the right of the special variable winning device 38) by adjusting the launch force to launch the gaming ball into the left gaming area (so-called left shot), and can aim to win at the normal starting gate 34, the general variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 38 by launching the gaming ball into the right gaming area (so-called right shot).
It is possible to aim for winning a special variable winning device 38 or the like.

In addition, outside the game area 32 (here, the lower right part of the game board 30), a collective display device 50 is provided for displaying the first special chart change display game and the second special chart change display game, which constitute the special chart change display game, and the general chart change display game, which is triggered by winning the general chart start gate 34, and for displaying various information.
is provided.

The collective display device 50 includes a round display section 51, a special pattern 1 reserved display section 52, a special pattern 1 pattern display section 53, a special pattern 2 pattern display section 54, a normal pattern display section 55, a normal pattern reserved display section 56, and a status display section 57 (see FIG. 5). The details of the collective display device 50 will be described later.

Next, the control system of the gaming machine will be described with reference to Fig. 3. Fig. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of the control system of the gaming machine of the first embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 is equipped with a gaming control device 100. The gaming control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls the overall game, and includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) section 110 having a gaming microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a gaming microcomputer) 111, an input section 120 having an input port, an output section 130 having an output port, a driver, etc., and a CPU
The data bus 140 connects between the section 110, the input section 120 and the output section 130.

The CPU section 110 includes a gaming microcomputer 111 called an amusement chip (IC (Integrated Circuit)) and an oscillator such as a quartz crystal oscillator, and an oscillation circuit (
The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are powered by DC (Dielectric Constant Current) generated by a power supply device 400.
A DC voltage of a predetermined level, such as DC 32V, DC 12V, or DC 5V, is supplied to the device to make it operable.

The power supply unit 400 is an AC (
Alternating Current) - DC converter or DC 32V voltage to DC 12V, DC 5V
A normal power supply unit 4 having a DC-DC converter or the like for generating a lower level DC voltage such as
The gaming control device 100 is equipped with a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies power supply voltage to the RAM (Random Access Memory) inside the gaming microcomputer 111 in the event of a power outage, and a control signal generating unit 430 that has a power outage monitoring circuit and generates and outputs control signals such as a power outage monitoring signal and a reset signal that notify the gaming control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power outage.

In the first embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generating unit 430 may be configured to be provided on a separate board or integral with the game control device 100, i.e., on the main board.
Furthermore, since the game control device 100 is subject to replacement when changing models, by providing the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generating unit 430 on a board separate from the power supply unit 400 or the main board, as in the first embodiment, it is possible to eliminate it from being subject to replacement, thereby reducing costs.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured with one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor.
In particular, the power supply voltage is supplied to the internal RAM, so that the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power outage or after the power is cut off. The control signal generating unit 430 monitors, for example, the 32V voltage generated by the normal power supply unit 410, and when it drops to, for example, 17V or less, detects the occurrence of a power outage and changes the power outage monitoring signal, while outputting a reset signal after a predetermined time. Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

The game control device 100 is also provided with a RAM initialization switch 112.
When the AM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, a process is performed to forcibly initialize the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is read when the gaming microcomputer 1
The reset signal is read repeatedly in the main loop of the main program executed by the CPU 11. The reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal, and resets the entire control system.

The game control device 100 is also provided with a setting value change switch 126 and a setting key switch 127. The setting value change switch 126 is, for example, a push switch that detects a push operation. The setting key switch 127 allows the setting key to be inserted to switch between an ON state and an OFF state. The game control device 100 is capable of changing settings related to game performance, and the settings stored in the RAM are retained even during a power outage or after a power cut. For example, the game control device 100 allows the winning probability of the special chart 1 variable display game and the special chart 2 variable display game to be changed according to six settings.

When the game control device 100 is turned on with the setting key switch 127 in the ON state and the RAM initialization switch 112 in the ON state, the game control device 100 transitions the control state to a setting change mode in which the settings of the gaming machine 10 can be changed. For example, in the setting change mode, the game control device 100 displays the setting contents on the probability setting value display device 136, and enables cyclic change from setting 1 to setting 6 by detecting the pressing operation of the setting value change switch 126. The probability setting value display device 136 is a display device capable of displaying setting values, and may be, for example, a one-digit seven-segment LED.
D and is mounted on a substrate.

In addition, when the game control device 100 is turned on with the setting key switch 127 in the ON state and the RAM initialization switch 112 in the OFF state, the game control device 100 transitions the control state to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting of the gaming machine 10 can be confirmed. For example, in the setting confirmation mode, the game control device 100 displays the setting contents on the probability setting value display device 136.

The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit: microprocessor) 111A.
, a read-only ROM (Read Only Memory) 111B and a read/write RA
Equipped with M111C.

The ROM 111B stores unchanging information for game control (programs, fixed data, various random number judgment values, etc.) in a non-volatile manner, and the RAM 111C is used as a working area for the CPU 111A during game control or as a storage area for various signals and random numbers.
The AM111C may be an electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as an EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable ROM).

In addition, the ROM 111B stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that specifies, for example, the execution time of the special chart variation display game, the performance content, and the occurrence or non-occurrence of a reach state. The variation pattern table is a table that stores the variation pattern random number 1, the variation pattern random number 2, and the variation pattern random number 3 stored as start memories in the CPU 111A.
The table is a table for determining the fluctuation pattern by referring to the table. The fluctuation pattern table also includes a miss fluctuation pattern table that is selected when the result is a miss, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table that is selected when the result is a jackpot, etc. Furthermore, these pattern tables include tables (such as a latter half fluctuation group table and a latter half fluctuation pattern selection table) for determining the latter half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern after the reach state is reached.
It includes tables (such as a first half fluctuation group table and a first half fluctuation pattern selection table) for determining the first half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern before reaching a reach state.

Here, the term "reach" (reach state) refers to a display state in which the display device has a display state that can be changed, and the display device derives and displays multiple display results at different times, and when the multiple display results become a predetermined special result mode, the game state becomes a game state (special game state) that is advantageous to the player, in a stage where some of the multiple display results have not yet been derived and displayed, the display result that has already been derived and displayed satisfies the condition for becoming a special result mode. In other words, the reach state refers to a display mode that does not deviate from the display condition for becoming a special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and reaches a stage before the display result is derived and displayed. For example, a state in which a variable display is performed by multiple variable display areas while maintaining a state in which all special result modes are aligned (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. In addition, the reach state refers to the display state at the point in time when the display control of the display device has progressed to a stage just before the display result is derived and displayed, and when at least a portion of the display results of the multiple variable display areas determined before the display result is derived and displayed meets the conditions to become a special result state.

Therefore, for example, if the decorative special chart variable display game displayed on the display device in response to the special chart variable display game displays multiple identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, center, and right variable display areas on the display device, and then stops the variable display in the order of left, right, and center to display the result state, the state in which the variable display stops in the left and right variable display areas when the conditions for the special result state are met (for example, the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the state in which the conditions for the special result state are met in any two of the left, center, and right variable display areas (for example, the same identification information, except for the special result state) is the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be displayed from this reach state.

This reach state includes multiple reach effects, and the reach effects that have different possibilities (different expected values) of deriving a special result mode are normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP4 reach), and special 4 reach (SP5 reach).
Reach (SP3 reach) and premium reach are set. The expected value is set to be higher in the following order: "no reach"<"normalreach"<"special 1 reach"<"special 2 reach"<"special 3 reach"<"premiumreach". In addition, this reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when a special result mode is derived in the special chart variable display game (when a jackpot occurs). In other words, it may be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that a special result mode is not derived in the special chart variable display game (when a miss occurs). Therefore, a state in which a reach state has occurred is a state with a higher possibility of a jackpot than when a reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes the game control program in the ROM 111B to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the performance control device 300, generate and output drive signals for the solenoids and display devices, and control the entire game machine 10. Although not shown, the game microcomputer 111 also includes a random number generating circuit for generating a jackpot random number for determining a win in the special chart variable display game, a jackpot pattern random number for determining a jackpot pattern, a variable pattern random number for determining a variable display pattern in the special chart variable display game (including the execution time of the variable display game in various reaches and no reaches), a win random number for determining a win in the normal chart variable display game, and an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113.
Based on this, a clock generator is provided which generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds (ms)) for the CPU 111A and a clock which provides update timing for the random number generating circuit.

In addition, the CPU 111A performs processing related to the special chart change display game.
Specifically, the CPU 111A selects and acquires one of the plurality of variation pattern tables based on the game result (win (big win or small win) or miss) of the special chart variation display game, the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special chart variation display game as the current game state, the operation state (time-saving operation state) of the normal variation winning device 37 as the current game state, the number of start memories, etc. Here, the CP
U111A serves as a variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring one of a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in ROM111B when a special chart variation display game is executed.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, an input interface, an output interface, etc., and drives a payout motor of a payout unit provided in the gaming machine 10 in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the gaming control device 100, and performs control to pay out prize balls. The payout control device 200 also drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on a ball loan request signal from a card unit of a ball loan machine attached to the gaming machine 10,
It controls the dispensing of loaned balls.

The input section 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 is provided with a start port 1 switch 36 in the start winning port 36.
a, the start gate 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, the gate switch 34a in the normal start gate 34, the winning gate switch 35a, the large winning gate switch 38 in the special variable winning device 38
a, the special variable prize winning device 38 is connected to a specific area switch 38e, and a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches is input,
An interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 is provided which converts the input signal into a positive logic signal of 7V-5V. The proximity I/F 121 also receives a detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62 which detects the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine 10. The proximity I/F 121 also receives an input signal of 7V-11V.
By setting the output terminal V, it is possible to detect abnormal conditions such as when the lead wires of a sensor or proximity switch are improperly shorted, when a sensor or switch is removed from a connector, or when the lead wires are cut and left floating, and the circuit is configured to output an abnormality detection signal.

Regarding the winning port switch 35a, in FIG. 3, the winning port switch 35a is 1.
Although the figure is shown as a block, in reality, a plurality (n) of winning port switches 35a (three in this embodiment) are provided on the game board 30, and the signals of each are transmitted to the proximity I through different signal lines.
In addition, in FIG. 3, the large prize opening switch 38a is shown as one block, but in reality, a plurality (x number) of large prize opening switches 38a (three in this embodiment) are input.
The large prize opening switches 38a are provided on the game board 30.
Each of them is connected by a different signal line, or, for example, a switch and a game control device 10
1 and 2 (main board) 10 (main board), the game controller 100 is connected to the game controller 100 in a wired OR manner on a relay board (not shown). The board radio wave sensor 62 and a magnetic sensor 61 (described later) may also be connected to the game controller 100 by a plurality of different signal lines, or may be connected to the game controller 100 in a wired OR manner.

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and is read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.
Among the outputs of 121, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the prize port switch 35a, the big prize port switch 38a, and the specific area switch 3
The detection signal of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, which are the start port switches in FIG. 1, are input to the second input port 123.
1) is shown as one signal line in FIG. 3, but in reality there are two.

Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signal of the board radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or switch is detected are input to the third input port 124. Also, the third input port 124 is configured to receive the detection signal of the magnetic sensor 61 for detecting fraud provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10, the detection signal of the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10, the detection signal of the main frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main frame) 12 of the gaming machine 10, the detection signal of the setting value change switch 126, the detection signal of the setting key switch 127, and the touch switch signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal based on the input of the touch switch provided on the operation unit 24).

Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to a test firing device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Furthermore, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the game microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

As described above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. To enable such a level conversion function, a voltage of 12 V is supplied to the proximity I/F 121 from the power supply device 400 in addition to a voltage such as 5 V required for normal IC operation.

The data held by the second input port 123 can be read by the gaming microcomputer 111 asserting (changing to an active level) a chip enable signal CE (Chip Enable) (not shown) by decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described below.

In addition, the input unit 120 receives a detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112, a dispensing control device 20
0, a frame radio wave invalid signal (a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by the frame radio wave sensor installed on the front frame 12), a payout busy signal (a signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 is in a state where it can accept commands), and a payout abnormality status signal (a status signal indicating a payout abnormality).
, a shoot ball out switch signal (a signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout), an overflow switch signal (a signal indicating that a predetermined amount of game balls have been stored in the lower tray 23 (that is, the lower tray 23 is full)
A first input port 122 is provided which takes in an out ball detection switch signal (a signal output when an out ball is detected) and an out ball detection switch signal (a signal output when an out ball is detected) and supplies them to the game microcontroller 111 via the data bus 140.

The out ball detection switch signal is a signal output from an out sensor (not shown) each time the out sensor detects an out ball of the gaming machine 10. For example, the out ball detection switch signal is provided in a discharge flow path (not shown) between a discharge port (not shown) that discharges gaming balls (out balls) from the gaming machine 10 and the outlet 30a. The out ball detection switch signal indicates game performance (for example,
The out ball detection switch signal may be input to the performance control device 300.
In this case, the out ball detection switch signal may be used to determine the operating state that triggers switching to the game performance or customer waiting screen display. For example, the performance display device 135 is a 4-digit 7-segment LED that can display the game performance in decimal or hexadecimal.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 may be provided with a vibration sensor switch that detects vibrations, and a detection signal from this vibration sensor switch may be input to the first input port 122 or the third input port 124 .

In addition, the game control device 100 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111, and the Schmitt buffer 125 has a function of removing noise from these input signals. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. In other words, they are treated as signals equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because there is a restriction on the number of terminals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 for receiving signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is
The reset signal RESET is input directly to a reset terminal provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 and is also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. The reset signal RESET is configured to be output directly to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test firing signal held in a port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test firing device.
The reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test firing device via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to the first to third input ports 122, 123, 124 of the input unit 120. The data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input must be reset to prevent malfunction of the system, but the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from each port of the input unit 120 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input is discarded by the reset of the gaming microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the performance control device 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the gaming control device 100 to the performance control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. Note that the serial communication from the gaming control device 100 to the performance control device 300 and the payout control device 200 is one-way communication that does not allow signals to be input from the performance control device 300 to the gaming control device 100.

Furthermore, the output unit 130 is configured to be able to mount a buffer 133 that is connected to the data bus 140 and outputs data informing the special pattern information of the variable display game and a signal indicating the probability state of a jackpot to a test firing test device of a certification agency (not shown) via a relay board 70. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine as a real machine (mass-produced product) installed in a game arcade. In addition, the detection signal of a switch that does not require processing, such as a start port switch, output from the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the test firing test device via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, detection signals that cannot be supplied directly to the test firing device, such as those from the magnetic sensor 61 and the board radio wave sensor 62, are first taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, and are then supplied to the test firing device from the data bus 140 via the buffer 133 and relay board 70 as an error signal indicating, for example, that the gaming machine is in a state where it cannot be controlled.
The relay board 70 is provided with a port for receiving the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplying it to the test firing device, and a connector for relaying and transmitting the signal line of the switch detection signal that does not pass through the buffer.
A chip enable signal CE (not shown) is also supplied from port 1, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by this chip enable signal CE is supplied to the test firing device.

In addition, the output section 130 is provided with a first output port 134a which is connected to the data bus 140 and which outputs opening/closing data of the large prize opening solenoid 38b which opens and closes the opening/closing member 38c of the special variable prize winning device 38 (large prize opening), opening/closing data of the specific area solenoid 38d which opens and closes the V-door of the special variable prize winning device 38, opening/closing data of the normal solenoid 37c which opens and closes the movable member 37b of the normal variable prize winning device 37, and display data for the performance display device 135.

The output unit 130 is also provided with a second output port 134b for outputting display data of the probability setting value display device 136. The output unit 130 is also provided with a third output port 134c for outputting on/off data of a segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected in accordance with the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50, a fourth output port 134d for outputting on/off data of a digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of the collective display device 50 is connected, and a fourth output port 134e for outputting on/off data of a digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of the collective display device 50 is connected.
34d is provided.

In addition, the output unit 130 outputs information about the gaming machine 10, such as jackpot information, to the external information terminal board 71.
The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a fifth output port 134e for outputting to the
A photorelay is provided and can be connected to an external device (such as an information collection terminal or an internal management device (hall computer)) installed in an amusement facility, so that information about the gaming machine 10 can be supplied to the external device via the photorelay. Part of the information supplied to the external device is output from the fourth output port 134d. In addition, a launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 134e to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

Furthermore, the output section 130 is provided with a first driver (drive circuit) 138a which receives opening/closing data signals of the large prize opening solenoid 38b, the specific area solenoid 38d, and the normal power solenoid 37c output from the first output port 134a and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal, a second driver 138b which outputs an on/off drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 134c, a third driver 138c which outputs an on/off drive signal of the digit line on the current sink side of the collective display device 50 output from the fourth output port 134d, a fourth driver 138d which outputs an external information signal to be supplied to an external device such as a management device from the fifth output port 134e or the fourth output port 134d to the external information terminal board 71, and a fifth driver 138e which receives a display data signal of the performance display device 135 output from the first output port 134a and generates and outputs a drive signal for the performance display device 135.

The first driver 138a is supplied with DC 32V as a power supply voltage from the power supply device 400 so as to be able to drive a solenoid that operates at 32V. DC 12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. The third driver 138c that drives the digit lines is for drawing current through the digit lines according to the display data, so the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

The second driver 138b, which outputs 12V, feeds current to the anode terminal of the LED via the segment line, and the third driver 138c, which outputs a ground potential, draws current from the cathode terminal via the segment line, so that the power supply voltage flows through the LEDs selected in sequence by the dynamic drive method, causing them to light up. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs an external information signal to the external information terminal board 71, is supplied with DC 12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. The buffer 133, the first output port 134a, the first driver 138a, etc.
The output unit 130 of the game control device 100, i.e., the main board, may be provided on the relay board 70 side. Also, the performance display device 135, or the fifth driver 138e and the performance display device 135, may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, i.e., the external board (not shown), not on the main board.

Furthermore, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as the identification code and program of each gaming machine to an external inspection device 490.
The gaming microcomputer 111 is configured to be able to communicate with the inspection device 490 by serial communication so that data can be transmitted and received between the gaming microcomputer 111 and the inspection device 490.
Since this is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111, like a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the first to third input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Next, the configuration of the performance control device 300 will be described with reference to Fig. 4. Fig. 4 is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of the performance control device of the first embodiment.
The performance control device 300 is an amusement chip (IC
A main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 consisting of a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for displaying images on a display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311, and a sound source LSI 31 that controls sound output for reproducing various melodies, sound effects, etc. from speakers 19a and 19b.
It is equipped with 4.

The main control microcomputer 311 includes a P
PROM 321 is a programmable read-only memory (ROM), RAM 322 provides a working area, and FeRAM (
A ferroelectric RAM 323 and a RTC (real-time clock) 338, which constitutes a timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (date, day of the week, time, etc.), are connected to the main control microcomputer 311. A RAM 311a which provides a working area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A watchdog timer (WDT) circuit 324 is also connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands (performance commands) from the gaming microcomputer 111, determines the content of the performance, and instructs the VDP 312 on the content of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 on the sound to be played, lights up decorative lamps, controls the drive of motors and solenoids,
It also performs processes such as managing performance time.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a working area, and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing images. The VDP 312 also includes an image ROM 325 that stores character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM 326 that is used to develop and process image data of characters and the like read from the image ROM 325.
is connected.

Although not particularly limited, data is transmitted and received in a parallel manner between the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312. By transmitting and receiving data in a parallel manner, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

The VDP 312 transmits to the main control microcomputer 311 a vertical synchronization signal VSYN for synchronizing the image on the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30.
C, a synchronous signal STS that provides the timing for transmitting data is input.
Interrupt signals INT0 to n are also input to the main control microcontroller 311 to inform the processing status, such as the end of drawing to the VRAM, and a wait signal WAIT to inform the main control microcontroller 311 that it is waiting to receive commands or data from the main control microcontroller 311.

The performance control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) method.
An NC signal and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input to the VDP 312 , and the image generated by the VDP 312 is displayed on the display device 41 via a signal conversion circuit 313 .

The sound source LSI 314 is connected to an audio ROM 327 in which audio data is stored.
The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340. The sound source LSI 314 sends an interrupt signal I
The performance control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier and the like that drives the upper speaker 19a provided in the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided in the front frame 12, and the sound generated by the sound source LSI 314 is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

The performance control device 300 is also provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 that receives commands sent from the game control device 100. Through this command I/F 331, the performance control device 300 receives commands such as the number of reserved decorative special symbols, the decorative special symbol command, the fluctuation command, and the stop information command sent from the game control device 100 to the performance control device 300 as performance control command signals (performance commands).
operates on DC 5V, and main control microcomputer 311 of performance control device 300 operates on DC 3.3V, so command I/F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

The performance control device 300 also includes a board decoration LE that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) and the like provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40).
The control circuits 332 to 334 for driving and controlling the lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address/data bus 340. The glass frame 15 may be provided with a frame presentation device having a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for presentation), and the frame presentation device 44 (for example, a movable role object that enhances the presentation effect in cooperation with the presentation display on the display device 41) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). The control circuits 332 to 334 for driving and controlling the lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address/data bus 340. The glass frame 15 may be provided with a frame presentation device having a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for presentation), and the frame presentation device may be provided with a frame presentation movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame presentation device.

Furthermore, the performance control device 300 is provided with a switch input circuit 336 having a function of detecting the on/off state of the performance button switch 25a of the performance button 25, the setting switch 29a of the option setting section 29, and the performance role switch 47 (performance motor switch) that detects the initial position of the motor in the board performance device 44, and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, and a function of detecting the state of a volume adjustment switch 335 provided in the performance control device 300 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311.
For convenience, these switches are collectively referred to as setting switches 29a, but in detail, the states of the aforementioned switches (cross cursor switch, center switch, and auxiliary switches) are connected so as to be individually detected by a switch input circuit 336, and detection signals indicating the states of each switch are input to the main control microcomputer 311.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 is a power supply for the performance control device 300 having the above-mentioned configuration.
and the electronic components controlled by it to supply a desired level of DC voltage. DC 32V for driving motors and solenoids, DC 12V for driving the display device 41 made of a liquid crystal panel, motors and LEDs, DC 5V as the power supply voltage for the command I/F 331,
In addition to the 5V, the main control microcomputer 311 is configured to generate a voltage of DC 15V to drive a motor, an LED, and a speaker. Furthermore, when an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, the main control microcomputer 311 generates a voltage of DC 3.3V based on the DC 5V.
A DC-DC converter for generating DC 1.2 V or DC is provided in performance control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generating unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311, which resets the device.
The signal is also supplied to the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) and the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) that drive and control lamps, motors, etc., to reset them. A cooling fan 45 that cools various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the performance control device 300, and the cooling fan 45 is driven when the power of the performance control device 300 is turned on. The circuit board that constitutes the performance control device 300 corresponds to a sub-control board (also called a sub-board).

Next, the game control performed by these control circuits will be described.
In the CPU 111A of the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control device 100,
Based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the gate switch 34a provided on the 4, the random number value for judging whether the normal figure is a winning number is extracted and compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process is performed to judge whether the normal figure variable display game is a winning number or a losing number. Then, the general figure pattern display unit 55 of the collective display unit 50 displays the identification pattern (identification information) for a predetermined time, and then displays the normal figure variable display game in which the identification pattern (identification information) is displayed in a variable manner. If the result of this normal figure variable display game is a winning number, the general figure pattern display unit 55 displays a special result mode corresponding to each of the first winning stop pattern to the third winning stop pattern, and the normal power solenoid 37c is operated to control the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37 to be opened as described above for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds). In other words, the game control device 100 serves as a conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). In addition, if the result of the normal pattern variation display game is a loss, control is performed to display the loss result state on the normal pattern display section 55.

Also, a start winning (start memory) is stored based on the input of a game ball detection signal from the start hole 1 switch 36a provided in the start winning hole 36, and based on this start memory, a random number value for jackpot judgment of the first special chart variable display game is extracted and compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111B to perform processing to judge whether the first special chart variable display game is a win or a loss. Also, a start memory is stored based on the input of a game ball detection signal from the start hole 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variable winning device 37, and based on this start memory, a random number value for jackpot judgment of the second special chart variable display game is extracted and compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111B to perform processing to judge whether the second special chart variable display game is a win or a loss.

Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (presentation control command, presentation command) including the judgment result of the above-mentioned first special symbol variable display game and second special symbol variable display game to the presentation control device 300. Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 performs processing to display a special symbol variable display game in which the identification symbol (identification information) is displayed variably for a predetermined time on the special symbol 1 symbol display unit 53 and the special symbol 2 symbol display unit 54 of the collective display device 50, and then displays the special symbol variable display game in a stationary manner. That is, the game control device 100 performs processing to display the start winning area (start winning port 36, normal variable winning device 37) of the game ball flowing down the game area 32.
The game control means controls the progress of the variable display game based on winnings.

In addition, the performance control device 300 performs processing to display a decorative special chart variable display game corresponding to the special chart variable display game on the display device 41 based on a control signal from the game control device 100. Furthermore, the performance control device 300 performs processing to set the performance state, output sound from the speakers 19a and 19b, and control the emission of various LEDs based on a control signal from the game control device 100. In other words, the performance control device 300 constitutes a performance control means that controls the performance related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

When the result of the special chart variable display game is a big win or a small win, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays the special result state or the small win result state on the special chart 1 pattern display section 53 or the special chart 2 pattern display section 54, and performs a process to generate a special game state or a small win game state (i.e., a process to execute a special game or a small win game). In the process to generate a special game state due to the result of the first special chart variable display game or the second special chart variable display game being a big win, the CPU 111A, for example, controls the opening and closing member 38c of the special variable winning device 38 by the big winning port solenoid 38b to allow the game ball to flow into the big winning port. In this special game state, the CPU 111A performs control (cycle game) to continue (repeated) this a predetermined number of rounds by opening the large prize opening until one of the following conditions is met: for example, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 9 balls) enter the large prize opening, or a predetermined time for opening has elapsed since the opening of the large prize opening. In addition, in a process to generate a small win game state due to the result of the first special chart variable display game (special chart 1 variable display game) or the second special chart variable display game (special chart 2 variable display game) being a small win, the CPU 111A performs control, for example, to open the opening/closing member 38c of the special variable winning device 38 by the large prize opening solenoid 38b, thereby enabling the flow of game balls into the large prize opening.

The opening and closing operation pattern (opening and closing operation mode) of the large prize opening performed in these small win game states is, for example, an operation of maintaining the opening and closing member in an open state for 200 ms only, performed four times at 1500 ms intervals. In this way, the game control device 100 serves as a large prize opening opening and closing control means that controls the opening and closing of the large prize opening when the stop result mode becomes a special result mode. Also, when the result of the special symbol variation display game is a miss, the CPU 111A controls the special symbol 1 pattern display section 53 or the special symbol 2 pattern display section 54 of the collective display device 50 to display the miss result mode.

In addition, the game control device 100 is capable of generating a high probability state as a game state after the special game state ends based on the result state of the special chart variable display game. This high probability state is
The probability of a winning result in a special chart variable display game is higher than in a normal probability state.
Furthermore, even if a high probability state is reached based on the result state of either the first special chart change display game or the second special chart change display game, both the first special chart change display game and the second special chart change display game are in a high probability state.

In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a time-saving state (specific game state, normal game high probability state) as a game state after the special game state ends based on the result state of the special game variable display game. In this time-saving state, it is possible to set the probability of the winning result of the normal game variable display game (normal game probability) to a high probability (normal game high probability state) higher than the normal probability (normal game low probability state) of 0. As a result, the normal game variable winning device 37 is controlled so that the opening time per unit time of the normal game variable winning device 37 is longer than when the normal game variable winning device 37 is in the normal game low probability state. Here, the normal game variable winning device 37 in this embodiment has the normal game probability set to "0" so that the movable member 37b is not opened in the normal game state.

In addition, in the time-saving state, the execution time of the normal map variation display game (normal map variation time) is, for example, 500 ms, the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map variation display game is, for example, 600 ms, and when the normal map variation display game is a winning result and the normal variation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time of the first winning stop pattern (normal power opening time) and the number of times it is opened (for example,
500 ms x 1 time), the opening time (normal power opening time) and the number of times the second winning stop pattern opens (for example, 1700 ms x 2 times), the opening time (normal power opening time) and the number of times the third winning stop pattern opens (
For example, it is possible to set it to 1700 ms x 3 times.

In addition, the execution time, normal map stop time, normal power open count, and normal power open time of the normal map change display game may be set appropriately to control the normal map change display game and the normal change winning device 37 to a time-saving operation state. For example, in the time-saving state, it is possible to control the execution time (normal map change time) of the above-mentioned normal map change display game to a second change display time that is shorter than the first change display time (for example, 10,000 ms to 1,000 ms). Also, in the time-saving state, it is possible to control the normal map stop time that displays the result of the normal map change display game to a second stop time that is shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 ms to 70
4 ms. In addition, in the time-saving state, when the normal map variation display game is a winning result and the normal variation winning device 37 is opened, it is possible to control the opening time (normal power opening time) to be a second opening time longer than the first opening time in the normal state (normal map low probability state) (for example, 100 ms to 1352 ms). In addition, in the time-saving state, it is possible to set the number of times that the normal variation winning device 37 opens (normal power opening number of times) for one winning result of the normal map variation display game to a second opening number that is greater (for example, 4 times) than the first opening number (for example, 2 times). In addition, in the time-saving state, the probability of the normal map variation display game being a winning result (normal map probability) can be set to the normal probability in the normal operation state (normal map low probability state, for example, 1/
It is possible for the probability to be higher than 250/251 (normal high probability state, for example, 250/251).

In the time-saving state, the time for converting the normal variation winning device 37 to the open state is extended more than usual by changing one or more of the normal map variation time, normal map stop time, normal power opening count, normal power opening time, and normal map probability. It is also possible to set multiple types of time-saving states in which different things are changed. In addition, when a hit is made, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probability of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be made different. In addition, the high probability state and the time-saving state can occur independently, and both can occur simultaneously, or only one can occur. The time-saving state can also be a normal power support state (during normal power support or during power support).
It can also be called.

Next, the configuration of the collective display device will be described with reference to Fig. 5. Fig. 5 is a diagram showing an example of the collective display device of the first embodiment. The collective display device 50 includes a 7-segment LED_d1, a 7-segment LED_d2, and 16 LEDs from LED_d3 to LED_d18.
The collective display device 50 includes a 7-segment LED_d1 and a 7-segment LED_d
2, and LED_d3 to LED_d18 are illuminated to indicate various states.

The collective display device 50 is provided with a round display section 51, a special chart 1 reserved display section 52, a special chart 1 pattern display section 53, a special chart 2 pattern display section 54, a normal chart pattern display section 55, a normal chart reserved display section 56, a status display section 57, and a special chart 2 reserved display section 58, by distributing various status display functions to the 7-segment LED_d1, the 7-segment LED_d2, and the LED_d3 to LED_d18. The round display section 51 is provided with four LEDs, LED_d3 to LED_d6.
The number of rounds in the special game is displayed by the lighting state of the LED_d11 and the LED_d12. The special game 1 reserved display unit 52 displays the reserved number in the special game 1 by the lighting state of the two LEDs, LED_d11 and LED_d12. The special game 1 pattern display unit 53 displays the reserved number in the special game 1 by the lighting state of the eight L of the 7-segment LED_d1.
The special chart 1 game is displayed by the lighting state of the ED (7 segment LEDs and 1 dot LED). The special chart 2 pattern display unit 54 displays the patterns in the special chart 2 game by the lighting state of the 8 LEDs (7 segment LEDs and 1 dot LED) of the 7 segment LED_d2. The normal chart pattern display unit 55 displays the patterns in the normal chart game by the lighting state of the three LEDs, LED_d8, LED_d10, and LED_d18. The normal chart reserve display unit 56 displays the number of reserved balls in the normal chart game by the lighting state of the two LEDs, LED_d15 and LED_d16. The status display unit 57 displays the number of reserved balls in the normal chart game by the lighting state of the two LEDs, LED_d7, LE
The game status of the special game is displayed by the lighting state of the three LEDs, LED_d13 and LED_d14. The special game 2 reserve display unit 58 displays the number of reserved games in the special game 2 by the lighting state of the two LEDs, LED_d13 and LED_d14.

The control of the gaming machine for performing such a game will be described below. First, the control executed by the gaming microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly consists of a main process and a timer interrupt process that is executed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 ms).

[Main processing]
First, the main processing of the game control device of the first embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 6 to Fig. 10. Fig. 6 is a diagram (part 1) showing a flowchart of the main processing of the first embodiment. Fig. 7 is a diagram (part 2) showing a flowchart of the main processing of the first embodiment.
FIG. 8 is a flowchart (part 3) of the main process according to the first embodiment.
Fig. 10 is a flowchart of the main processing according to the first embodiment (part 5).

The main process is started by the control unit (gaming microcomputer 111) when the power is turned on. In this main process, first, a process to prohibit interrupts (step S1) is performed, and then a stack pointer setting process (step S2) is performed to set a stack pointer, which is the top address of an area to which values of registers, etc. are saved when an interrupt occurs. Next, register bank 0 is specified (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a specified register (e.g., D register) (step S4).
The address range of RAM 111C is 0000h to 01FFh, with the higher order digits being 00h or 01h. In step S4, 00h, which is at the head of the address range of RAM 111C, is set.

Next, a launch stop signal is output and the launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state (step S5).
The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a launch stop signal, and the launch of game balls is prohibited.

Thereafter, the state of input port 1 (first input port 122) is read into a first register (e.g., B register) (step S6), and then the state of input port 3 (third input port 124) is read into a second register (e.g., C register) (step S7).

Here, a predetermined bit in the first register is masked, and the other bits are cleared (step S8). For example, only the second bit in the B register corresponding to the detection signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 is held, and the 0th, 1st, and 3rd to 7th bits are cleared. Then, a predetermined bit in the second register is masked, and the other bits are cleared (step S9). For example, only the 4th bit in the C register corresponding to the detection signal from the setting key switch 127 is held, and the 0th to 3rd and 5th to 7th bits are cleared.

The information in the first register is integrated into the second register, and the information held in the second register is written to the RAM1.
For example, the logical sum of the B register and the C register is stored in the C register, and the C register is held as a state reference register.

For example, the value "00000000B" of the status reference register (C register) indicates that the 0th, 1st, 3rd, 5th to 7th bits are cleared to "0", the 2nd bit is "0" corresponding to the ON detection signal from RAM initialization switch 112, and the 4th bit is "0" corresponding to the ON detection signal from setting key switch 127. In other words, the value "00000000B" of the status reference register indicates a setting change state in which RAM initialization switch 112 is ON and setting key switch 127 is ON.

In addition, the value of the status reference register, "00010000B", is the 0th bit, the 1st bit,
The third bit and the fifth through seventh bits are cleared to "0" and the second bit is RA
The fourth bit is "0" corresponding to the ON detection signal from the M initialization switch 112, and the fourth bit is "1" corresponding to the OFF detection signal from the setting key switch 127.
The value "00010000B" of the state reference register indicates a RAM initialization state in which the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (ON) and the setting key switch 127 is off (OFF).

In addition, the value of the status reference register, "00000100B", is the 0th bit, the 1st bit,
The third bit and the fifth through seventh bits are cleared to "0" and the second bit is RA
The fourth bit is "1" corresponding to the detection signal from the M initialization switch 112 being OFF, and the fourth bit is "0" corresponding to the detection signal from the setting key switch 127 being ON.
The value "00000100B" of the state reference register indicates a setting confirmation state in which the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (OFF) and the setting key switch 127 is on (ON).

In addition, the value of the status reference register, "00010100B", is the 0th bit, the 1st bit,
The third bit and the fifth through seventh bits are cleared to "0" and the second bit is RA
The fourth bit is "1" corresponding to the detection signal OFF from the M initialization switch 112, and the fourth bit is "1" corresponding to the detection signal OFF from the setting key switch 127.
The value of the state reference register, "00010100B", indicates a power restoration (power outage recovery) state in which the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (OFF) and the setting key switch 127 is off (OFF).

As a result, the detection signal from RAM initialization switch 112 and the detection signal from setting key switch 127 are held in the C register. Note that since the storage position (second bit) in the B register of the detection signal from RAM initialization switch 112 and the storage position (fourth bit) in the C register of the detection signal from setting key switch 127 are different, the detection signal from RAM initialization switch 112 and the detection signal from setting key switch 127 are preserved without being lost even by the logical sum of the B register and the C register.

Then, a process for setting a power-on delay timer is performed (step S11). In this process, a predetermined initial value is set, and a waiting time (e.g., 3 seconds) is set to wait for the programs of the slave control means (e.g., the payout control device 200, the presentation control device 300, etc.) that perform various controls according to instructions from the game control device 100 that constitutes the master control means to start up normally. This allows the game control device 10 to start up normally when the power is turned on.
This can prevent the slave control means from missing a command due to the master control means being sent a command before the slave control means is started up when the master control means is started up. In other words, the game control device 100 serves as a standby means for delaying the start of the master control means and setting a predetermined standby time for waiting for the start of the slave control means when the power is turned on.

In addition, the timing of the power-on delay timer is used to determine the validity of the data stored in the RAM area (
This is performed using a memory area that is not subject to the checksum calculation (such as a RAM area or a register that is not subject to the validity determination). This makes it possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated because it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area when calculating check data such as a checksum of the RAM area.

The detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 is stored in the second register (C register), and by storing the detection signal before the start of the standby time, the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 can be reliably stored. In other words, if the state of the RAM initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, it would be necessary to wait for the standby time to elapse before operating the RAM initialization switch 112, or to continue operating the RAM initialization switch 112 from power-on until the standby time has elapsed. However, by reading the state before the standby time begins, the switch can be detected by operating it immediately after power-on without having to perform such a troublesome operation, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the initialization operation performed when powering on is not accepted.

In addition, the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is stored in the second register (C register), and by storing the detection signal before the start of the standby time, the operation of the setting key switch 127 can be reliably detected.
If the state of the setting key switch 127 is read, the standby time will elapse before the setting key switch 127 is read.
or continue to operate the setting key switch 127 from when the power is turned on until the standby time has elapsed. However, by reading the state before the standby time starts, it becomes possible to perform operations immediately after powering on without having to perform such troublesome operations, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which a setting change operation or setting confirmation operation performed when powering on is not accepted.

Next, a process of setting a power-on delay timer (for example, about 3 seconds) (step S11
), the process of timing the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of power outages during the standby time (
First, the number of times (for example, two times) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step S12), and it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on or not (step S13).

If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S13; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal continues to be on for the number of checks set in step S12 (step S1
4). If the power failure monitoring signal has not been on for the number of checks (step S14; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S13). If the power failure monitoring signal has been on for the number of checks (step S14;
Y), that is, if it is determined that a power outage has occurred, the power supply to the gaming machine 10 is awaited to be cut off. In this way, by determining that a power outage has occurred when the power outage monitoring signal has been continuously received for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power outage due to noise, etc., and to appropriately deal with malfunctions when the power is turned on.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. This makes it possible to respond to a power failure that occurs during the period when the start-up of the game control device 100, which serves as the main control means, is delayed, and makes it possible to appropriately deal with problems that occur when the power is turned on. Note that access to the RAM 111C is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the contents stored at the time of the previous power interruption are still retained, so
When a power outage occurs here, there is no need to perform backup processing, etc. Therefore, even if a power outage occurs during standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM 111C, and the burden on control can be reduced.

On the other hand, if the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S13; N), i.e., if a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by "-1" (step S15), and it is determined whether the timer value is "0" or not (step S16). If the timer value is not 0 (step S16; N), i.e., if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S12). Also, if the timer value is "0",
" (step S16; Y), that is, when the waiting time has elapsed,
Access to a read/write memory (RWM) such as an ICE or an EEPROM is permitted (step S17), and off data is output to all output ports (setting the state to no output).
(step S18).

Next, the serial port (a port that is pre-installed in the gaming microcomputer 111,
(Used for communication with the performance control device 300 and the payout control device 200) is set (step S19)
).

In step S20, a process is performed to start up the CTC circuit in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) which generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC).

In step S21, a RAM abnormality flag is set. Note that the RAM abnormality flag is set provisionally and may be updated in a process for checking for abnormalities in the RAM that is executed later.

In step S22, it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah). If the value of the power failure inspection area 1 is normal (step S22; Y), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step S23), and the power failure inspection area 2
If the value is normal (step S23; Y), a checksum calculation process (step S24) is performed to calculate a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM.

In the checksum calculation process, the checksum may be calculated by adding together the data in the work area for game control and the data in the work area for status display, or the checksum may be calculated separately from the data in the work area for game control and the data in the work area for status display, or the checksum may be calculated only from the data in the work area for game control. The work area for game control is a working area in the memory area within the RWM that is used for game control. The work area for status display is a working area in the memory area within the RWM that is used for status display.

Next, it is determined whether the checksum calculated in step S24 matches the checksum at the time of power off (step S25), and if it is determined that the checksums match (are normal) (step S25; Y), the RAM abnormality flag that was temporarily set in step S21 is cleared (step S26).

If it is determined that the checksums do not match (are not normal) (step S25;
If the check data in the power failure inspection area is determined to be abnormal (step S22; N or step S23; N), the RAM abnormality flag provisionally set in step S21 is definitively set by skipping step S26 and proceeding to step S27. Even if the check data in the power failure inspection area is determined to be abnormal (step S22; N or step S23; N), the RAM abnormality flag provisionally set in step S21 is definitively set by skipping step S26 and proceeding to step S27.

In step S27, the second register (C register) is referred to and the setting key switch 12
If the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is on and the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 is on, the process proceeds to step S33. If the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is on and the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 is not on, the process proceeds to step S34.
Go to 28.

In addition, since the game control device 100 holds the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 and the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 in the second register (C register), it can simultaneously determine the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 and the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112.
Since the detection signal of the initialization switch 112 is stored in the second register (register C),
The detection signal of the setting key switch 127 and the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 before the validity of the RAM is judged can be used as the objects of judgment.

In step S28, the control unit judges whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is on. If the RAM abnormality flag is on (i.e., the RAM abnormality flag is set), the control unit proceeds to step S30. If the RAM abnormality flag is not on (i.e., the RAM
If the abnormality flag is cleared, the process proceeds to step S29.

In step S29, the control unit determines whether the setting change mode flag is on. If the setting change mode flag is on, the control unit proceeds to step S48, and if the setting change mode flag is not on, the control unit proceeds to step S30.

Steps S30 to S32 are processes executed when the RAM is abnormal or when the RAM is restarted without being cleared due to a power interruption during setup.
In step 0, the control unit transmits a main abnormality error notification command to the performance control device 300.
As a result, the performance control device 300 performs performance control corresponding to the main abnormality error notification command. For example, the performance control device 300 receives a main abnormality error notification command and causes the display device 41 to display a message informing restart with RAM clearing, and causes the speakers 19a and 19b to output sound. In addition, the performance control device 300 receives a main abnormality error notification command and causes the frame decoration device 18, the board decoration device 46, and the board performance device 44 to notify the main abnormality error.

In step S31, the control unit transmits the seven-segment display data at the time of game stop to the performance display device 135.
At this time, the control unit can display a status corresponding to the main abnormality error on the performance display device 135. The control unit also outputs 7-segment display data at the time of game stop to the probability setting value display device 136. At this time, the control unit can display numbers or characters that are not included in the probability setting value on the probability setting value display device 136. The control unit can also display the L
The seven-segment display data including the ED display data may be output to the collective display device 50. At this time, the control unit may turn off or light up all of the collective display devices 50.

In step S32, the control unit transmits the ON data of the security signal to the external information terminal board 71.
At this time, the control unit turns off the output data of other signals output from the external information terminal board 71. The control unit repeatedly executes steps S31 and S32 to wait for the power supply to be cut off. That is, the gaming machine 10 outputs a security signal from the external information terminal board 71 while waiting for the power supply to be cut off. Also, while waiting for the power supply to be cut off,
No signals other than security signals are output from the external information terminal board 71 .

In addition, the control unit does not prohibit access to the RAM in the repeated execution of steps S31 and S32 until the power is turned off.
In this way, the control unit waits for the power to be cut off in step S31 until the return address can be stored in the RAM when the n-Maskable Interrupt occurs, thereby reducing the risk of the program running out of control.
The contents stored in the RAM during the repeated execution of steps S31 and S32 are not protected by prohibiting access to the RAM, but the risk of the contents stored in the RAM not being protected is limited because clearing the RAM at the time of restart is a condition for starting game control. In other words, the gaming machine 10 obtains the effect of reducing the risk of program runaway while limiting the risk of the contents stored in the RAM not being protected. Also, by not prohibiting access to the RAM during the repeated execution of steps S31 and S32 until waiting for the power to be cut off, the control unit can prevent the contents stored in the RAM from being accessed during steps S31 and S32.
In this way, subroutines can be called, thereby improving program efficiency.

Steps S33 to S36 are processes related to preparation for changing settings.
In the example shown in FIG. 27, the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is ON and the RAM initialization switch 11
This is a process that is executed when the detection signal of the second detection signal is ON.

In step S33, the control unit determines whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is on. If the RAM abnormality flag is on, the control unit proceeds to step S34, and if the RAM abnormality flag is not on, the control unit proceeds to step S35.

In step S34, since the RAM abnormality flag is on, the control unit clears the set value. The set value may be cleared by setting an invalid value as the set value, or may be cleared by setting a value that is most disadvantageous to the player from the viewpoint of preventing fraud.

In step S35, the control unit performs processing to set a setting change mode flag. The setting change mode flag is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming machine 10 is changing the setting. When the setting is being changed, the setting change mode flag is set, and when the setting is not being changed, the setting change mode flag is cleared (reset).

In step S36, the control unit transmits a command indicating that the settings are being changed to the performance control device 300. As a result, the performance control device 300 performs performance control corresponding to the command indicating that the settings are being changed. For example, the performance control device 300 receives the command indicating that the settings are being changed and causes the display device 41 to display a message indicating that the settings are being changed, or causes the speakers 19a, 19b,
In addition, the performance control device 300 receives a command indicating that the setting is being changed, and notifies the user by the frame decoration device 18, the board decoration device 46, and the board performance device 44 that the setting is being changed.

Step S37 is a process executed after the setting change preparation (steps S33 to S36) or after the setting confirmation preparation (steps S49 and S50). In step S37, the control unit sets the security signal control timer to 128 ms. This causes the gaming machine 10 to output a security signal at least until the security signal control timer times out.

Steps S38 to S40 are processes related to waiting for the completion of the setting change or the completion of the setting confirmation. Since the gaming machine 10 sets the security signal to be output in step S37, the execution of the process related to waiting for the completion of the setting change or the completion of the setting confirmation can be grasped from the outside.

After permitting the interrupt (step S38), the control unit refers to the second register (C register) to determine whether the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is OFF (step S
39). If the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is OFF, the control unit
If the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is not OFF, the process proceeds to step S40.

In step S40, the control unit determines whether or not a power outage has occurred.
The occurrence of a power outage can be determined by detecting the power outage monitoring signal continuously for a predetermined period of time. If a power outage has occurred, the control unit proceeds to step S41. If a power outage has not occurred, the control unit returns to step S42.
In other words, the control unit waits for the setting key to be turned off until a power outage occurs, while the control unit has permitted the interrupt in step S38.

When the control unit determines that a power outage has occurred, the control unit performs a process of prohibiting interrupts (step S4
1) A process of outputting OFF data to all output ports is performed (step S42).
Then, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step S43
), and save power outage inspection area check data 2 in power outage inspection area 2 (step S44).
Further, a checksum calculation process (step S45) for calculating a checksum when the RWM power supply is cut off, and a process for saving the calculated checksum in the checksum area (step S46) are performed.
), then a process of prohibiting access to the RAM (step S47) is performed, and the machine waits for the power supply to be cut off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum at the time of power cut, it is possible to determine whether the information stored in the RWM before the power cut has been correctly backed up when the power is turned on again.

Step S48 is executed if it is determined in step S29 that the setting change mode flag is on. In step S48, the control unit refers to the second register (C register) to determine whether the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is on.
If the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is on, the process proceeds to step S49, and if the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is not on, the process proceeds to step S51.

Steps S49 and S50 are processes related to preparation for setting confirmation.
In step S9, the control unit performs a process of setting a setting check mode in progress flag. The setting check mode in progress flag is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming machine 10 is in the process of setting check. When the gaming machine 10 is in the process of setting check, the setting check mode in progress flag is set, and when the gaming machine 10 is not in the process of setting check, the setting check mode in progress flag is cleared (reset). In step S50, the control unit transmits a setting check in progress command to the performance control device 300. This causes the performance control device 300 to perform performance control corresponding to the setting check in progress command. For example, the performance control device 300 receives a setting check in progress command, and causes the display device 41 to display a message informing the user that the setting is being checked, or causes the speakers 19a, 19b to output sound. In addition, the performance control device 300 transmits a setting check in progress command to the display device 41, and causes the display device 41 to output sound.
00 receives the command indicating that the settings are being confirmed, and notifies the user that the settings are being confirmed by the frame decoration device 18, the board decoration device 46, and the board performance device 44. After that, the control unit proceeds to step S37.

On the other hand, when the control unit determines in step S48 that the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is not on, it executes step S51. In step S51, the control unit refers to the second register (C register) and determines whether or not the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 is on. If the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 is on, the control unit proceeds to step S52, and if the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 is not on, the control unit proceeds to step S58. That is, the gaming machine 10 proceeds to execute processing related to RAM initialization (RAM clear) upon detecting activation accompanied by pressing of the RAM initialization switch 112, and then executes R
When start-up is detected without pressing the AM initialization switch 112, the process proceeds to execution of processing related to power outage recovery.

Next, the process related to the RAM initialization performed in step S52 and subsequent steps will be described.
In the process related to the AM initialization, the control unit clears the RAM areas other than the set values to 0 (zero clear) (step S52), and saves the initial values at the time of RAM initialization in the areas to be initialized (
Step S53. For example, the control unit sets the RAM clear start address 2 as the start address for clearing the RAM, and clears to zero the data in the area to be cleared (the game control work area) in the storage area (the area not including the access prohibited area) of the RWM (for example, the RAM 111C).

The setting change mode flag and the setting check mode flag are included in the data in the area to be cleared, and are therefore cleared by clearing the data in the area to be cleared to zero.

In step S54, the control unit transmits a command for initializing the RAM to the performance control device 300. As a result, the performance control device 300 performs performance control corresponding to the command for initializing the RAM. For example, the performance control device 300 receives the command for initializing the RAM and causes the display device 41 to display a message informing that the RAM has been initialized, or causes the speakers 19a and 19b to output sound. In addition, the performance control device 300 receives the command for initializing the RAM and notifies the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 400 that the RAM has been initialized.
6. An announcement is made by the board effect device 44.

In addition, after executing the process related to waiting for the completion of the setting change or waiting for the completion of the setting confirmation (steps S38 to S40), if the control unit detects that the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is off, the control unit executes step S55. After prohibiting interrupts (step S55), the control unit transmits a command to end the notification to the performance control device 300 (step S
56).

As a result, the performance control device 300 ends the notification that a setting change is in progress, which was started upon receiving a command during setting change, or the notification that a setting confirmation is in progress, which was started upon receiving a command during setting confirmation.

Next, the control unit refers to the setting change mode flag to determine whether or not the setting change mode is in progress (step S57).
On the other hand, if the control unit is not in the setting change mode, the control unit proceeds to step S58 and executes a process related to power recovery.

In step S58, the control unit executes a power failure recovery process. The power failure recovery process includes a process of saving an initial value at the time of power failure recovery in an area to be initialized, determining whether the special game is in a high probability state by referring to the special game status, saving ON information in a high probability notification flag area when the special game is in a high probability state, and saving ON data of the high probability notification LED in a segment area.

The areas to be initialized in the power failure recovery process are the power failure inspection area, the checksum area, the setting change mode flag, the setting confirmation mode flag, and the area related to error fraud monitoring. In the power failure recovery process, the busy signal status area that stores the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 is in a state where it can accept commands, is also cleared, and the state is set to an indefinite state indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area that stores the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and the state is set to an indefinite state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal has not been determined.

Next, the control unit transmits a power failure recovery command corresponding to the special game processing number to the performance control board (performance control device 300) (step S59), and proceeds to step S60. In step S59, the model designation command, the special game 1 reservation number command, the special game 2 reservation number command,
A number of commands, such as probability information commands, probability setting value information commands, and screen designation commands, are transmitted. In addition to these commands, some models may transmit information on the number of performances and high probability number of times. Note that the screen designation command refers to a command that is issued when the control state of the special chart 1 variable display game and the special chart 2 variable display game is in normal processing (changing, hitting the jackpot (first special game state),
If the game is in either of the following states (i.e., during a small win (second special game state) or during a small win (second special game state)), this is a command to instruct the display of a customer waiting demo screen, and if the game is in any other state, this is a command to instruct the display of a recovery screen.

In step S60, the control unit performs a process to start and set up the random number generation circuit. After that, the control unit extracts the values of the predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on, and saves them in a predetermined area of the RWM as the initial values (start values) of the corresponding initial value random numbers (big win symbol initial value random number, small win symbol initial value random number, win initial value random number, win symbol initial value random number) (step S61), and then permits an interrupt (step S62).

Next, the control unit performs an initial value random number update process (step S63) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers to break the regularity of the random numbers. This initial value random number update process is a process for updating (incrementing) each initial value random number by, for example, "+1". In this way, the gaming machine 10 is able to increase the randomness of the random numbers by continuing to update the initial value random numbers as long as time permits in the main process.

Here, the control unit temporarily prohibits interrupts (step S64), executes the performance display editing process (step S65), and permits interrupts after the performance display editing process is executed (step S66). The performance display editing process is a process related to the calculation and display of the base. Since the processing load of the performance display editing process is relatively high, the control unit prohibits interrupts to derive the processing results more quickly. This ensures that the gaming machine 10 derives the processing results of the performance display editing process before the game state is updated by the timer interrupt.

In step S67, the control unit determines whether or not a power outage has occurred.
The occurrence of a power outage can be determined by detecting the power outage monitoring signal continuously for a predetermined period of time. If a power outage has occurred, the control unit proceeds to step S41. If a power outage has not occurred, the control unit returns to step S42.
Go to 63.

That is, the control unit repeatedly executes the processes from step S63 to step S67 unless a power outage occurs. In detail, when a power outage does not occur, the control unit repeatedly executes the initial value random number update process, the performance display editing process, and the check of the power outage monitoring signal (loop process).

Then, before the initial value random number update process (step S63), an interrupt is permitted (step S
66), when a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is executed with priority, thereby preventing the interrupt process from being overwhelmed by the timer interrupt being made to wait by the initial value random number update process.

Similarly, before the performance display editing process (step S65), interrupts are inhibited (step S6
4) By doing so, the performance display editing process takes precedence over timer interrupts,
This makes it possible to avoid putting pressure on the performance display editing process.

From the above, the system is structured as follows: a main control means (game control device 100) controls the game in an integrated manner; and a sub control means (payout control device 200,
In a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (such as a performance control device 300), the main control means is equipped with a standby means (gaming control device 100) which, when the power is turned on, delays the start-up of the main control means and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the start-up of the slave control means, and a power outage monitoring means (gaming control device 100) which monitors the occurrence of a power outage during the predetermined standby time.

The system also includes a power supply unit 400 that supplies power to various devices, and the power supply unit 400 is configured to output a power outage monitoring signal when it detects the occurrence of a power outage, and the power outage monitoring means (game control device 100) is configured to determine that a power outage has occurred when it continues to receive the power outage monitoring signal for a predetermined period of time.

In addition, the main control means (game control device 100) includes a RAM 111C capable of storing data,
The device is equipped with an initialization operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) that can be operated from outside, and initialization means (game control device 100) that initializes data stored in RAM 111C based on the operation of the initialization operation unit, and the operation status of the initialization operation unit is read before the start of the standby time.

In addition, the game control device 100 has a function (first initialization means, second initialization means) to distinguish between initialization processing when a data abnormality occurs (first initialization processing) and initialization processing during an initialization operation (second initialization processing), thereby enabling optimal and efficient initialization processing according to the situation to be realized.

In addition, the main control means (game control device 100) includes a RAM 111C capable of storing data,
A setting operation section that can be operated from the outside (a setting value change switch 126, a setting key switch 12
7) and a setting change means (game control device 100) that changes the setting value stored in RAM 111C based on the operation of the setting operation unit, thereby enabling the setting to be changed, and a setting display unit (probability setting value display device 136) that enables the setting (setting value) to be confirmed. In addition, the main control means (game control device 100) changes the setting value stored in RAM 111C after the waiting time has elapsed.
This means that access to 111C is permitted.

In addition, the main control means (game control device 100) prohibits access to the RAM (RAM 111C) (step S47) and waits for the execution of all processes to stop.
It is possible to execute a RAM abnormality standby process (loop after step S47), which allows access to the RAM (RAM 111C) (step S17) while waiting for the execution of all processes to stop (loop of steps S31 and S32).

Here, the standby process when a power failure occurs and the standby process when a RAM abnormality occurs will be described. The standby process when a power failure occurs is executed after access to the RAM is prohibited in step S47 of the main process, and is a loop process that waits for the execution of all processes to stop. In addition, the standby process when a power failure occurs is executed after interrupts are prohibited in step S41 of the main process, so interrupts other than NMI interrupts (timer interrupts) are prohibited. Note that the standby process when a power failure occurs does not include an NMI.
Since interrupts cannot be prohibited, an NMI interrupt may occur. However, since the standby process at the time of power outage is a process executed when a power outage occurs, there is little risk of an NMI interrupt occurring during execution of the process. Furthermore, the standby process at the time of power outage is a standby process that does not involve an abnormality notification. This allows the gaming machine 10 to allocate the power it has used up until the power cutoff to the power outage process. Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 reduces the risk of the memory contents of the RAM being changed due to unstable voltage by prohibiting access to the RAM during the standby process at the time of power outage.

The RAM abnormality standby process is executed after access to the RAM (RWM) is permitted in step S17 of the main process, and is a loop process that waits for the execution of all processes to stop.
In addition, the RAM abnormality standby process is executed after interrupts are inhibited in step S1 of the main process, so interrupts other than NMI interrupts (timer interrupts) are inhibited. Note that the power outage standby process cannot inhibit NMI interrupts, so
Since the RAM abnormality standby process is a process for waiting for a power cut, there is a greater risk of an NMI interrupt occurring during execution of this process than with the power failure standby process.
However, in the RAM abnormality standby process, even if an NMI interrupt occurs, access to the RAM is permitted, so the return address can be stored in the RAM, and the risk of program runaway due to the occurrence of an NMI interrupt is small. Also, since the gaming machine 10 transmits a main abnormality error notification command to the presentation control device 300 in step S30, the presentation control device 300 can notify the abnormality in parallel while the RAM abnormality standby process is being executed. This allows the gaming machine 10 to be quickly restarted.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt process of the game control device 100 will be described with reference to FIG.
1 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process of the first embodiment. This timer interrupt process is performed during the period from when interrupt permission is issued to when interrupts are prohibited in the above-mentioned main process (from step S38 to step S41, from step S38 to step S55, from step S66 to step S64, and from step S66 to step S41).
The timer interrupt process is executed by the CPU 111A.

The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by a CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111 A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, first, register bank 1 is specified (step S7
1). Switching to register bank 1 is equivalent to performing a register save process in which the value held in a specific register (for example, a register used in the main process) is moved to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a specific register (for example, the D register) (step S72). In step S72, the same process as in step S4 in the main process is performed, but the register bank is different.

Next, input processing (step S73) is performed to receive inputs from various sensors and switches and to capture signals, i.e., to read the status of each input port. In step S74, the control unit refers to the setting change mode flag and the setting confirmation mode flag to determine whether the device is in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. If the device is in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the control unit proceeds to step S75, executes the setting change/confirmation processing, and ends the timer interrupt processing. On the other hand, if the device is not in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the control unit proceeds to step S76.

In step S76, the control unit executes output processing to perform drive control of actuators such as solenoids (the large prize opening solenoid 38b, the normal power solenoid 37c) based on the output data set in the various processes.

In addition, when a firing stop signal is output in step S5 in the main process, a firing permission signal is output by performing this output process, and the firing permission signal is set to a permitted state. This firing permission signal is output to the firing control device via the payout control device. At that time, no processing of the signal is performed. In addition, the firing permission signal is output to the game control device 1.
The first signal indicates the state of launch permission as seen from the payout control device 200, and the second signal (launch permission signal) indicates the state of launch permission as seen from the payout control device 200. The second signal (launch permission signal) is also generated within the payout control device 200 and output to the launch control device. In other words, two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device.
When both are permitted to be launched, the game ball is configured to be in a state in which it can be launched.

Next, the control unit transmits the commands set in the transmission buffer by various processes to the dispensing control device 20.
0 (step S77), random number update process 1 (step S7
8), execute random number update process 2 (step S79). Here, random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial values (start values) of the big win pattern random number, small win pattern random number, win random number, and win pattern random number that are the targets of the initial value random number update process. Also, random number update process 2 is
This is a process for updating the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of special chart 1 and special chart 2. Note that the random number update process 1, or the random number update process 2 in addition to the random number update process 1, may be configured to stop the random number update during the setting change or change the update cycle.

Next, the control unit controls the start gate 1 switch 36a, the start gate 2 switch 37a, the normal gate switch 34a, the prize gate switch 35a, the big prize gate switch 38a, and the specific area switch 38
The winning port switch/status monitoring process (step S80) monitors whether there is a normal signal input from the winning port 36a and whether there is an error (whether the front frame or glass frame is open, etc.). Also, a starting port switch monitoring process (step S81) monitors the winning of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a. In the starting port switch monitoring process, when a game ball wins in the starting port 36 that is the first starting port or the normal variable winning device 37 that is the second starting port, various random numbers (jackpot random numbers, etc.) are extracted, and a game result advance judgment is performed to determine the game result based on the winning in advance at a stage before the start of the special chart variable display game.

Next, the control unit performs a special chart 1 game process (step S82) for processing the special chart 1 variable display game, a special chart 2 game process (step S83) for processing the special chart 2 variable display game, and a normal chart game process (step S
84).

Next, a segment LED (for example, an LED such as a special pattern 1 display unit 53 of the collective display unit 50) is provided in the gaming machine 10 and displays the special pattern change display game and various information related to the game.
D) to display desired content (step S85)
), a magnet irregularity monitoring process (step S86) for checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61 to determine whether there is an abnormality, and a panel radio wave irregularity monitoring process (step S87) for checking the detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62 to determine whether there is an abnormality. Then, an external information editing process (step S88) for setting signals to be output to various external devices in an output buffer, and a performance display device control process (step S89) are performed, and the timer interrupt process is terminated.

In the first embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt inhibited state (i.e., the process of permitting an interrupt) and the process of restoring the register bank designation (i.e., the process of designating register bank 0) are automatically performed at the time of interrupt return (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Note that, depending on the CPU used, there are gaming machines that require an instruction to execute the process of restoring the interrupt inhibited state and the process of restoring the register bank designation.

[Main processing]
Next, the main processing of the performance control device 300 will be described with reference to Fig. 12. Fig. 12 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the main processing in the performance control device of the first embodiment.

The main processing is processing executed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the performance control device 300 when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started.
[Step D11] The control unit prohibits interrupts.

[Step D12] The control unit performs initial settings for the CPU 311.
[Step D13] The control unit performs initial settings for the VDP 312.
[Step D14] The control unit permits the interrupt.

[Step D15] The control unit permits the generation of display data.
A display circuit (not shown) in the DP 312 is permitted to access a VRAM (not shown) in the VDP 312 to generate display data.

[Step D16] The control unit sets a random number seed. This is a process of setting a pseudo-random number generation sequence using, for example, the srand function. Here, the control unit may use a fixed value such as 0 (zero) as an argument to the srand function, or may use a value created based on an ID value of the CPU or the like so as to be different for each gaming machine.

[Step D17] The control unit controls the RWM (for example, RAM 322) of the performance control device 300.
The initial value at the time of power-on is saved in an area to be initialized (for example, a performance flag area (a memory area used as various flags described later in the control processing of the performance control device 300)).

[Step D18] The control unit clears the WDT (watchdog timer).
[Step D19] The control unit executes the effect button input process. The effect button input process is a process for editing when the effect button 25 (effect button switch 25a) is operated while it is enabled. Since the effect button does not turn on and off at high speed, the control unit may perform the process of detecting the effect button input within the effect button input process, or may perform the process within a short-period timer interruption (not shown).

[Step D20] The control unit executes a hall/player setting mode process. The hall/player setting mode process includes setting the changeable range of the brightness and volume of the LED and the display device 41,
This is a process for accepting operations by the player such as changing the brightness of the LED or display device 41 and the volume.

[Step D21] The control unit executes a random number update process.
This is a process that uses the and function to update the pseudo-random number at least once for each control cycle of the main process. The rand function generates a random number based on a specified generation sequence each time a recalculation is performed, so the control unit can obtain a random number simply by executing the rand function. Note that a counter that increments by "1" like the main board (game control device 100) may be used as the random number.

[Step D22] The control unit executes a received command check process, which is a process for analyzing the commands received from the game control device 100 in units of a predetermined number.

[Step D23] The control unit executes a performance display editing process.
This process sets various commands and their parameters for instructing the DP 312 on the contents to be rendered on the display device 41. For example, the control unit sets commands in a table format in the performance display editing process.

[Step D24] The control unit executes drawing command preparation end setting. The drawing command preparation end setting is a process for setting that preparation of all commands to the VDP 312 set in the performance display editing process has been completed.

[Step D25] The control unit judges whether or not it is frame switching timing. If it is frame switching timing, the process proceeds to step D26. If it is not frame switching timing, the control unit waits for frame switching timing. Here, the frame switching timing is determined by a V blank interrupt (
The V blank interrupt occurs at a time interval equivalent to a processing period (e.g., 1/30 seconds ≈ 33.333 ms) created based on the period (e.g., 1/60 seconds) of the V blank interrupt (also called a V sync interrupt). The V blank interrupt occurs each time the VDP 312 completes one scan of the entire screen for drawing. As mentioned above, the generation period of this V blank interrupt is, for example, 1/60 seconds. In this embodiment, when the same drawing is repeated twice and a V blank interrupt occurs twice, frame switching is performed, and the period of the frame switching timing is twice the period (e.g., 1/60 seconds) of the V blank interrupt.
However, the present invention is not limited to this embodiment, and the frame switching timing can be changed as desired. For example, frame switching (updating of images) may be performed at intervals of 1/30 seconds or more, or at intervals of less than 1/30 seconds.

Due to the frame switching timing determination process, subsequent processes (steps D26 to D30, and subsequent steps D18 to D24) are executed at this frame switching timing for each processing cycle. Time management that needs to be synchronized with the presentation content is performed in frame units (i.e., in processing cycle units). If the processing cycle is 1/30 seconds, for example, 3 frames will be 100 ms. This is similar to the main board (game control device) managing time values in 4 ms units of timer interrupt cycles.

[Step D26] The control unit controls VDP3 according to the command set in step D23.
For example, the control unit sequentially transmits commands set in a table to instruct the VDP 312 to draw on the screen.

[Step D27] The control unit executes a sound control process to control the volume of the sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b).

[Step D28] The control unit executes a decoration control process. The decoration control process is a process for controlling various LEDs of the board decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18, etc.
[Step D29] The control unit executes a movable body control process to control movable bodies (for example, the board effect device 44) including various motors and solenoids (SOLs).

[Step D30] The control unit executes a firing information control process. The firing information control process is a process for setting firing-related information based on the firing state flag and correcting the mode of the performance according to the special chart rotation state (the number of times the special chart changes per game for a predetermined amount of money (i.e., a predetermined number of loaned balls)).

[Step D31] The control unit executes an information disclosure process, which is a process for disclosing performance information relating to gaming performance to a player.
After executing step D31, the control unit returns to step D18, and thereafter,
The processes of steps D8 to D31 are repeatedly executed.
31 is a loop process (
This constitutes the main loop processing.

The control unit executes the processes of steps D27 to D29 in the main loop process to match the screen presentation, but the process of actually outputting the signals and data (particularly signals for driving and controlling various LEDs and motors, etc.) generated or set in these control processes to the ports is performed in a short-period timer interrupt (not shown). However, when an IC specialized for controlling various devices is used, there are cases where the signal output is not performed by the timer interrupt, but is simply instructed by serial communication, etc.

Next, the display executed by the performance control device 300 during play of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to Fig. 13. Fig. 13 is a diagram (part 1) showing an example of a display screen during play of the first embodiment. Here, the display screen (sometimes simply called a "screen") is a screen consisting of one or a plurality of images displayed in the display area of the display device 41, and in principle, different reference symbols are used for different display contents.

The display screen 500 shown in FIG. 13(1) is a display screen during the stop of the pattern, and displays the pattern which is the result of the variable display game for a predetermined period after the variable display in the variable display game ends (before the next variable display game starts). The display screen 500 displays a large pattern group 501, a small pattern group 502, a special pattern 1 reserved number display 503, a special pattern 2 reserved number display 504, and a reserved display 505.
and a pending completion display 506 is displayed.

The large symbol group 501 is responsible for the game presentation for the purpose of increasing interest.
01 is displayed large with a variable display area set in the approximate center of the display device 41. The large symbol group 501 includes a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol.

On the display screen 500, the left symbol indicates that the symbol is stopped at "3", and the center symbol indicates that the symbol is stopped at "3".
The right image indicates that the symbol is stopped at "5", and the left image indicates that the symbol is stopped at "7". That is, on the display screen 500, the large symbol group 501 indicates that the special symbol variation display game is in a stopped state (symbols are stopped).

The small symbol group 502 is responsible for informing the player of the variable display state in order to improve the ease of understanding of the game state of the player. Therefore, the small symbol group 502 is displayed small on the periphery of the display device 41 so as to ensure visibility without interfering with the display performance by the large symbol group 501. The small symbol group 502 is
The left, middle, and right symbols are included in the small symbol group 502. In the display screen 500, the left, middle, and right symbols constituting the small symbol group 502 all indicate that the corresponding special symbol variation display game is in a stopped state.

In general, the large symbol group 501 is displayed larger than the small symbol group 502, has a high degree of freedom in the display position, and the display mode can be changed greatly. Conversely, the small symbol group 502 is displayed smaller than the large symbol group 501, and has a low degree of freedom in the display position (for example, the position is fixed).

The special number display 503 displays the number of reserved memories for the special game 1. In the display screen 500, the special number display 503 indicates that the number of reserved memories for the special game 1 is "3".
The special number of reserved games 2 display 504 displays the number of reserved games for the special number of games 2. In the display screen 500, the special number of reserved games 2 display 504 indicates that the number of reserved games for the special number of games 2 is "0".

The reserved display 505 shows how the reserved icon 507 is displayed in a number corresponding to the reserved number of the special game in accordance with the current game state (for example, the normal game state).
The reserved icon 507 is, for example, spherical, and the reserved icon 507 can also be animated (for example, deformed, changed in color, moved up and down, etc.) to create a dynamic display. The reserved consumption display 506 shows how the reserved consumption icon 508 corresponding to the reserved consumption of the special game is displayed. The reserved consumption icon 508 is, for example, spherical, and the reserved consumption icon 50
8 can also be used to create a dynamic display using animation (e.g. deformation, color change, up and down movement, etc.).

For example, when the special number display 503 of reserved special figures 1 displays "3" and the special number display 504 of reserved special figures 2 displays "0" as shown on the display screen 500, the reserved display 505 indicates that the reserved number of memories is "3" by displaying three reserved memories. Note that the reserved number or reserved memory number means the number of start memories in which the variable display game of the special figure has not been executed.

The hold display 505 may be displayed in the following manner (hold memory display shown on the hold display 505):
The number of reserved memories for the special chart change display game is indicated, and the expectation for the game result for each reserved memory is notified.

The reserved consumption display 506 can indicate whether the special chart variable display game is in a variable display state and can notify the expectation for the game result depending on its display mode. On the display screen 500, the reserved consumption display 506 shows that the special chart variable display game is in a stopped state by leaving the frame blank. After this, the gaming machine 10 starts the variable display.

In addition, the reserved display 505 displays either the reserved number of the special game 1 or the reserved number of the special game 2 according to the game status by the reserved icon 507.
The total number of reserved games and the number of reserved special chart 2 games may be displayed by the reserved icon 507.

The display screen 510 shown in Fig. 13 (2) is a display screen after the start of the variable display. The display screen 510 is a screen after the display screen 500, and shows a screen during the variable display (three patterns variable). In the display screen 510, the left pattern, the middle pattern, and the right pattern of the large pattern group 501 are variable, indicating that the special pattern variable display game is variable. Also, in the display screen 510, the left pattern, the middle pattern, and the right pattern of the small pattern group 502 are variable, indicating that the special pattern variable display game is variable.

On the display screen 510, the special chart 1 reserved number display 503 indicates that the reserved memory number of the special chart 1 game is "2".
The special chart 2 reserved number display 504 indicates that the reserved memory number of the special chart 2 game is "0", the reserved display 505 is a game state that informs the reserved number of the special chart 1 game, and indicates that the reserved memory number of the special chart variable display game (special chart 1 game) is "2". Also, on the display screen 510, the reserved consumption display 506 displays the reserved memory display being consumed, and indicates that the special chart variable display game is being displayed as a variable.

In addition, display screen 500 and display screen 510 may include display elements such as background display, character display, and text display (not shown), and the display elements may also be capable of producing a display with movement through animation or the like.

Here, the decorative pattern (decorative pattern) will be described with reference to Fig. 14. Fig. 14 is a diagram showing an example of the decorative pattern of the first embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 has decorative symbols (large symbols) (described later) that are made up of a left symbol, a right symbol, and a center symbol, and stops the left symbol, the right symbol, and the center symbol in this order during the symbol variation. The gaming machine 10 is capable of displaying decorative symbols A and B as decorative symbols.

For example, the gaming machine 10 can use decorative pattern A for the left and right symbols that can form a symbol combination that results in a reach, and decorative pattern B for the center symbol that can form a symbol combination that results in a jackpot after the reach is formed. Alternatively, the gaming machine 10 can use decorative pattern A in a normal gaming state, and decorative pattern B in a high probability gaming state or an electric support gaming state.

The decorative pattern A includes patterns 521, 522, 523, 524, 525, 526, and 527. The patterns 521, 522, 523, 524, 525, 526, and 527 are each distinguishable from the other patterns by their different display modes. The decorative pattern A includes two or more pattern components, at least one of which has a distinctiveness that makes it possible to distinguish it from the other patterns. The decorative pattern A is a decorative pattern that includes one character (number) and displays the character as a distinctive pattern component.

Design 521 is a design that displays the number "1". Design 521 includes background portion 521d and number portion 521n. Background portion 521d has a rectangular outer shape and a design that is distinctive as a design (for example, a white circle shape). Number portion 521n has distinctiveness as a design.

The design 522 is a design that displays the number "2". The design 522 includes a background portion 522d and a number portion 522n. The background portion 522d has a rectangular outer shape and a design that is distinguishable as a design (for example, a white cross shape). The number portion 522n has distinguishability as a design.

Design 523 is a design that displays the number "3". Design 523 includes background portion 523d and number portion 523n. Background portion 523d has a rectangular outer shape and a design that is distinctive as a design (for example, a white square shape). Number portion 523n has distinctiveness as a design.

Design 524 is a design that displays the number "4". Design 524 includes background portion 524d and number portion 524n. Background portion 524d has a rectangular outer shape and a design that is distinctive as a design (for example, a white double circle shape). Number portion 524n has distinctiveness as a design.

Design 525 is a design that displays the number "5". Design 525 includes background portion 525d and number portion 525n. Background portion 525d has a rectangular outer shape and a design that is distinctive as a design (for example, a white triangular shape). Number portion 525n has distinctiveness as a design.

Design 526 is a design that displays the number "6". Design 526 includes background portion 526d and number portion 526n. Background portion 526d has a rectangular outer shape and a design that is distinctive as a design (for example, a white diamond shape). Number portion 526n has distinctiveness as a design.

Design 527 is a design that displays the number "7". Design 527 includes background portion 527d and number portion 527n. Background portion 527d has a rectangular outer shape and a design that is distinctive as a design (for example, a white star shape). Number portion 527n has distinctiveness as a design.

The decorative pattern B includes patterns 531, 532, 533, 534, 535, 536, and 537. The patterns 531, 532, 533, 534, 535, 536, and 537 are each distinguishable from the other patterns by their different display modes. The decorative pattern B includes one pattern component, and the one pattern component has a distinctiveness that makes it possible to distinguish it from the other patterns. The decorative pattern B includes one character (number), and is a decorative pattern that displays the character as a distinctive pattern component.

The design 531 is a design that displays the number "1". The design 532 is a design that displays the number "2". The design 533 is a design that displays the number "3". The design 534 is a design that displays the number "
The pattern 535 is a pattern that displays the number "5".
The symbol 6 represents the number "6." The symbol 537 represents the number "7."

Next, a variable display example using the decorative symbol A and a variable display example using the decorative symbol B will be described with reference to FIG. 15. FIG. 15 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during a game in the first embodiment (
Number 2).

15(1) shows a display screen 512 in which the decorative symbol A is temporarily stopped. In the display screen 512, the large symbol group 501 oscillates the symbol 523 (left), the symbol 525 (middle), and the symbol 527 (right) to temporarily stop the combination of the left symbol "3", the middle symbol "5", and the right symbol "7".

In addition, the display screen 512 indicates that the left, middle, and right patterns of the small pattern group 502 are changing, and the special pattern change display game is changing. Also, in the display screen 512, the special pattern 1 reserved number display 503 indicates that the reserved memory number of the special pattern 1 game is "2", the special pattern 2 reserved number display 504 indicates that the reserved memory number of the special pattern 2 game is "0", and the reserved display 50
5 is a game state that informs the reserved number of the special chart 1 game, and indicates that the reserved memory number of the special chart variable display game (special chart 1 game) is "2". Also, on the display screen 512, the reserved consumption display 506 displays the reserved memory display being consumed, and indicates that the special chart variable display game is being displayed.

15(2) shows a display screen 514 in which the decorative symbol B is temporarily stopped. In the display screen 514, the large symbol group 501 oscillates the symbol 533 (left), the symbol 535 (middle), and the symbol 537 (right) to temporarily stop the combination of the left symbol "3", the middle symbol "5", and the right symbol "7".

In addition, the display screen 514 shows that the left, middle, and right patterns of the small pattern group 502 are changing, and the special pattern change display game is changing. Also, in the display screen 514, the special pattern 1 reserved number display 503 shows that the reserved memory number of the special pattern 1 game is "0", the special pattern 2 reserved number display 504 shows that the reserved memory number of the special pattern 2 game is "2", and the reserved display 50
5 is a game state that informs the reserved number of the special chart 2 game, and indicates that the reserved memory number of the special chart variable display game (special chart 2 game) is "2". Also, on the display screen 514, the reserved consumption display 506 displays the reserved memory display being consumed, and indicates that the special chart variable display game is being displayed.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can perform a temporary stop display using the decorative symbol A and a temporary stop display using the decorative symbol B. Next, a more detailed display mode of the decorative symbols A and B during the temporary stop display will be described with reference to Fig. 16. Fig. 16 is a diagram showing an example of the temporary stop display using the decorative symbol of the first embodiment.

16(1) shows a temporary stop display mode of a symbol 527 as an example of a decorative symbol A during a temporary stop display. The temporary stop display mode of the symbol 527 is (a), (b), (c), and (d) that are periodically repeated.

In the temporarily stopped display of the pattern 527, the background portion 527d is fixed, and the number portion 527n having the distinguishability as the pattern 527 swings in the left-right direction. Note that the background portion 527d is not limited to a still image, and may be an animated display with movement.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 emphasizes the swinging of the number portion in contrast to the background portion, realizing a temporary stop display that is easy for the player to grasp. Note that the gaming machine 10 emphasizes the outline display of the number portion to make it easier to contrast the background portion and the number portion.

16(2) shows a provisional stop display mode of a symbol 537 as an example of a decorative symbol B during provisional stop display. The provisional stop display mode of the symbol 537 is (a), (b), (c), and (d) which are repeated periodically.

The symbol 537 during the temporary stop display swings left and right (first temporary stop operation).
While rotating, the vertical axis is rotated within a range of a predetermined angle (second temporary stop operation).
The provisional stop display mode is a combination of two types of provisional stop actions.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can easily understand the temporary stop state for the player by emphasizing the temporary stop motion of the entire pattern, while suppressing the disruption of the game performance. Note that the gaming machine 10 makes the outline display of the pattern vague (non-emphasized) in order to emphasize the temporary stop motion of the entire pattern.

Although the temporary stop display mode of the pattern 537 is a combination of two types of temporary stop actions, it may be a combination of three types of temporary stop actions including deformation actions, or a combination of four or more types of temporary stop actions.

In addition, the entire pattern (for example, pattern 537) or pattern components (for example, the numeral part 5
The rocking motion in 27n) is not limited to a rocking motion in the narrow sense, but includes a periodic motion that can be perceived as a temporary stop motion. For example, a vertical axis rotation within a range of a predetermined angle, a deformation motion that repeats a predetermined pattern, etc. are included in the rocking motion in the temporary stop motion.

In addition, the temporary stop motion of pattern 527 during the temporary stop display is described as a temporary stop motion in which the number portion 527n swings left and right, but it may also be a temporary stop motion in which the pattern 537 during the temporary stop display rotates on the vertical axis within a predetermined angle range, which is one of the two types of temporary stop motions of the temporary stop motion.

In addition, while decorative pattern B (e.g., pattern 537) during the temporary stop display is described as swinging the entire pattern left and right (first temporary stop action) while rotating on the vertical axis within a predetermined angle range (second temporary stop action), this is not limited to this as long as it includes a temporary stop action of a different type from the pattern components (e.g., number portion 527n) of decorative pattern A (e.g., pattern 527) during the temporary stop display.
For example, when the temporary stop action of the symbol 527 in the temporary stop display is a temporary stop action of swinging the number part 527n in the left-right direction, the temporary stop action of the symbol 537 in the temporary stop display may include a temporary stop action of rotating on the vertical axis within a range of a predetermined angle, which is different from the temporary stop action of swinging in the left-right direction. In this case, the temporary stop action of the symbol 537 in the temporary stop display may include only the temporary stop action of rotating on the vertical axis within a range of a predetermined angle, or may additionally include a temporary stop action of swinging in the left-right direction, or may include other temporary stop actions. Even in this way, the gaming machine 10 clearly distinguishes between the temporary stop action of the decorative symbol A and the temporary stop action of the decorative symbol B, and realizes a temporary stop action that is easy for the player to understand even if the decorative symbol has a variety of forms.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 emphasizes the outline of the number part of the decorative pattern A during the temporary stop display and blurs the outline of the pattern of the decorative pattern B during the temporary stop display.
This can be achieved by making the outline of the number part of the symbol B thicker than the outline of the symbol B of the temporary stop display. Moreover, the emphasis or non-emphasis of the outline may be achieved not only by the thickness of the outline, but also by the saturation or brightness, or may be achieved by a combination of the thickness of the outline and the saturation or brightness. Moreover, the thickness of the outline is not limited to an absolute thickness, but may also be achieved by the pattern width (
Alternatively, it may be defined by the ratio of the width of the numeral part to the width of the numeral part.

In the above description, the background portion of the decorative pattern A during the temporary stop display is fixed and the number portion swings left and right, but the background portion may swing.
An example of the rocking of the background part of the decorative pattern A during the temporary stop display of the first embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 17. Fig. 17 is a diagram showing an example of the rocking of the background part of the decorative pattern A during the temporary stop display of the first embodiment. Note that the rocking shown below is not limited to a rocking motion in one direction, and may be an axial rotation, a deformation, or the like.

The pattern 527 shown in FIG. 17(1) is a base portion 52 that does not have the distinctive feature of the pattern 527.
7b and a symbol portion 527s having distinguishability as a pattern 527.
The pattern 527 shown in FIG. 17(1) comprises a base portion 527b and a symbol portion 527
s and the numeral portion 527n swing together in the left-right direction, that is, with the same period, phase and displacement.

The design 527 shown in FIG. 17(2) has a base portion 527b fixed and a symbol portion 527s
That is, the pattern 527 shown in FIG.
The symbol portion 527s and the number portion 527n oscillate in the left-right direction with the same period, phase and displacement.
In addition, the symbol portion 527s and the number portion 527n may not necessarily have the same period, the same phase, and the same displacement while both oscillating in the left-right direction. For example, the symbol portion 527s and the number portion 527n may have different periods, different phases, and different displacements while both oscillating in the left-right direction. In addition, the symbol portion 527s and the number portion 527n may have two or more different periods, phases, and displacements. In addition, the base portion 527b is not limited to a still image, and may be one that displays an animation with movement. In addition, the base portion 527b may be one that oscillates independently of the symbol portion 527s and the number portion 527n.

The design 527 shown in FIG. 17(3) has a base portion 527b fixed and a symbol portion 527s
The symbol portion 527s and the number portion 527n swing vertically, and the number portion 527n swings horizontally. That is, in the design 527 shown in FIG. 17(3), the symbol portion 527s and the number portion 527n swing in different ways. Note that, even though the symbol portion 527s and the number portion 527n swing in different ways, they may have the same cycle and phase, or may have different cycles and phases. Also, the base portion 527b
The image is not limited to a still image, but may be an animated image.
In addition, the base portion 527b may be configured to swing independently of the symbol portion 527s and the number portion 527n.

Here, the temporary stop mode of the decorative pattern A will be illustrated with reference to Fig. 18. Fig. 18 is a diagram showing an example of the temporary stop mode of the decorative pattern A of the first embodiment. The temporary stop mode of the decorative pattern A shown in Fig. 18 (1) is such that the displacement direction of the numeral part is the left-right direction, the displacement period is 500 ms,
The amount of displacement is set to 10% of the pattern width (for example, 80 pixels when the pattern width is 800 pixels). Also, the decorative pattern A temporary stop mode shown in Fig. 18 (1) fixes the base part and the symbol part. Note that, although the amount of displacement of the number part is set to 10% of the pattern width, the amount of displacement of the number part may be set to 10% of the width of the number part (for example, 20 pixels when the width of the number part is 200 pixels).

In another example of the decorative pattern A temporary stop mode shown in FIG. 18(2), the displacement direction of the number part, base part, and symbol part is the left-right direction, the displacement period is 500 ms, and the displacement amount is 1 with respect to the pattern width.
0% (for example, 80 pixels when the design width is 800 pixels).

In another example of the decorative pattern A temporary stop mode shown in FIG. 18(3), the displacement direction of the number part is the left-right direction, the displacement period is 500 ms, and the displacement amount is 10% of the pattern width (for example, 80 pixels when the pattern width is 800 pixels).
Another example of the temporary stop mode is that the direction of movement for the base part and the symbol part is the same left-right direction as the number part, the displacement period is 1000 ms which is different from (larger than) the number part, and the displacement amount is 15% of the pattern width which is different from (larger than) the number part (for example, 120 pixels when the pattern width is 800 pixels).

In another example of the decorative pattern A temporary stop mode shown in FIG. 18(4), the displacement direction of the number part is the left-right direction, the displacement period is 500 ms, and the displacement amount is 10% of the pattern width (for example, 80 pixels when the pattern width is 800 pixels).
Another example of the temporary stop mode is that the displacement direction of the base part is the same left-right direction as the number part, the displacement period is 1000 ms different from (larger than) the number part, and the displacement amount is 15% of the pattern width different from (larger than) the number part (for example, 15% when the pattern width is 800 pixels).
In another example of the decorative pattern A temporary stop mode shown in Fig. 18 (4), the direction of change of the symbol portion is vertical, which is different from that of the number portion, the period of change is 400 ms, which is different from that of the number portion (shorter than that of the number portion), and the amount of change is 10% of the same pattern width as that of the number portion.

Next, highlighting and ambiguous (non-highlighting) display of the outline of a pattern will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 19 is a diagram showing highlighted and ambiguous (non-highlighted) display of the outline of a pattern in the first embodiment.

Figure 19(1) shows the pattern width and contour line of decorative pattern A and decorative pattern B, and Figure 19(2) shows a comparison of the contour line thickness of decorative pattern A and decorative pattern B. Decorative pattern A has a pattern width of w1, a width of the numeral portion of w2 (<w1), and a width (thickness) of the contour line of the numeral portion of w3 (<w2).
The decorative pattern B has a pattern width of w4 and a width (thickness) of the outline of the pattern of w5 (<w4).

The game machine 10 makes the width w3 of the contour line of the number part of the decorative pattern A larger than the width w5 of the contour line of the decorative pattern B, thereby making the player aware that the contour display of the number part of the decorative pattern A is emphasized and the contour display of the decorative pattern B is blurred.

The gaming machine 10 may also realize the emphasis and non-emphasis of the outline display by the ratio of the pattern width to the outline thickness (outline ratio). For example, the gaming machine 10 can make the player feel that the outline display of the number part of the decorative pattern A is emphasized and the outline display of the pattern of the decorative pattern B is blurred by making the outline ratio w3/w2 of the decorative pattern A larger than the outline ratio w5/w4 of the decorative pattern B.

The emphasis on the outline of the number part of the decorative pattern A and the de-emphasis on the outline of the pattern of the decorative pattern B are as follows:
It may be fixed at all times, or may be switchable according to the variable display state. Next, switching of the highlight state of the outline display according to the variable display state will be described with reference to Fig. 20. Fig. 20 is a diagram showing an example of the timing of highlighting and vague (non-highlighting) display of the outline of the pattern in the first embodiment.

FIG. 20(1) shows a comparison of the thickness of the outline of the number part of the decorative pattern A and the thickness of the outline of the entire pattern of the decorative pattern B according to the variable display state. During the variable display (non-temporarily stopped state), during the variable display (temporarily stopped state), and during the stopped display, the number part of the decorative pattern A is compared with the thickness of the outline of the decorative pattern B.
The outline display of the decorative pattern B is emphasized as compared with the entire pattern of the number portion of the decorative pattern A, and the outline display of the entire pattern of the decorative pattern B is made vague (de-emphasized) as compared with the number portion of the decorative pattern A.

FIG. 20(2) shows another example of a comparison between the thickness of the outline of the number portion of the decorative pattern A and the thickness of the outline of the entire pattern of the decorative pattern B according to the variable display state. During variable display (non-temporarily stopped state)
During the varying display (temporarily stopped state), the outline of the number portion of decorative pattern A is emphasized compared to the entire pattern of decorative pattern B, and the outline of the entire pattern of decorative pattern B is made vague (de-emphasized) compared to the number portion of decorative pattern A. Also, during the stopped display, the outline of the number portion of decorative pattern A is not emphasized compared to the entire pattern of decorative pattern B, and the outline of the entire pattern of decorative pattern B is not made vague (de-emphasized) compared to the number portion of decorative pattern A. In this way, the gaming machine 10 can perform appropriate emphasis or de-emphasis according to the varying display state by switching the emphasis state of the outline display according to the varying display state. Also, the gaming machine 10 can
By switching the highlight state of the outline display according to the variable display state, the player can easily sense the change in the highlight state of the outline display. In addition, the gaming machine 10 makes it easy to understand the temporary stop state while suppressing the disruption of the game performance, and can improve the visibility during the stop display.

FIG. 20(3) shows another example of a comparison between the thickness of the outline of the number part of the decorative pattern A and the thickness of the outline of the entire pattern of the decorative pattern B according to the variable display state. During the variable display (temporary stop state), the outline of the number part of the decorative pattern A is emphasized compared to the entire pattern of the decorative pattern B,
The outline of the entire symbol of decorative pattern B is made vague (de-emphasized) compared to the number portion of decorative pattern A. Furthermore, during variable display (non-temporary stop state) and stopped display, the outline of the number portion of decorative pattern A is not emphasized compared to the entire symbol of decorative pattern B, and the outline of the entire symbol of decorative pattern B is not made vague (de-emphasized) compared to the number portion of decorative pattern A. In this way, the gaming machine 10 makes it easy to grasp the temporary stop state while suppressing interference with the game presentation by emphasizing the outline only during variable display (temporary stop state).

Next, as a modification of the first embodiment, the outline display of the number part of the decorative pattern A is not emphasized,
A gaming machine 10 that emphasizes the outline display of the decorative symbol B will be described. Such a gaming machine 10 can more strongly appeal to the player the temporary stop action of the decorative symbol B.
In addition, such a gaming machine 10 prevents the number part of the decorative pattern A from being emphasized more than the base part and the symbol part, and can more strongly appeal to the player the temporary stop action in which the number part of the decorative pattern A has a sense of unity with the base part and the symbol part.

The de-emphasis of the outline of the number part of the decorative pattern A and the emphasis of the outline of the pattern of the decorative pattern B are as follows:
It may be fixed at all times, but may be switchable according to the variable display state. Next, switching of the highlight state of the outline display according to the variable display state will be described with reference to Fig. 21. Fig. 21 is a diagram showing an example of the timing of highlighting and vague (non-highlighting) display of the outline of the pattern in the modified example of the first embodiment.

FIG. 21(1) shows a comparison of the thickness of the outline of the number part of the decorative pattern A and the thickness of the outline of the entire pattern of the decorative pattern B according to the variable display state. During the variable display (non-temporarily stopped state), during the variable display (temporarily stopped state), and during the stopped display, the number part of the decorative pattern A is compared with the thickness of the outline of the decorative pattern B.
The outline display of the decorative pattern B is made vague (de-emphasized) compared with the entire pattern of the number part of the decorative pattern A, and the outline display of the entire pattern of the decorative pattern B is emphasized compared with the number part of the decorative pattern A.

FIG. 21 (2) shows another example of a comparison between the thickness of the outline of the number portion of the decorative pattern A and the thickness of the outline of the entire pattern of the decorative pattern B according to the variable display state. During variable display (non-temporarily stopped state)
During the varying display (temporarily stopped state), the outline of the number portion of decorative pattern A is made vague (de-emphasized) compared to the entire pattern of decorative pattern B, and the outline of the entire pattern of decorative pattern B is emphasized compared to the number portion of decorative pattern A. Also, during the stopped display, the outline of the number portion of decorative pattern A is not made vague (de-emphasized) compared to the entire pattern of decorative pattern B, and the outline of the entire pattern of decorative pattern B is not emphasized compared to the number portion of decorative pattern A. In this way, the gaming machine 10 can perform appropriate emphasis or de-emphasis according to the varying display state by switching the emphasis state of the outline display according to the varying display state. Also, the gaming machine 10 can
By switching the highlight state of the outline display according to the variable display state, the player can easily sense the change in the highlight state of the outline display. In addition, the gaming machine 10 makes it easy to understand the temporary stop state while suppressing the disruption of the game performance, and can improve the visibility during the stop display.

21(3) shows another example of a comparison between the thickness of the outline display of the number part of the decorative pattern A and the thickness of the outline display of the entire pattern of the decorative pattern B according to the variable display state. During the variable display (temporary stop state), the outline display of the number part of the decorative pattern A is made vague (not emphasized) compared to the entire pattern of the decorative pattern B, and the outline display of the entire pattern of the decorative pattern B is emphasized compared to the number part of the decorative pattern A. Also, during the variable display (non-temporary stop state) and the stopped display, the outline display of the number part of the decorative pattern A is not made vague (not emphasized) compared to the entire pattern of the decorative pattern B, and the outline display of the entire pattern of the decorative pattern B is not emphasized compared to the number part of the decorative pattern A. In this way, the gaming machine 10 can easily grasp the temporary stop state while suppressing the obstruction of the game performance by making the outline display emphasized only during the variable display (temporary stop state).

Here, a more detailed modified example of the display mode of the decorative patterns A and B during the temporary stop display is shown in FIG.
22 is a diagram showing an example of a temporary stop display using a decorative pattern according to a modified example of the first embodiment.

22(1) shows a provisional stop display mode of a symbol 527 as an example of a decorative symbol A during provisional stop display. The provisional stop display mode of the symbol 527 is (a), (b), (c), and (d) which are repeated periodically.

In the temporarily stopped display of the pattern 527, the background portion 527d is fixed, and the number portion 527n having the distinctiveness of the pattern 527 sways left and right (first temporary stop motion), while expanding and contracting up and down (second temporary stop motion). That is, the temporarily stopped display mode of the pattern 527 is a combination of two types of temporary stop motions in the number portion. Note that the background portion 527d is not limited to a still image, and may be an animated display with movement.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can emphasize the provisional stop action of the number portion, and can easily make the player understand the provisional stop state while suppressing the disruption of the game presentation.
In order to emphasize the tentative stopping of the numerals, the outline of the numerals is made vague (de-emphasized).

In addition, the temporary stop display mode of the pattern 527 is a combination of two types of temporary stop actions in the number section, but it may also be a combination of three types of temporary stop actions including deformation actions, or a combination of four or more types of temporary stop actions.

22(2) shows the temporary stop display mode of the symbol 537 as an example of the decorative symbol B during the temporary stop display. The temporary stop display mode of the symbol 537 periodically repeats (a), (b), (c), and (d). The symbol 537 during the temporary stop display oscillates in the vertical direction as a whole. In this way, the gaming machine 10 emphasizes the outline display of the entire symbol, thereby emphasizing the oscillation of the entire symbol, and realizes a temporary stop display that is easy for the player to grasp.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 makes the outline display of the number part of the decorative pattern A during the temporary stop display vague (de-emphasized).
It is stated that the outline display of the decorative pattern B during the temporary stop display is emphasized, but this can be realized by making the outline display of the decorative pattern B during the temporary stop display thicker than the outline display of the number part of the decorative pattern A during the temporary stop display.

In addition, the emphasis and de-emphasis of the outline display may be realized not only by the thickness of the outline display but also by saturation or brightness, and may further be realized by a combination of the thickness of the outline display with saturation or brightness. In addition, the thickness of the outline display may not be limited to an absolute thickness but may be defined by a ratio of the width of the pattern (or the width of the number part). In addition, the emphasis and de-emphasis of the outline display may be achieved by making the outline display of one of the decorative patterns to be compared thicker and the other thinner, or by changing only the other without changing the thickness of the outline display of one of the decorative patterns to be compared. In addition, the emphasis of the outline display may be achieved by setting an outline display to a pattern that does not originally have an outline display. In addition, the de-emphasis of the outline display may be achieved by making an outline display that is originally set to none.

In addition, in the case of the decorative pattern A during the temporary stop display, the background part is fixed and the number part swings left and right, but the background part may swing. Also, the emphasis of the outline display of the number part of the decorative pattern A and the non-emphasis of the outline display of the decorative pattern B may be always fixed, or may be switchable depending on the variable display state, and the modification may also switch the emphasis state of the outline display as described using Fig. 20 and Fig. 21.

Next, the message presentation in the variable display game will be described with reference to FIG.
3 is a diagram showing an example of a message display effect of the first embodiment. The gaming machine 10 enhances the effect of the message being perceived by the player by controlling the thickness of the outline display portion of the message display in the message effect in the variable display game.

The display screen 600 shown in FIG. 23(1) shows a state where the large symbol group 501 is in a reach state. In the display screen 590, the large symbol group 501 is a large symbol (left) and a large symbol (right) of the symbol "3".
The display screen 59 shows how the large symbol (middle) changes its appearance.
0 indicates that the left, middle and right patterns of the small pattern group 502 are changing, and the special pattern change display game is displaying a change.

The display screen 590 also shows a state in which a message display effect is being executed in relation to the large symbol group 501 being in a reach state. The display screen 590 displays a message display effect 593. The message display effect 593 includes a background section 594 and a message section 595. The background section 594 is a display that forms the background of the message section 595, and makes it easy to distinguish it from other display sections. The background section 594 is, for example, in the shape of a speech bubble, and is of a different color, etc. from the other display sections, making it easy to distinguish the background section 594 from the other display sections. The message section 595 displays a required message (for example, "Chance!"), giving the player a certain sense of expectation.

A display screen 592 shown in FIG. 23B is a display screen following the display screen 590. A message display effect 593 is a dynamically changing display, and compared to the display screen 590, the background part 592 is a dynamically changing display.
94 are the same in position and size. Meanwhile, the message display effect 593 enlarges the message portion 595 compared to the display screen 590. The message display effect 593 enlarges the message portion 595 in accordance with the enlarged display of the message portion 595, and thickens the outline of the message portion 595. That is, the message display effect 593 fixes the position and size of the background portion 594 and enlarges the message portion 595, thereby enhancing the effect of the message being perceived by the player. Furthermore, the message display effect 593 fixes the thickness of the outline of the background portion 594 while enlarging the thickness of the outline of the message portion 595, thereby further enhancing the effect of the message being perceived by the player. Note that the enlargement of the thickness of the outline of the message portion 595 may be the same as the enlargement ratio in the enlarged display of the message portion 595, but by making it larger than the enlargement ratio in the enlarged display of the message portion 595, the effect of the message being perceived by the player can be further enhanced. In the above description, the enlargement of the thickness of the outline display of the message section 595 is made larger than the enlargement ratio in the enlarged display of the message section 595. However, this is not limited to the above, and it may be possible to make the enlargement ratio smaller than the enlarged display of the message section 595 in order to draw the player's attention and enhance the perceived effect of the message.

Although the switching of the outline display of the gaming machine 10 has been described for the large symbol group 501 and the message display performance 593, the gaming machine 10 may switch the outline display of the small symbol group 502. Here, the switching of the outline display of the small symbol group 502 will be described with reference to Fig. 24. Fig. 24 is a diagram showing an example of the outline display of the small symbol group in the first embodiment.

First, the correct display position of the small symbol (any symbol among the small symbol group 502) (during the stopped display)
The small symbol group 502 is shown in FIG. 24 (1). The small symbol group 502 includes a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol, but all of them have the same variable display. The variable display of the small symbols is a switching variable in which the symbols are switched in sequence according to the symbol arrangement. The small symbols seen from the display area 540 are always displayed in the normal display position where the entire symbol can be observed, since there is no offset setting. For example, symbol 5
The symbol 544 is in the normal display position. The outline of the entire symbol 544 during the stationary display is emphasized as compared with the symbol 544 during the varying display.

In addition, the switching of the small symbols is performed in frame units (display switching time units) in the display device 41.
The small symbols are rewritten in the manner shown in FIG. 24(2).

For example, when small symbol 543 (symbol "3") is displayed in the normal display position in display area 540 in a certain frame, small symbol 544 (symbol "4") is displayed in the normal display position in display area 540 in the next frame. Small symbol 545 (symbol "5") is displayed in the normal display position in display area 540 in the next frame in the same manner. Symbols 543 and 54 in the normal display position
The entire patterns of the small symbols 543, 545 can be observed from the display area 511 and have sufficient discrimination. The outline of the entire pattern of the small symbols 544 during the variable display is emphasized as compared with the small symbols 544 during the stationary display. The same is true for the other small symbols including the symbols 543 and 545.

In this way, the variable display of the small symbol group 502 cyclically switches the symbols to "3", "4", "5", ... every one frame time (33.3 ms).
The variable display of 02 has a display time of 33.3 ms per symbol, and a display time of 33.3 ms per symbol at the normal display position. In this way, the variable display of the small symbol group 502 is always displayed at the normal display position even during the variable display, so the outline display of the entire symbol is made vague (non-emphasized) to help the player easily perceive the variable display of the small symbol group 502. Note that the vague display during the variable display of the small symbol group 502 is limited to the outline, and the display mode of the other parts is the same as that during the stopped display, thereby ensuring a certain degree of discrimination of the entire symbol.

The gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment described above (including the modified examples) has the following feature in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a display means (e.g., the display device 41) capable of displaying a variable display game (e.g., a special pattern 1 game, a special pattern 2 game) that variably displays a pattern (e.g., a decorative pattern A, a decorative pattern B), a first type pattern (e.g., a decorative pattern A) that includes a first discrimination component (e.g., a number (number portion 527n)) having discrimination power that allows the pattern to be identified by a character attribute, and a second discrimination component (e.g., a symbol portion 527s) having discrimination power that allows the pattern to be identified by a non-character attribute, and a first discrimination component (e.g., a number (pattern 537
)) and a control means (for example, a game control device 10) for switching between the first type symbol and the second type symbol (for example, a decorative symbol B) constituting the symbol by excluding the second identification component and displaying them on the display means.
10, and a performance control device 300, wherein when the control means causes a first type of pattern to be temporarily stopped, the control means sets the outline display of the first identification component to a first state (e.g., non-highlighted display) and oscillates the first identification component in either a first direction (e.g., the vertical axis rotation direction) or a second direction (e.g., the left-right direction) different from the first direction, and when the control means causes a second type of pattern to be temporarily stopped, the control means sets the outline display of the first identification component to a second state (e.g., highlighted display) thicker than the first state and oscillates the first identification component in both the first direction and the second direction (e.g., the vertical axis rotation direction and the left-right direction) (see Figures 17, 19, and 20).

(2) The gaming machine 10 includes a display means (e.g., the display device 41) capable of displaying a variable display game (e.g., a special pattern 1 game, a special pattern 2 game) that variably displays patterns (e.g., decorative pattern A, decorative pattern B), a first type pattern (e.g., decorative pattern A) that includes a first discrimination component (e.g., a number (number portion 527n)) having discrimination power that allows the pattern to be identified by a character attribute, and a second discrimination component (e.g., a symbol portion 527s) having discrimination power that allows the pattern to be identified by a non-character attribute, and a first discrimination component (e.g., a number (pattern 537
)) and a control means (for example, a game control device 10) for switching between the first type symbol and the second type symbol (for example, a decorative symbol B) constituting the symbol by excluding the second identification component and displaying them on the display means.
0, performance control device 300), and when the control means causes the second type of pattern to be temporarily stopped, the control means sets the outline display of the first identification component to a first state (e.g., non-highlighted display) and oscillates the first identification component in both a first direction (e.g., the vertical axis rotation direction) and a second direction (e.g., left and right direction) different from the first direction, and when the control means causes the first type of pattern to be temporarily stopped, the control means sets the outline display of the first identification component to a second state (e.g., highlighted display) thicker than the first state and oscillates the first identification component in either one of the first direction and the second direction (e.g., left and right direction) (see Figures 17, 19, and 21).

(3) The gaming machine 10 includes a display means (e.g., the display device 41) capable of displaying a variable display game (e.g., a special pattern 1 game, a special pattern 2 game) that variably displays a pattern (e.g., a decorative pattern A, a decorative pattern B), a first type pattern (e.g., a decorative pattern A) that includes a first discrimination component (e.g., a number (number portion 527n)) having discrimination ability that allows the pattern to be identified by a character attribute, and a second discrimination component (e.g., a symbol portion 527s) having discrimination ability that allows the pattern to be identified by a non-character attribute, and a first discrimination component (e.g., a number (pattern 537
)) and a control means (for example, a game control device 10) for switching between the first type symbol and the second type symbol (for example, a decorative symbol B) constituting the symbol by excluding the second identification component and displaying them on the display means.
0, performance control device 300), and when the control means causes a first type of pattern to be temporarily stopped, the control means sets the outline display of the first identification component to a first manner (e.g., non-highlighted display) and oscillates the first identification component in both a first direction (e.g., the vertical axis rotation direction) and a second direction (e.g., left and right direction) different from the first direction, and when the control means causes a second type of pattern to be temporarily stopped, the control means sets the outline display of the first identification component to a second manner (e.g., highlighted display) thicker than the first manner and oscillates the first identification component in either one of the first direction and the second direction (e.g., left and right direction) (see Figures 19, 20, and 22).

(4) The gaming machine 10 includes a display means (e.g., the display device 41) capable of displaying a variable display game (e.g., a special pattern 1 game, a special pattern 2 game) that variably displays a pattern (e.g., a decorative pattern A, a decorative pattern B), a first type pattern (e.g., a decorative pattern A) that includes a first discrimination component (e.g., a number (number portion 527n)) having discrimination power that allows the pattern to be identified by a character attribute, and a second discrimination component (e.g., a symbol portion 527s) having discrimination power that allows the pattern to be identified by a non-character attribute, and a first discrimination component (e.g., a number (pattern 537
)) and a control means (for example, a game control device 10) for switching between the first type symbol and the second type symbol (for example, a decorative symbol B) constituting the symbol by excluding the second identification component and displaying them on the display means.
0, performance control device 300), and when the control means causes the second type of pattern to be temporarily stopped, the control means sets the outline display of the first identification component to a first state (e.g., non-highlighted display) and oscillates the first identification component in either a first direction (e.g., vertical axis rotation direction) or a second direction (e.g., left and right direction) different from the first direction (e.g., left and right direction), and when the first type of pattern is temporarily stopped, the control means sets the outline display of the first identification component to a second state (e.g., highlighted display) thicker than the first state and oscillates the first identification component in both the first direction and the second direction (e.g., vertical axis rotation direction and left and right direction) (see Figures 19, 21, and 22).

(5) The gaming machine 10 includes a display means (e.g., the display device 41) including a first display area (e.g., the display area of the large symbol group 501) and a second display area (e.g., the display area 540 of the small symbol group 502) capable of displaying a variable display game (e.g., the special symbol 1 game, the special symbol 2 game), and a control means (e.g., the game control device 100, the performance control device 300) capable of independently deriving the result state of the variable display game in the first display area and the second display area, and the control means includes:
When a first group of symbols (e.g., large group of symbols 501) is variably displayed in the first display area, and a second group of symbols (e.g., small group of symbols 502) smaller than the first group of symbols is variably displayed in the first display area, the thickness of the outline display of each symbol in the second group of symbols during the variably displayed state is made thinner than the thickness of the outline display during the halt of the variably displayed state (see FIG. 24).

(6) The gaming machine 10 includes a display means (e.g., display device 41) capable of displaying effects related to variable display games (e.g., special chart 1 game, special chart 2 game), and a control unit (e.g., gaming control device 100, effect control device 300) that, when performing a message display (message display effect 593) as an effect, configures the message display including a text section (message section 595) and a background section (background section 594) that forms the background of the text section, enlarges and displays the text section while fixing the size of the background section, and changes the outline display of the text section from a first thickness to a second thickness different from the first thickness (see FIG. 23).

(7) The gaming machine 10 includes a display means (e.g., the display device 41) capable of displaying a variable display game (e.g., a special pattern 1 game, a special pattern 2 game) that variably displays a pattern (e.g., a decorative pattern A, a decorative pattern B), a first type pattern (e.g., a decorative pattern A) that includes a first discrimination component (e.g., a number (number portion 527n)) having discrimination power that allows the pattern to be identified by a character attribute, and a second discrimination component (e.g., a symbol portion 527s) having discrimination power that allows the pattern to be identified by a non-character attribute, and a first discrimination component (e.g., a number (pattern 537
)) and a control means (for example, a game control device 10) for switching between the first type symbol and the second type symbol (for example, a decorative symbol B) constituting the symbol by excluding the second identification component and displaying them on the display means.
10, a performance control device 300), and when the control means causes the first type of symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed, the control means sets the outline display of the first identification component to a first state (e.g., non-highlighted display) and oscillates the first identification component in either one of a first direction (e.g., a vertical axis rotation direction) and a second direction (e.g., a left-right direction) different from the first direction, and when the control means causes the second type of symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed, the control means sets the outline display of the first identification component to a second state (e.g., non-highlighted display) thinner than the first state and oscillates the first identification component in both the first direction and the second direction (e.g., the vertical axis rotation direction and the left-right direction) (see Figs. 17, 19, and 21).
.

(8) The gaming machine 10 includes a display means (e.g., the display device 41) capable of displaying a variable display game (e.g., a special pattern 1 game, a special pattern 2 game) that variably displays a pattern (e.g., a decorative pattern A, a decorative pattern B), a first type of pattern (e.g., a decorative pattern A) that includes a first discrimination component (e.g., a number (number portion 527n)) having discrimination ability that allows the pattern to be identified by a character attribute and a second discrimination component (e.g., a symbol portion 527s) having discrimination ability that allows the pattern to be identified by a non-character attribute, and a first discrimination component that includes the first discrimination component and excludes the second discrimination component. and a control means (e.g., the game control device 100, the performance control device 300) for switchably displaying a second type of pattern (e.g., a decorative pattern B) on the display means, wherein when the control means causes the first type of pattern to be temporarily stopped and displayed, the control means sets the outline display of the first identification component to a first state (e.g., non-highlighted display) and oscillates the first identification component in either a first direction (e.g., a vertical axis rotation direction) or a second direction (e.g., a left-right direction) different from the first direction, and when the second type of pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed,
The outline of the first identification component is displayed in a second manner (e.g., highlighted) that is thicker than the first manner, and the first identification component is swung in at least one of the first direction and the second direction, including the other direction (e.g., a direction of rotation about the vertical axis) different from the first direction (FIGS. 17, 19, and 20).
reference).

(9) The gaming machine 10 includes a display means (e.g., the display device 41) capable of displaying a variable display game (e.g., a special pattern 1 game, a special pattern 2 game) that variably displays a pattern (e.g., a decorative pattern A, a decorative pattern B), and a control means (e.g., the game control device 100, the performance control device 300) that causes the display means to switch between a first type pattern (e.g., decorative pattern A) that includes a first discrimination component (e.g., a number (number portion 527n)) having discrimination power that allows the pattern to be identified by a character attribute and a second discrimination component (e.g., a symbol portion 527s) having discrimination power that allows the pattern to be identified by a non-character attribute, and a second type pattern (e.g., decorative pattern B) that includes the first discrimination component and excludes the second discrimination component to form a pattern, and the control means causes the display means to switch between the first type pattern and the second ...
When the second type symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the outline display of the first discrimination component is changed to a second state (e.g., non-highlighted display) that is thinner than the first state, and the first discrimination component is swung in at least one of the first direction and the second direction (e.g., the vertical axis rotation direction) that is different from the other direction (e.g., the vertical axis rotation direction) (FIGS. 17, 19, 21).
reference).

Second Embodiment
Next, a description will be given of a gaming machine 10 according to a second embodiment in which the thickness of the outline display of the decorative pattern can be changed for each part. First, the outline display switching of the decorative pattern during the temporary stop display by rotating the vertical axis will be described with reference to FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is a diagram showing an example of the temporary stop mode of the decorative pattern according to the second embodiment.

The figure shows the state where the "7" (figure 537) of the decorative pattern B shown in FIG. 25(1) rotates on the vertical axis and is temporarily stopped. The figure 550 shows the state where the "7" of the decorative pattern B rotates on the vertical axis to the left by a predetermined angle. The figure 551 shows the state where the "7" of the decorative pattern B is viewed from the front. The figure 552 shows the state where the "7" of the decorative pattern B is temporarily stopped and rotated on the vertical axis to the left by a predetermined angle.
This shows that the "7" of the decorative symbol B has rotated to the right on the vertical axis by a predetermined angle. For example, the gaming machine 10 can perform a provisional stop display by switching from the symbol 550 to the symbol 551 to the symbol 552, and then from the symbol 552 to the symbol 551 to the symbol 550.

At this time, the gaming machine 10 can switch the thickness (degree of emphasis) of the outline display for each of the switching target outline display parts (the left half of the pattern and the right half of the pattern) as shown in FIG. 25(2).
In the gaming machine 10, the left half of the pattern 550 is referred to as a left portion 550L, and the right half of the pattern 550 is referred to as a right portion 55
When the R is set to 0R, the outline of the left part 550L, which appears to be moving away, is displayed thinner (
In other words, the gaming machine 10 displays the outline of the left portion 550L, which appears to be moving farther than the right portion 550R, in a thinner manner than the outline of the right portion 550R, and displays the outline of the left portion 550L, which appears to be moving farther than the right portion 550R, in a thinner manner than the outline of the right portion 550R.
The outline of the right part 550R, which appears closer than 0L, is displayed thicker than the outline of the left part 550L.

In addition, when the left half of the pattern 551 is the left portion 551L and the right half of the pattern 551 is the right portion 551R, the gaming machine 10 sets the outline display of the left portion 551L and the outline display of the right portion 551R to a standard thickness (standard display). In other words, the gaming machine 10 displays the outline display of the left portion 551L and the outline display of the right portion 551R, which are seen at approximately the same depth position, to the same thickness (standard thickness).

In addition, when the left half of the pattern 552 is the left part 552L and the right half of the pattern 552 is the right part 552R, the gaming machine 10 displays the outline of the left part 552L, which appears to move in the approaching direction, in a thicker outline (highlighted), and displays the outline of the right part 552R, which appears to move in the receding direction, in a thinner outline (non-highlighted, vague).
The outline of the right part 552R, which is seen from a distance, is displayed thinner than the outline of the left part 552L,
The outline of the left portion 552L, which appears closer than the right portion 552R, is displayed thicker than the outline of the right portion 552R.

This allows the gaming machine 10 to easily grasp the provisional stop display state of the decorative symbol. The left or right part of the symbol may be highlighted or unhighlighted uniformly, or the degree of highlighting or unhighlighting may be varied according to the distance from the vertical axis (center axis). For example, when highlighting the outline of the right part 550R of the symbol 550, the gaming machine 10 can make the outline thicker (the rate of change or the amount of change larger) at a position farther from the vertical axis (center axis), and when unhighlighting the outline of the left part 550L of the symbol 550, the gaming machine 10 can make the outline thinner (the rate of change or the amount of change larger) at a position farther from the vertical axis (center axis).

Next, as another example of the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, switching of the outline display of the decorative symbol that is oscillating left and right and is temporarily stopped will be described with reference to Fig. 26. Fig. 26 is a diagram showing an example of a temporarily stopped mode of the decorative symbol in the modified example of the second embodiment.

The figure shows a state where the "7" (figure 537) of the decorative pattern B shown in FIG. 26(1) swings left and right to display a provisional stop. The figure 560 shows a state where the "7" of the decorative pattern B has moved a predetermined amount to the left from the normal position. The figure 561 shows a state where the "7" of the decorative pattern B is in the normal position. The figure 562 shows a state where the "7" of the decorative pattern B has moved a predetermined amount to the right from the normal position. For example, the gaming machine 10 can perform a provisional stop display by switching from the pattern 560 to the pattern 561 to the pattern 562, and from the pattern 562 to the pattern 561 to the pattern 560.

At this time, the gaming machine 10 can switch the thickness (degree of emphasis) of the outline display as shown in FIG. 26(2). When the left half of the pattern 560 is the left part 560L and the right half of the pattern 560 is the right part 560R, the gaming machine 10 displays the outline display of the left part 560L, which appears to move in a direction away from the display position center (broken line shown in the figure), thinly (non-highlighted display, vague display), and displays the outline display of the right part 560R, which appears to move in a direction toward the display position center, thickly (highlighted display). In other words, the gaming machine 10 displays the outline display of the left part 560L, which appears farther from the display position center than the right part 560R, thinner than the outline display of the right part 560R, and displays the outline display of the right part 560R, which appears closer to the display position center than the left part 560L, thicker than the outline display of the left part 560L.

In addition, when the left half of the pattern 561 is the left portion 561L and the right half of the pattern 561 is the right portion 561R, the gaming machine 10 sets the outline display of the left portion 561L and the outline display of the right portion 561R to a standard thickness (standard display). In other words, the gaming machine 10 displays the outline display of the left portion 561L and the outline display of the right portion 561R, which are visible at approximately the same position from the display position center, to the same thickness (standard thickness).

In addition, in the gaming machine 10, when the left half of the pattern 562 is the left part 562L and the right half of the pattern 562 is the right part 562R, the left part 562 appears to move in a direction approaching the center of the display position.
The gaming machine 10 displays the outline of the right portion 562R, which appears to move away from the center of the display position, thicker (highlighted), and displays the outline of the right portion 562R, which appears to move away from the center of the display position, thinner (non-highlighted, vague). In other words, the gaming machine 10 displays the outline of the right portion 562R, which appears to move farther from the center of the display position than the left portion 562L, thinner than the outline of the left portion 562L, and displays the outline of the left portion 562L, which appears closer to the center of the display position than the right portion 562R, thicker than the outline of the right portion 562R.

This allows the gaming machine 10 to easily grasp the provisional stop display state of the decorative symbol. The left or right part of the symbol may be highlighted or unhighlighted uniformly, or the degree of highlighting or unhighlighting may be varied according to the distance from the vertical axis (center axis). For example, when highlighting the outline of the left part 560L of the symbol 560, the gaming machine 10 can make the outline thicker at a position farther from the vertical axis (center axis), and when unhighlighting the outline of the right part 560R of the symbol 560, the gaming machine 10 can make the outline thinner at a position farther from the vertical axis (center axis).

Next, as another example of the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, a contour display switching target part of a pattern will be described with reference to Fig. 27. Fig. 27 is a diagram showing an example of a contour display switching target part during a temporary stop display of a decorative pattern of the second embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 can divide the symbol into two halves, a left half and a right half, by a vertical center line as shown in Figures 25 and 26, and set the two halves as the switching target outline display portion. For example,
The pattern 570 shown in FIG. 27(1) is divided into a left portion 570a and a right portion 570b, and the outline display of each of the left portion 570a and the right portion 570b can be switched between highlighted and unhighlighted as outline display switching target portions.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 may set a part of the pattern on one side (one side part) and a part of the pattern on the other side (other side part) as the contour display switching target parts of the pattern, and may not set the remaining part as the contour display switching target part of the pattern. For example, the pattern 571 shown in Fig. 27 (2) has one side part 571a and the other side part 571b set, and the contour display can be switched between highlighted display and non-highlighted display with each of the one side part 571a and the other side part 571b as the contour display switching target parts.
In addition, in the pattern 571 shown in FIG. 27(2), the remaining portions that are not set as the one side portion 571a and the other side portion 571b are not subject to contour display switching.

In addition, it is preferable that the one side part and the other side part of the pattern are symmetrical with respect to the center of the pattern, but they may be in any positional relationship without being limited thereto. In addition, it is preferable that the one side part and the other side part of the pattern are set in relation to the swinging motion of the pattern when it is temporarily stopped, but they may be set in any positional relationship without being limited thereto.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 may set only a part of the pattern as the contour display switching target part of the pattern, and may not set the remaining part as the contour display switching target part of the pattern.
27(3) , the remaining portion that is not set as the part 572a is not a part that is a target for switching the outline display.

In addition, the portion of the pattern that is subject to contour display switching is not limited to one, but may be set to two, three or more, and may be set in any positional relationship that contributes to the perception of the temporary stop display.

The gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment described above (including the modified example) has the following feature in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a display means (e.g., the display device 41) capable of displaying a variable display game (e.g., a special game 1 and a special game 2) in which a pattern (e.g., patterns 570, 571, and 572) is variably displayed, and a first state (e.g., a standard state) in which the outline display of the pattern has a first thickness when the pattern is temporarily stopped and a first portion of the pattern (e.g., a left portion 570a,
and a control means for causing the display means to display the one side portion 571a, the one portion 572a) in a second thickness (for example, highlighted display) that is thicker than the first thickness (see FIGS. 25 to 27).

(2) The control means of (1) controls the remaining second symbols (e.g., symbols 570 and 571)
The display means displays the part (for example, the right part 570b, the other side part 571b) in a second state (for example, non-highlighted display) having a third thickness smaller than the first thickness (see FIG. 25 to FIG. 2).
See 7).

[Third embodiment]
In the explanation of the first embodiment, the gaming machine is described as having a gaming board 30, but in the third embodiment, the gaming machine is described as having a gaming board 800 (see FIG. 28) different from the gaming board 30. FIG. 28 is a front view showing an example of the gaming board of the third embodiment.
Configurations similar to those of the previous embodiment are given the same reference numerals and descriptions thereof may be omitted.

A substantially circular play area 32 surrounded by guide rails 31 is formed on the surface of the play board 800. The play area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31, which are provided at each of the four corners of the play board 800. A center case (play presentation structure) 820 equipped with a display device (variable display device) 41 is disposed in the approximate center of the play area 32. The display device 830 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 820, at a position recessed from the front surface of the center case 820. In other words, the center case 820 is provided with a display device (variable display device) 41.
20 surrounds the periphery of the display area of the display device 830, protrudes forward beyond the display surface of the display device 830, and is formed so as to make it difficult for game balls to fly in from the surrounding game area 32.

The display device 830 is configured with a device having a display screen capable of displaying a dot matrix by LEDs. The display device 830 may be, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), a CRT (
The display device 830 may be configured with a device having a display screen such as a cathode ray tube (CRT). In the area (display area) where images on the display screen can be displayed, information related to the game, such as multiple identification information (special symbols), characters that produce the special symbol variable display game, and background images that enhance the presentation effect, is displayed. On the display screen of the display device 830, multiple special symbols assigned as identification information are displayed in a variable manner (variable display), and a decorative special symbol variable display game corresponding to the special symbol variable display game is played. In addition, the display screen displays images for presentation based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.).

Further, a board effect device 44 that performs game effects by operating is provided on the upper part of the center case 820. This board effect device 44 is operable from the state shown in FIG.

A normal symbol start gate (normal symbol start gate) 34 that provides the start condition of the normal symbol variable display game is provided on the lower right side of the center case 820 in the game area 32. A game ball that enters the normal symbol start gate 34 (a game ball that passes through the normal symbol start gate 34) is detected by a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 29).

In addition, a general winning opening 35 is arranged on the lower left side of the center case 820 in the game area 32, and a general winning opening 35 is arranged on the lower right side of the center case 820, to the right of the special variable winning device 95 described later.
This is detected by the prize winning port switch 35a (see Figure 29).

In addition, a start winning hole 36 (start winning hole 1) which constitutes a first start winning hole (start winning area) which provides the start condition of the first special chart variable display game (special chart 1 variable display game) is provided below the center case 820 in the game area 32. The game ball which enters the start winning hole 36 is detected by the start winning hole 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 29).

In addition, below the start winning hole 36, an outlet 30a is provided for collecting game balls that do not win in the winning holes, etc.
In addition, at a position lower than the center case 820 and to the left of the normal chart start gate 34, a normal variation winning device 37 (second start winning port, start winning area) that provides the start conditions for the second special chart variation display game (special chart 2 variation display game) is provided. The normal variation winning device 37 (starting port 2) is provided with a movable member 37b at a position that becomes the inflow portion. The movable member 37b is slid back and forth by the normal power solenoid 37c (see FIG. 29) to change between a blocking state that blocks the inflow of game balls into the inflow portion and a permitting state that retreats backward to permit the inflow of game balls into the inflow portion. The movable member 37b is normally held in a closed state (a state that is disadvantageous to the player). When the result of the normal chart variation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, it is changed to an open state (a state that is advantageous to the player). The game balls that have won the normal variation winning device 37 are released by the start port 2 switch 37a (
It is also possible to make it possible to win even when the normal variable prize-winning device 37 is closed, and to make it more difficult to win when the device is closed than when it is open.
corresponds to ordinary electric device (Fuden).

In addition, on the right side of the center case 820 in the game area 32, there is a special chart change display game (
A special variable winning device (large winning port 1) 38 is provided which can be switched between a state in which it does not accept game balls and a state in which it is easy to accept them depending on the results of the special chart 1 variable display game and the special chart 2 variable display game. The special variable winning device 38 has an opening/closing member (movable piece) 38c, and depending on the results of the special chart variable display game as an auxiliary game, the opening/closing member 38c closes the large winning port and switches it from a closed state (a blocked state disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (a state advantageous to the player) in which the opening/closing member 38c retreats and can accept game balls flowing down the game area 32. In other words, the special variable winning device 38 has a large winning port (large winning port 1) which is opened and closed by an opening/closing member 38c which is driven by a large winning port 1 solenoid 38b (see FIG. 29) as a drive device,
During a jackpot game state (special game state) resulting from the special chart 1 variable display game and the special chart 2 variable display game, and during a jackpot game state (special game state) resulting from winning in a specific area 96 described later
The inside of the large prize opening is changed from a closed state to an open state to facilitate the flow of game balls into the large prize opening, and a predetermined game value (prize balls) is awarded to the player. Inside the large prize opening (winning area), a large prize opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 29) is provided as a detection means for detecting game balls that have entered the large prize opening.

In addition, a special variable prize winning device (large prize winning port 2) 95 that can be converted between a state in which game balls are not accepted and a state in which they are accepted easily depending on the results of the special chart variable display games (special chart 1 variable display game and special chart 2 variable display game) is disposed on the lower right side of the center case 820 in the game area 32. The special variable prize winning device 95 has an opening/closing member (opening/closing door) 95c, and depending on the results of the special chart variable display game as an auxiliary game, the opening/closing member 95c closes the large prize winning port and converts it from a closed state (a blocked state disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (a state advantageous to the player) in which the opening/closing member 95c retreats and accepts game balls flowing down the game area 32. That is, the special variable prize winning device 95 has a large prize winning port (large prize winning port 2) that is opened and closed by an opening and closing member 95c driven by a large prize winning port 2 solenoid 95b (see FIG. 29) as a driving device, and during a small win game state due to the results of the special chart 1 variable display game and the special chart 2 variable display game, the large prize winning port is converted from a closed state to an open state to facilitate the inflow of game balls into the large prize winning port, and a predetermined game value (prize balls) is awarded to the player. In addition, a large prize winning port switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 29) is arranged inside the large prize winning port (winning area) as a detection means for detecting game balls that have entered the large prize winning port.

The special variable winning device 95 also has a V-channel that guides the game ball that has entered the winning hole to the specific area 96. The special variable winning device 95 is provided with a specific area switch 95e (see FIG. 29) that detects the game ball that has flowed into the specific area 96.
The detection of the game ball (entry into the specific area 96) in the
This is one of the conditions for the occurrence of a jackpot game state (special game state) in which the number 8 is converted from a closed state to an open state.

Also, the center case 820 may not have a warp flow path, but may have one. For example, a warp port (warp entrance) may be provided on the left side of the center case 820, and game balls that flow into the warp flow path from the warp port may be made to roll on a stage inside the center case 820, and some of them may be guided to the warp exit. In this case, the warp exit may be located directly above the start winning opening 36, so that game balls guided to the warp exit may easily enter the start winning opening 36.

In the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment, within the gaming area 32 into which the gaming balls flow, the area to the left of the center case 820 is set as the left gaming area, and the area to the right of the center case 820 is set as the right gaming area. The player can aim to win at the start winning hole 36 or the general winning hole 35 (located in the left gaming area) by adjusting the launch force to launch the gaming ball into the left gaming area (so-called left shot), and can aim to win at the normal starting gate 34, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 38, 95 by launching the gaming ball into the right gaming area (so-called right shot).
, and general prize winning hole 35 (located in the right-hand gaming area).

In addition, outside the game area 32 (here, the lower right part of the game board 800), a collective display device 5 is provided that displays the first special chart change display game and the second special chart change display game, which constitute the special chart change display game, and the normal chart change display game, which is triggered by winning the normal chart start gate 34, and various information.
0 is provided.

The collective display device 50 includes a round display section 51, a special pattern 1 reserved display section 52, a special pattern 1 pattern display section 53, a special pattern 2 pattern display section 54, a normal pattern display section 55, a normal pattern reserved display section 56, and a status display section 57 (see FIG. 5). The details of the collective display device 50 will be described later.

The gaming machine 10 is equipped with a right-hit guide display device 91 on the right side near the special variable winning device (big winning port 1) 38. The right-hit guide display device 91 is turned on when instructing the player to hit right and is turned off in other states. The right-hit guide display device 91 is included in the board decoration device 46.

The gaming machine 10 is provided with a winning chance information display device 92 located near and above the special variable winning device (big winning port 2) 95. The winning chance information display device 92 informs the player of a winning chance by lighting up. For example, the winning chance information display device 92 lights up an LED corresponding to the message "2 more chances" when there are two winning chances, and turns off the remaining. Also, the winning chance information display device 92 lights up an LED corresponding to the message "1 more chance" when there is one winning chance, and turns off the remaining. The winning chance information display device 92 lights up an LED corresponding to the message "blooming" during a winning chance that has the next or subsequent winning chance, and turns off the remaining. The winning chance information display device 92 is included in the board decoration device 46.

The gaming machine 10 is provided with a special symbol game change display status display device 98 at the bottom right of the center case 50 in the play area 32. The special symbol game change display status display device 98 is a so-called fourth symbol display device, and is composed of two LEDs. The special symbol game change display status display device 98 displays the change display status of the special symbol 1 change display game with the left LED, and displays the change display status of the special symbol 2 change display game with the right LED. For example, the special symbol game change display status display device 98 notifies the symbol stop status of the special symbol change display game by lighting up, and notifies the symbol change status of the special symbol change display game by flashing. The special symbol game change display status display device 98 is included in the board decoration device 46.

The gaming machine 10 has a normal map change display device 9 on the right side of the center case 50 in the gaming area 32.
The display device 93 is made up of two LEDs, which indicate the status of the game by blinking alternately, and indicate the result of the game by turning on or off. The display device 94 is also made up of two LEDs.
The display device 93 indicates the number of reserved maps, ranging from 0 to 4, by a combination of off, on, and blinking. The display device 93 indicates the number of reserved maps, ranging from 0 to 4, by a combination of off, on, and blinking. The display device 93 indicates the number of reserved maps, ranging from 0 to 4, by a combination of off, on, and blinking. The display device 94 ...

Next, the control system of the gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. 29. In the description of the gaming machine of the first embodiment, the gaming machine is described as having a gaming control device 100, but in the third embodiment, the gaming machine is described as having a gaming control device 100a (see FIG. 29) different from the gaming control device 100. FIG. 29 is a block diagram showing an example of the control system of the gaming machine of the third embodiment. In addition, the same reference numerals may be used for the same configuration as in the first embodiment, and the description may be omitted.

The gaming machine 10 is equipped with a gaming control device 100a. The gaming control device 100a is a main control device (main board) that controls the overall game, and includes a CPU section 110 having a gaming microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a gaming microcomputer) 111, and an input section 120 having an input port.
an output section 130 having an output port, a driver, etc.; and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU section 110, the input section 120, and the output section 130.

The input section 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a start port 1 switch 36 in the start winning port 36.
a, it is connected to the start port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, the gate switch 34a in the normal start gate 34, the winning port switch 35a, the large winning port switch 38a of the special variable winning devices 38 and 95, and the specific area switch 38e of the special variable winning device 95, and an interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 is provided which inputs negative logic signals such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches and converts them into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V.

The output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and receives opening/closing data for the large prize opening 1 solenoid 38b that opens and closes the opening/closing member 38c of the special variable prize winning device 38 (large prize opening 1), and the large prize opening 2 solenoid 9 that opens and closes the opening/closing member 95c of the special variable prize winning device 95 (large prize opening 2).
A first output port 134a is provided for outputting the opening/closing data of the normal solenoid 37c which opens and closes the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37, and the display data of the performance display device 135.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt process of the game control device 100a will be described with reference to FIG. 30. FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the third embodiment. The timer interrupt process of the third embodiment includes step S830 between step S83 and step S84.
This differs from the timer interrupt process of the first embodiment in that the above is executed.

The control unit performs a special chart 1 game process (step S82) for processing the special chart 1 variable display game, and a special chart 2 game process (step S
Following step S83, a type 2 game process (step S830) is executed to process the so-called type 2 game, and then a normal game process (step S84) is executed to process the normal game variation display game.

Next, the gaming performance of the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
1 is a diagram showing an example of the gaming performance of a gaming machine according to a third embodiment. The gaming machine 10 has a so-called type 1 + type 2 game characteristic. The type 1 game characteristic allows a jackpot to be derived as a result of a random number lottery in a special chart game (variable display game), and produces a notification of the result of the random number lottery by displaying a variable pattern. The type 2 game characteristic allows a jackpot to be derived by detecting an entry into a specific area 96 at a predetermined timing.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 can execute the special chart 1 game and the special chart 2 game as the special chart games. The special chart 1 game can execute one variable display triggered by one winning in the start winning port 36, and can store up to four execution rights of the variable display (maximum number of reserved).
The game has a jackpot probability of 1/199, a small jackpot probability of 0/199, and the remaining 198
/199 is considered a miss. In the special game, 1/3 of the jackpots are with normal power support, and 2/3 of the jackpots are without normal power support.

In the special chart 2 game, one variable display can be executed with one win in the normal variable winning device 37, and up to one execution right for the variable display can be stored (maximum reserved number). In the special chart 2 game, the probability of a big win is 1/199, the probability of a small win is 198/199, and the probability of a miss is 0/199. In the special chart 2 game, 1/3 of the big wins (probability of a big win with support)
With normal power support, 2/3 of the jackpots (probability of no support at the time of jackpot) are without normal power support. Note that the gaming machine 10 may have the same jackpot probability in the special chart 1 game and the special chart 2 game, but the jackpot probability may be different.

Due to the nature of the games, Type 2 games do not have settings for maximum number of reserved balls, probability of winning a big hit, or probability of winning a small hit.
In the type 2 game, 1/3 of the jackpots are with normal power support, and 2/3 of the jackpots are without normal power support. Note that, in the gaming machine 10, the probability of a jackpot with support or the probability of a jackpot without support are the same for the special chart 1 game, the special chart 2 game, and the type 2 game, but they may be different for all games or may be different for some games.

Next, the game characteristics of the gaming machine 10 having such gaming performance will be described with reference to Fig. 32. Fig. 32 is a diagram showing an example of the transition of the gaming state of the gaming machine of the third embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 can be controlled by switching between a support state with normal power support and a no support state without normal power support. The gaming machine 10 can also be controlled by fixing the lottery probability of the special game to a low probability. That is, the gaming machine 10 can be controlled by switching between a "no support/low probability" state in which there is no normal power support and the lottery probability of the special game is low, and a "support/low probability" state in which there is normal power support and the lottery probability of the special game is low.

The "no support/low probability" state includes a "normal mode" and a "chance mode". The "normal mode" in the "no support/low probability" state is a game state in which the special game 1 is executed.
The "chance mode" in the "no support/low probability" state is a game state in which the special chart 2 game is executed. The "support with/low probability" state includes a "normal mode." The "normal mode" in the "support with/low probability" state is a game state in which the special chart 1 game or the special chart 2 game is executed.

The gaming machine 10 is initially in the "normal mode" in the "no support/low probability" state when the player starts playing. The gaming machine 10 transitions from the "normal mode" in the "no support/low probability" state to the "support/low probability" state when transition condition "state transition A" is met. Transition condition "state transition A" is the end of a jackpot with support derived in the special chart 1 game. Note that the gaming machine 10 remains in the "no support/low probability" state when transition condition "state transition B" is met from the "normal mode" in the "no support/low probability" state. Transition condition "state transition B" is met.
" is the end of a jackpot without support derived in one special game.

The gaming machine 10 remains in the "supported/low probability" state when the transition condition "state transition C" is satisfied from the "normal mode" in the "supported/low probability" state. Transition condition "state transition C"
is the end of the jackpot with support derived in the special chart 1 game or the special chart 2 game (including the two-type game executed in relation to the result of the special chart 2 game). The gaming machine 10 transitions from the "normal mode" in the "with support/low probability" state to the "no support/low probability" state when the transition condition "state transition D" is satisfied. The transition condition "state transition D" is the end of the normal power support.

The end condition for the regular power support is the end of one variable display in the special chart 2 game (Condition 1)
In addition to condition 1, the normal power support is to display the variable display N times in one game of the special chart (
For example, the end of the execution of the special game 2 (4 times, which is greater than the end condition) is set as the end condition (condition 2). Furthermore, in addition to conditions 1 and 2, the normal power support has one occurrence of a small hit as the end condition (condition 3).
In addition, when a non-supported jackpot is derived in the special chart 2 game (including the two-type game executed in relation to the result of the special chart 2 game), the end of the non-supported jackpot is the transition condition "State Transition D
" is established.

The gaming machine 10 transitions from the "chance mode" in the "no support/low probability" state to the "support/low probability" state when the transition condition "state transition E" is satisfied. The transition condition "state transition E" is the end of the jackpot with support derived in the special chart 2 game (including the two-type game executed in relation to the result of the special chart 2 game). Note that the gaming machine 10 remains in the "no support/low probability" state when the transition condition "state transition F" is satisfied from the "chance mode" in the "no support/low probability" state. However, the "chance mode" becomes the "normal mode" when the transition condition "state transition F" is satisfied. The transition condition "state transition F" is the end of the jackpot without support derived in the special chart 2 game (including the two-type game executed in relation to the result of the special chart 2 game).

The game progress in such a gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 10 is a diagram (part 1) showing an example of a game sequence of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment.
In the "no support/low probability" state, the game machine 10 can expect a win in the start winning slot 36, but cannot expect a win in the normal variable winning device 37, so it guides the player to play the game by playing left-handed instead of right-handed. Therefore, in the "no support/low probability" state, the game machine 10 can expect the occurrence of a special chart 1 reservation, but cannot expect the occurrence of a special chart 2 reservation. Therefore, the game machine 10
In the "no support/low probability" state, it is usually the "normal mode" which displays the changes in the special chart 1 game.

Sequence 1 indicates that the game state "jackpot (with normal power support)" is derived as a variable display result in the special chart 1 game. Game state "jackpot (with normal power support)"
is in jackpot operation, normal power support "none", probability fluctuation "low probability", special chart 1 reserved number "
The game status is "jackpot (with normal power support)" and the number of reserved special charts 2 is "0". After the jackpot ends, the game status "jackpot (with normal power support)" becomes "with normal power support". Since the gaming machine 10 can expect to win a prize in the special variable prize device (large prize port 1) 38 during the jackpot, it guides the player to play by playing from the right. Also, since the gaming machine 10 can expect to win a prize in the normal variable prize device 37 in the "with support/low probability" state after the jackpot ends, it guides the player to play by playing from the right.

Sequence 2 shows the game state "Special 1 pattern change" after the big win.
The special chart 2 game is executed in priority over the special chart 1 game, but since the special chart 2 reserved number is still "0", the special chart 1 reserved number "4" is changed to "3" and the special chart 1 game is executed.

Sequence 3 shows the game state "special pattern 1 pattern change". When a win occurs in the normal variable winning device 37 during the change display of the special pattern 1 game, the gaming machine 10 changes the special pattern 2 reserved number "0" to "1". Note that the gaming machine 10 does not change the special pattern 2 reserved number "0" to "1" even if two or more wins occur in the normal variable winning device 37.
The maximum number of reserved items will be limited to one for Special Chart 2, subject to the maximum number of reserved items.

Sequence 4 indicates the game state of "Special symbol 1 pattern stop (miss)". Sequence 5 indicates the game state of "Special symbol 2 pattern change". Since the number of reserved symbols for special symbol 2 in the gaming machine 10 is "1",
The reserved number for special chart 2 is changed from "1" to "0" and the special chart 2 game is executed in priority over the special chart 1 game.

Sequence 6 shows the game state "special pattern 2 pattern change". When a winning occurs in the normal winning device 37 during the variation display of the special pattern 2 game, the gaming machine 10 changes the special pattern 2 reserved number "0" to "1".

Sequence 7 shows the game state "Special 2 symbol stop (small win/big win)".
If a jackpot is derived as the result of the variable display in the special chart 2 game, the operation proceeds directly to the jackpot operation (type 1 game jackpot operation), and if a small jackpot is derived as the result of the variable display in the special chart 2 game, the special variable winning device (large winning port 2) 95 is opened, and the operation proceeds to the jackpot operation (type 2 game jackpot operation) on the condition that a prize is won in a specific area 96 (type 2 game).

Sequence 8 indicates that the game state "jackpot (without normal power support)" derived as a result of the special chart 2 game (including the two-type game executed in relation to the result of the special chart 2 game) is "jackpot (without normal power support)". The game state "jackpot (without normal power support)" is in the jackpot operation, with "no" normal power support, "low probability" probability of probability, special chart 1 reserved number "3", and special chart 2 reserved number "1". The game state "jackpot (without normal power support)" continues to be "without" normal power support after the jackpot ends. In the "no support/low probability" state, the gaming machine 10 cannot expect to win the normal variable winning device 37, but there is an opportunity to execute the special chart 2 game (special chart 2 reserved number "1"), and the occurrence of a jackpot can be expected as a result of the special chart 2 game (including the two-type game executed in relation to the result of the special chart 2 game), so the game progress is guided by right-hitting play.

Sequence 9 shows the game state "Special pattern 2 pattern change".
Since the number of reserved games is "1", the number of reserved games for special game 2 is changed from "1" to "0" and special game 2 is given priority over the special game 1.
Run the game.

Sequence 10 shows the game state "Special 2 symbol stop (small win/big win)".
When a jackpot is derived as the result of the variable display in the special chart 2 game, the number 0 transitions directly to a jackpot operation (type 1 game jackpot operation), and when a small jackpot is derived as the result of the variable display in the special chart 2 game, the number 0 opens the special variable winning device (large winning port 2) 95 and transitions to a jackpot operation (type 2 game jackpot operation) on the condition that a prize is won in a specific area 96 (type 2 game).

Sequence 11 indicates that the game state "jackpot (without normal power support)" derived as a result of the special chart 2 game (including the two-type game executed in relation to the result of the special chart 2 game) is "jackpot (without normal power support)". The game state "jackpot (without normal power support)" is in the jackpot operation, with "no" normal power support, "low probability" probability of probability, special chart 1 reserved number "3", and special chart 2 reserved number "0". After the jackpot ends, the game state "jackpot (without normal power support)" continues to be "without" normal power support. In the "no support/low probability" state, the gaming machine 10 cannot expect a win in the normal variable winning device 37, there is no opportunity to execute the special chart 2 game (the number of reserved special charts "0"), and the occurrence of a jackpot cannot be expected as a result of the special chart 2 game (including the two-type game executed in relation to the result of the special chart 2 game), so it guides the game progress by left-handed play.

Sequence 12 shows the game state "Special chart 1 pattern change" after the end of the jackpot. The gaming machine 10 executes the special chart 2 game in priority to the special chart 1 game, but since the special chart 2 reserved number is "0", the special chart 1 reserved number "3" is changed to "2" and the special chart 1 game is executed. After this, the gaming machine 10 continues the game by executing the special chart 1 game unless a jackpot is derived as a result of the change display in the special chart 1 game.

That is, when the gaming machine 10 derives a jackpot (with normal power support) as a result of the variable display in one game of the special chart, it has a gameplay that gives two more jackpot occurrence opportunities. In addition, when the gaming machine 10 derives another jackpot (with normal power support) among the remaining two jackpot occurrence opportunities, it gives two more jackpot occurrence opportunities from the jackpot.

Here, in the case of deriving a further jackpot (with normal power support) among the remaining two jackpot occurrence opportunities, the game progress assuming that the jackpot without normal power support in sequence 11 is with normal power support will be described with reference to Fig. 34. Fig. 34 is a diagram (part 2) showing an example of the game sequence of the gaming machine of the third embodiment.

The sequence 11a is a game state "small hit / big hit (with normal power support)" derived as a result of the special chart 2 game (including two types of games executed in relation to the result of the special chart 2 game).
The gaming state "small win/jackpot (with normal power support)" is during the jackpot operation, with normal power support "none", probability fluctuation "low probability", number of reserved special charts 1 "3", and number of reserved special charts 2 "0". The gaming state "jackpot (with normal power support)" becomes "with" normal power support after the jackpot ends. During the jackpot, the gaming machine 10 activates the special variable prize-winning device (large prize-winning port 1).
In addition, in the gaming machine 10, in the "with support/low probability" state after the big win, a win in the normal variable winning device 37 can be expected, so that the game progresses by right-hand play.

The sequence 12a shows the game state "Special 1 pattern change" after the end of the jackpot.
The special chart 2 game is executed in priority over the special chart 1 game, but since the special chart 2 reserved number is still "0", the special chart 1 reserved number "3" is changed to "2" and the special chart 1 game is executed.

The sequence 13a shows the game state "special pattern 1 pattern change". When a winning occurs in the normal winning device 37 during the variation display of the special pattern 1 game, the gaming machine 10 changes the reserved number of special pattern 2 from "0" to "1".
"

Sequence 14a shows the game state "Special 1 symbol stop (miss)".
A indicates the game state "special chart 2 pattern change". Since the number of reserved special charts 2 is "1", the gaming machine 10 changes the number of reserved special charts 2 from "1" to "0" and executes the special chart 2 game in priority to the special chart 1 game.

The sequence 16a shows the game state "special pattern 2 pattern change". When a win occurs in the normal variation winning device 37 during the variation display of the special pattern 2 game, the gaming machine 10 changes the special pattern 2 reserved number "0" to "1".
"

The sequence 17a shows the game state "Special 2 symbol stop (small win/big win)". When the gaming machine 10 derives a big win as a result of the variable display in the special 2 game, it moves directly to a big win operation (a big win operation in a type 1 game), and when the gaming machine 10 derives a small win as a result of the variable display in the special 2 game, it opens the special variable winning device (big winning port 2) 95 and opens the specific area 96.
If the player wins the lottery (type 2 game), the game moves to the big win operation (type 2 game big win operation).

The sequence 18a is a game state "small hit / big hit (without normal power support)" derived as a result of the special chart 2 game (including two types of games executed in relation to the result of the special chart 2 game).
This indicates that the game state is "small hit/jackpot (no normal power support)". In the "small hit/jackpot (no normal power support)" state, the jackpot is in operation, with "no" normal power support, "low probability" probability of probability change, "2" number of reserved special charts 1, and "1" number of reserved special charts 2. In the "jackpot (no normal power support)" game state, the game state remains "no" normal power support after the jackpot ends. In the "no support/low probability" state, the gaming machine 10 cannot expect to win in the normal variable winning device 37, but there is an opportunity to play the special chart 2 game (number of reserved special charts 2 "1").
"), and as the occurrence of a jackpot can be expected as a result of the Special Chart 2 Game (including the two-type game executed in relation to the result of the Special Chart 2 Game), the present invention provides guidance for playing by right-hand play.

The sequence 19a shows the game state "special chart 2 pattern change". Since the number of reserved special charts 2 is "1", the gaming machine 10 changes the number of reserved special charts 2 from "1" to "0" and executes the special chart 2 game in priority to the special chart 1 game.

The sequence 20a shows the game state "special chart 2 pattern stop (small win/big win)". When the gaming machine 10 derives a big win as a result of the variable display in the special chart 2 game, it moves directly to a big win operation (a big win operation in a type 1 game), and when the gaming machine 10 derives a small win as a result of the variable display in the special chart 2 game, it opens the special variable winning device (big winning port 2) 95 and opens the specific area 96.
If the player wins the lottery (type 2 game), the game moves to the big win operation (type 2 game big win operation).

The sequence 21a is a game state "small hit / big hit (with normal power support)" derived as a result of the special chart 2 game (including two types of games executed in relation to the result of the special chart 2 game).
It indicates that. In the game state "small hit/jackpot (with normal power support)", the jackpot is in operation, normal power support is "none", the probability fluctuation is "low probability", the number of reserved special chart 1 is "2", and the number of reserved special chart 2 is "0". In the game state "jackpot (with normal power support)", normal power support becomes "yes" after the jackpot ends. Since the gaming machine 10 can expect to win the normal variable winning device 37 in the "with support/low probability" state, it guides the game progress by right-hitting play.

The sequence 22a shows the game state "Special 1 pattern change" after the end of the jackpot.
The game machine 10 executes the special game 2 in priority to the special game 1, but since the special game 2 reserved number is "0", the special game 1 reserved number "2" is changed to "1" and the special game 1 is executed. After this,
Unless a jackpot is derived as a result of the change display in the special chart 1 game, the game will proceed by executing the special chart 1 game.

The sequence 23a shows the game state "special pattern 1 pattern change". When a win occurs in the normal variation winning device 37 during the variation display of the special pattern 1 game, the gaming machine 10 changes the special pattern 2 reserved number "0" to "1".
"

In this way, the gaming machine 10 has a playability that allows multiple jackpot occurrence opportunities to be obtained by repeatedly obtaining two more jackpot occurrence opportunities. At this time, the number of reserved special figures 1 may gradually decrease by repeatedly obtaining jackpot occurrence opportunities. However, the number of reserved special figures 1 may be decreased by the number of reserved special figures 1 that are obtained by the start winning slot 3.
The number of winnings can be increased if there is a win in number 6, but since the gaming machine 10 guides the game progress by playing from the right, while there are repeated opportunities for a jackpot, it is not possible to expect a chance of winning in the starting winning hole 36 as in the case of playing from the left.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 that has had many opportunities to win big prizes will, as shown in sequence m,
The number of reserved special figures 1 may converge to "0". Even in such a case, as shown in sequence m+1, it is possible to continue multiple jackpot occurrences while obtaining the opportunity to generate the reserved special figure 2 number.

Furthermore, after the special chart 1 reserved number reaches "0", as shown in the sequence n to n+1, multiple jackpots can continue to occur while providing an opportunity for the special chart 2 reserved number to occur without any change in the special chart 1 pattern.

Of the sequences shown in Figure 33, sequence 12 corresponds to the "normal mode" in the "no support/low probability" state shown in Figure 32, sequences 2 to 7 correspond to the "normal mode" in the "with support/low probability" state shown in Figure 32, and sequences 9 and 10 correspond to the "chance mode" in the "no support/low probability" state shown in Figure 32.

In addition, among the sequences shown in FIG. 34, sequences 12a to 17a, 22a, and 23
a, m, m+1, n to n+3 correspond to the "normal mode" in the "support/low probability" state shown in FIG. 32, and sequences 19a and 20a correspond to the "no support/low probability" state shown in FIG.
This corresponds to the "chance mode" in the current state.

Next, the selection of the variable display pattern of the special game 2 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display pattern selection table for the special chart 2 game of the third embodiment.

The special chart 2 game provides a variable display pattern pt1 with a time value of 10,000 ms (variable time), a variable display pattern pt2 with a time value of 20,000 ms, a variable display pattern pt3 with a time value of 30,000 ms, and a variable display pattern pt4 with a time value of 50,000 ms. That is,
The fluctuation time increases in the order of the fluctuation display patterns pt1, pt2, pt3, and pt4.

In selecting the variable display pattern of the special chart 2 game, the gaming machine 10 refers to the total value of the special chart 1 reserved number and the special chart 2 reserved number. When the total value of the special chart 1 reserved number and the special chart 2 reserved number is 2 or less,
The variable display pattern pt1 is selected with a probability pr1, and the variable display pattern pt2 is selected with a probability pr1.
The variable display pattern pt1 is selected with a probability pr2 smaller than the probability pr2, the variable display pattern pt3 is selected with a probability pr3 smaller than the probability pr2, and the variable display pattern pt4 is selected with a probability pr4 smaller than the probability pr3. In addition, when the total value of the special chart 1 reserved number and the special chart 2 reserved number is 3 or more, the variable display pattern pt1 is selected with a probability pr5, and the variable display pattern pt2 is selected with a probability pr2 larger than the probability pr5.
The variable display pattern pt3 is selected with a probability pr7 greater than the probability pr6, and the variable display pattern pt4 is selected with a probability pr8 greater than the probability pr7.

As explained with reference to Figures 33 and 34, the number of reserved special figures 2 in the gaming machine 10 can only take the value of "0" or "1", and the number of reserved special figures 1 gradually decreases with a large number of jackpot occurrence opportunities and converges to "0". In other words, the larger the total value of the number of reserved special figures 1 and 2, the higher the probability that the number of jackpot occurrences is small, and the smaller the total value, the higher the probability that the number of jackpot occurrences is large.

Therefore, the gaming machine 10 is designed to ensure time for performing highly entertaining effects by making it easier for a player to select a variable display pattern with a larger fluctuation time when the player is still excited after the first win. On the other hand, the gaming machine 10 is designed to ensure rapid game progress by making it easier for a player to select a variable display pattern with a smaller fluctuation time when the player has had many repeated jackpots since the first win.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can appropriately allocate between the execution of highly entertaining effects and rapid game progress according to the timing. This allows the gaming machine 10 to simultaneously suppress a decline in motivation to play when multiple jackpots are generated and increase interest through a variety of effects.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 has different probabilities of selecting a variable display pattern depending on whether the total value of the number of reserved special charts 1 and 2 is 2 or less or 3 or more; however, this is not limited to this as long as the larger the total value of the number of reserved special charts 1 and 2 is, the more likely it is that a variable display pattern with a larger fluctuation time will be selected, and the smaller the total value of the number of reserved special charts 1 and 2 is, the more likely it is that a variable display pattern with a smaller fluctuation time will be selected.

The likelihood of selecting a variation display pattern with a small variation time or the likelihood of selecting a variation display pattern with a large variation time can be defined by comparing the magnitude of the expected value of the variation time.

In addition, when selecting a variable display pattern for the special chart 1 game, the gaming machine 10 refers only to the number of reserved special charts 1, and the larger the number of reserved special charts 1, the more likely it is that a variable display pattern with a smaller variable time will be selected.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 performs four provisional stop displays and one actual stop display due to four pseudo fluctuations in the fluctuation display pattern pt1 with a time value of 10,000 ms, and
In the variation display pattern pt2 of 14 s, 14 pseudo variations are used to display 14 temporary stops and one actual stop. In the variation display pattern pt3 of 20000 ms,
24 temporary stop displays and 1 actual stop display are performed with 4 pseudo fluctuations, and the time value is 50
In the variable display pattern pt4 of 10,000 ms, 34 pseudo-variations result in 34 provisional stop displays and one actual stop display. The gaming machine 10 creates a sense of expectation for the actual stop display by the number of times that specific symbols (e.g., symbols "3" and "7") appear in the provisional stop display in each variable display pattern. For example, the gaming machine 10 creates a sense of expectation for a jackpot with the combination of symbols "3" or a jackpot with the combination of symbols "7" the more the symbols "3" and "7" appear in the provisional stop display in each variable display pattern. In addition, the gaming machine 10
The sense of expectation may be changed by changing the position at which a particular symbol appears or the manner in which it is displayed (for example, a missing symbol, as described below).

In addition, the gaming machine 10 creates a sense of expectation by treating a jackpot with a combination of the symbol "3" or a combination of the symbol "7" as a jackpot (with normal power support), and treating a jackpot with any other combination of symbols as a jackpot (without normal power support).
As long as it is possible to distinguish between a big win and a small win in the special pattern 2 pattern display section 54, the decorative pattern may represent a big win and a small win with the same pattern combination.

Next, an overview of the display device 830 will be described with reference to FIG. 36. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of an overview of the display device of the third embodiment. The display device 830 includes a center case 820.
It is provided in a recessed chamber formed by and includes a pattern display area 700, a hold display area 701 and decorative display areas 702, 703.

The pattern display area 700 is located in the center of the display device 830. The pattern display area 700 is
The symbol display area 700 can display symbols in a special game. The symbol display area 700 can notify the occurrence of a win or the like by a message, and has an aspect of a message display area in addition to the aspect of a symbol display area. The symbol display area 700 can also display decorations such as cherry blossom petals.
In addition to the aspect of the design display area, the design display area 700 also has an aspect of a decoration display area. Details of the design display area 700 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The reserved display area 701 is adjacent to the symbol display area 700 and is located below the symbol display area 700. The reserved display area 701 can display reserved displays in the special symbol game.
The reserved display area 701 can display decorations such as cherry blossom petals, and has an aspect of a decorative display area in addition to an aspect of a reserved display area. The details of the reserved display area 701 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The decoration display area 702 is adjacent to the reserved display area 701 and is located below the reserved display area 701. The decoration display area 702 can display decorations such as cherry blossom petals.
is located adjacent to and above the symbol display area 700. The decoration display area 703 can display decorations such as cherry blossom petals. The decoration display areas 702 and 703 can display decorations in cooperation with the symbol display area 700 and the reserved display area 701.

Next, the outline of the symbol display area 700 will be described with reference to FIG. 37. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an example of the outline of the symbol display area of the third embodiment. The symbol display area 700 has a left symbol display area 704, a center symbol display area 705, and a right symbol display area 706 arranged horizontally. The symbol display area 700 displays the symbol "7" in the left symbol display area 704 and the symbol "
"7" is displayed in the right pattern display area 706, and the pattern "7" is displayed in the right pattern display area 706.

The left pattern area 704, the middle pattern display area 705, and the right pattern display area 706 are each configured with segment display units 707, 708, each of which can be independently controlled to emit light, arranged in a matrix of 10 rows and 7 columns. Each of the segment display units 707, 708 is shaped like a cherry blossom petal, and can be lit up in cherry blossom pink by controlling the emission of the LEDs. The segment display unit 707 is shaped like a petal with an end pointing to the lower left, and the segment display unit 708 is shaped like a petal with an end pointing to the upper right. The left pattern area 704, the middle pattern display area 705, and the right pattern display area 706 are each
The segment display units 707 and the segment display units 708 are arranged alternately in both the row and column directions.

Next, the symbols of the special game displayed in the symbol display area 700 by the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to Fig. 38. Fig. 38 is a diagram showing an example of a symbol displayed in the symbol display area in the special game of the third embodiment.

The symbol 711 indicates the symbol “1” of the special game displayed in the symbol display area 700 .
The symbol 712 indicates the symbol "2" of the special game displayed in the symbol display area 700. The symbol 713 indicates the symbol "3" of the special game displayed in the symbol display area 700. The symbol 714 indicates the symbol "4" of the special game displayed in the symbol display area 700.
15 indicates the symbol "5" of the special game displayed in the symbol display area 700.
6 indicates the symbol "6" of the special game displayed in the symbol display area 700.
The symbol 718 indicates the symbol "8" of the special game displayed in the symbol display area 700. The symbol 719 indicates the symbol "7" of the special game displayed in the symbol display area 700.
It shows the symbol "9" of the special game displayed in the symbol display area 700. Symbol 720 shows the symbol "0" of the special game displayed in the symbol display area 700. Symbol 721 shows the symbol "cherry blossom" of the special game displayed in the symbol display area 700. Symbol 722 shows the symbol "flower" of the special game displayed in the symbol display area 700. Symbol 723 shows the symbol "treasure" of the special game displayed in the symbol display area 700. Symbol 724 shows the symbol "moon" of the special game displayed in the symbol display area 700. Symbol 725 shows the symbol "light" of the special game displayed in the symbol display area 700.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can display 15 types of symbols for the special game in the symbol display area 700. These 15 types of symbols have different display modes so that they can be distinguished from the other symbols even if the lighting mode of any one of the segment display units 707 and 708 is different.

For example, when a pattern is displayed on a 7-segment display having 7 segments from a segment to g segment, the pattern "8" is displayed when all segments from a segment to g segment are lit.
" can be displayed, lighting up the a-segment through the f-segment, excluding the g-segment (center horizontal), can display the pattern "0", and lighting up the a-segment through the d-segment, f-segment, and g-segment, excluding the e-segment (bottom left vertical), can display the pattern "9". On the other hand, if the e-segment is also used for decorative purposes and is turned on or off differently, the pattern will lose its distinctiveness. However, the 15 segments displayed in the pattern display area 700 can be displayed, and the pattern "2" can be displayed, and the pattern "3" can be displayed, and the pattern "4" can be displayed, and the pattern "5" can be displayed.
The symbols of each type are arranged so that one of the segment display units 707 and 708 has a different lighting mode for decorative purposes and does not lose its distinctiveness. The most similar symbols among the 15 symbols displayed in the symbol display area 700 are the symbol "8" and the symbol "0", and five specific symbols among the segment display units 707 and 708 have different lighting modes for the symbols "8" and "0".
Therefore, the 15 types of patterns displayed in the pattern display area 700 are configured so that they do not easily lose their distinguishability as patterns just because some of the segment display units are lit differently, as in the case of a 7-segment display unit.

Of the 15 types of symbols displayed in the symbol display area 700, the symbols "3" and "
The "7" is a specific symbol that will result in a jackpot (with normal power support) when combined with the same symbol. In addition, among the 15 types of symbols displayed in the symbol display area 700, the symbols other than the "3" and "7" are non-specific symbols that will result in a jackpot (without normal power support) when combined with the same symbol.

Next, an overview of the hold display area 701 will be described with reference to Fig. 39. Fig. 39 is a diagram showing an example of an overview of the hold display area of the third embodiment. The hold display area 701 includes a first hold display section 731 capable of displaying a first hold display, a second hold display section 732 capable of displaying a second hold display, a third hold display section 733 capable of displaying a third hold display, a fourth hold display section 734 capable of displaying a fourth hold display, and decorative display sections 735, 736, and 737.

The No. 1 hold display unit 731, the No. 2 hold display unit 732, the No. 3 hold display unit 733, and the No. 4 hold display unit 734 each include a flower-center-shaped segment display unit 731a and five petal-shaped segment display units 731b arranged around the segment display unit 731a. The segment display units 731a and 731b can be lit up in cherry blossom pink by controlling the light emission of the LEDs, and each can be controlled to emit light independently.

The reserved display area 701 can display reserved special game 1 or reserved special game 2 depending on the game status. Since the maximum reserved number of the special game 1 is "4", the reserved display area 701 displays reserved special game 1 using the reserved display unit 1 731, the reserved display unit 2 732, the reserved display unit 3 733, and the reserved display unit 4 734, but since the maximum reserved number of the special game 2 is "1", the reserved display area 701 displays reserved special game 2 using only the reserved display unit 1 731.

The decorative display parts 735, 736, and 737 are each shaped like cherry blossom petals, and are LED
The decorative display parts 735, 736, and 737 are petal-shaped with their ends facing random directions, and are responsible for the decorative display of the reserved display area 701, and can also perform decorative display in conjunction with the pattern display area 700 and the decorative display areas 702 and 703.

Next, the animation of the hold display performed when the hold memory occurs will be described with reference to Fig. 40. Fig. 40 is a diagram showing an example of the animation of the hold display according to the third embodiment.

The No. 1 hold display unit 731, the No. 2 hold display unit 732, the No. 3 hold display unit 733, and the No. 4 hold display unit 734 perform a hold display generation animation by sequentially switching the display state of the corresponding hold display unit using a predetermined time when a hold memory occurs.

When the reserved memory occurs, the reserved display section changes the display state 738 to the initial state, and the display state 739
The display state is switched in sequence with display state 738 being the intermediate state following display state 738, and display state 790 being the final state following display state 739.

Display state 738 is a display state (initial display state) in which segment display portion 731a and segment display portion 731b are turned off. Display state 739 is a display state (intermediate display state) in which segment display portion 731a is turned on and segment display portion 731b is turned off. Display state 790 is a display state (final display state) in which segment display portion 731a and segment display portion 731b are turned on.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can perform a reserved display effect when a reserved memory occurs. In this way, the gaming machine 10 can clearly indicate the occurrence of a reserved memory to the player and increase the player's interest in the occurrence of a reserved memory.

Next, as one of the display effects using the symbols of the special game displayed in the symbol display area 700, a symbol missing effect that can be executed by the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to Figs. 41 to 43. Fig. 41 is a diagram (part 1) showing an example of a symbol missing effect of the third embodiment.
Fig. 43 is a diagram (part 3) showing an example of the symbol missing effect of the third embodiment.

The symbol missing effect is a display effect in which a part of the symbol of the special symbol game is missing and displayed. As described above, the 15 types of symbols of the special symbol game have different display modes that can be distinguished from other symbols even if the lighting mode of any one of the segment display units 707 and 708 is different. Note that the 15 types of symbols of the special symbol game can be distinguished from other symbols even if the lighting mode of any two of the segment display units 707 and 708 is different, and can be easily distinguished from other symbols even if the lighting mode of three or more of the symbols is different depending on the position.

The symbol missing effect can give a player a sense of surprise and can call attention to the symbols. Furthermore, compared to displaying decorative elements such as characters separately, the symbol missing effect does not require excessive display data and has a light display control burden.

The pattern 713 shown in Fig. 41(1) is a display state in which there is no loss of the pattern "3" in the special game. The pattern 713 has a suitable discrimination ability as the pattern "3" because all of the segment display parts 707, 708 in the positions where they should be lit are lit, and all of the segment display parts 707, 708 in the positions where they should be turned off are turned off.

The symbol 713a shown in FIG. 41(2) is a display state in which one part of the symbol "3" in the special game is missing. The symbol 713a is a segment display unit 707 in a position where it should be lit.
, 708 are all lit except for segment display section 741, and all of segment display sections 707, 708 that should be turned off are turned off.
By turning off the part that should be lit as the "3", the part of the pattern 713a that is partially missing as the "3" is displayed. The pattern 713a has a sufficient discrimination ability as the pattern "3" although it has a partial loss as the pattern "3".

The symbol 713b shown in FIG. 41(3) is a display state in which one part of the symbol "3" in the special game is missing. The symbol 713b is a segment display unit 707 in a position where it should be lit.
, 708 are all lit except for segment display portion 743, and all of segment display portions 707, 708 that should be turned off are turned off. Segment display portion 743 is a portion of the display that displays the symbol "
By turning off the part that should be lit as the symbol "3", the symbol 713b is displayed as a partially missing symbol "3". The symbol 713b is partially missing as the symbol "3", but has sufficient discrimination as the symbol "3".

As shown in the patterns 713a and 713b, the gaming machine 10 can produce a partially missing display with different partially missing positions. In this case, the gaming machine 10 may produce a sense of expectation in the game depending on where the partially missing position is. For example, the gaming machine 10 may
In the matrix arrangement of 0 rows and 7 columns, the missing positions located in the upper left corner may be set to produce higher expectations, and the missing positions located in the lower right corner may be set to produce lower expectations. The expectations for the game can be set to produce a variety of expectations regarding the game, such as expectations for a win, expectations for the distribution of the presence or absence of normal power support, expectations for reach effects, etc.

The pattern 713c shown in Fig. 41 (4) is a display state in which the pattern "3" in the special game has multiple (for example, two) partial defects. In the pattern 713c, all of the segment display units 707, 708 in positions that should be lit are lit except for the segment display units 744, 745, and all of the segment display units 707, 708 in positions that should be turned off are turned off. The segment display units 744, 745 are turned off in positions that should be lit as the pattern "3", thereby producing a partial defect display as the pattern "3". Although the pattern 713c has partial defects as the pattern "3", it has sufficient discrimination as the pattern "3".

As shown in the pattern 713c, the gaming machine 10 can produce partial loss displays with different numbers of partial losses. In this case, the gaming machine 10 may produce a sense of anticipation for the game depending on the number of partial losses. For example, in a matrix arrangement of 10 rows and 7 columns, the gaming machine 10 may produce a sense of high anticipation as the number of losses increases and a sense of low anticipation as the number of losses decreases.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 may create a sense of expectation in the game not only by the number of partial defects but also by the location of the partial defects. For example, the gaming machine 10 may create a sense of expectation such that the more defects are concentrated in a specific location in a matrix arrangement of 10 rows and 7 columns, the higher the sense of expectation, and the more defects are spread out over the whole.

The pattern 713d shown in FIG. 41(5) is a display form that is a modification of the third embodiment.
The segment display units 744 and 745 are displayed in one of two states, a transparent state and a non-transparent state (cherry blossom color). The pattern 713d is a display mode that can be realized by using a semi-transmissive LCD display unit or an LCD display unit instead of the display unit 830. The pattern 713d is placed in front of the background display 746, and the background display 746 can be viewed from the segment display units 744 and 745 that are in the transparent state.

The symbol 713d is a display state in which the symbol "3" in the special game is not partially missing. The symbol 713d is a display state in which the segment display units 707 and 709 are in a position that should be opaque (cherry blossom color).
All of segment display parts 707, 708 located in positions that should be transparent are made opaque (cherry blossom pink), and all of segment display parts 707, 708 located in positions that should be transparent are made transparent, thereby providing a suitable discrimination ability as the pattern "3" while displaying the background display 746 transparently.

The symbol 713e shown in FIG. 41(6) is a display state in which one part of the symbol "3" (symbol 713d) in the special game is missing. In the symbol 713e, all of the segment display parts 707 and 708 that should be in a non-transparent state (cherry blossom color) except for the segment display part 747 are in a non-transparent state (cherry blossom color), and the segment display part 707 that should be in a transparent state is in a non-transparent state (cherry blossom color).
, 708 are all transparent. The segment display unit 747 is transparent in the areas that should be opaque (cherry blossom color) as the pattern "3", thereby producing a partially missing display as the pattern "3". The pattern 713e is partially missing as the pattern "3", but is still a pattern "3".
The pattern 713e has sufficient discrimination as a game. Moreover, the pattern 713e expands the visible range of the background display 746 by partially missing the pattern "3". The pattern 713e may also be designed to create a sense of anticipation for the game by varying the position or number of missing parts. The pattern 713e may also create a sense of anticipation for the game by the display mode of the background display 746 seen from the partially missing position. In such a case, the display mode of the background display 746 may be fixed or may change.

The pattern 713d shown in FIG. 41(5) may be displayed when the segment display units 744 and 745 are in one of three states: a transparent state, a non-transparent state (white), or a non-transparent state (cherry blossom color).
In the case of "pattern 713d," one part of the segment display portion 707, 708 is missing. In pattern 713f, all of the segment display portions 707, 708 that are in positions that should be opaque (cherry blossom color) are in an opaque state (cherry blossom color) except for segment display portion 748, and all of the segment display portions 707, 708 that are in positions that should be transparent are in a transparent state. Segment display portion 748
The part of the pattern "3" that should be opaque (cherry blossom color) is opaque (white), so that the pattern "3" is displayed as partially missing. The pattern 713f has a partially missing part as the pattern "3", but has sufficient discrimination as the pattern "3".
The symbol 713f makes it easy to distinguish between the partially missing symbol "3" and the background display 746.
Also, the position or number of missing pieces may be changed to create a sense of anticipation in the game.
When there are two or more defects, the pattern 713f may be a mixture of defects due to a non-transparent state (white) and defects due to a transparent state. In such a case, the pattern 713f may be a mixture of defects due to a non-transparent state (white) and defects due to a transparent state, so as to create a sense of expectation in playing the game.

The pattern 713g shown in FIG. 41(8) is a display state in which one part of the pattern "3" in the special game is missing. In the pattern 713g, all of the segment display units 707 and 708 that are in positions where they should be lit in cherry blossom color, except for the segment display unit 749, are lit in cherry blossom color, and all of the segment display units 707 and 708 that are in positions where they should be turned off are turned off.
The symbol 713g is partially missing as the symbol "3", but has sufficient discrimination as the symbol "3".
Although the symbol 713g, which should be lit in cherry blossom color as "3", flashes in cherry blossom color, the symbol "3" may be partially missing by flashing or lighting in a color other than cherry blossom color. In such a case, the symbol 713g may be designed to create a sense of anticipation for the game by the flashing manner (flashing pattern, cycle, etc.) or lighting color. Furthermore, the symbol 713g may be designed to create a sense of anticipation for the game by a combination of the missing position and number of missing parts in addition to the flashing manner and lighting color.

The symbol 713h shown in FIG. 42(1) is a display state in which one part of the symbol "3" in the special game is missing. The symbol 713h is a display state in which the segment display unit 707 in the position where it should be lit is missing.
, 708 are turned on, and all of the segment display sections 707, 708 that should be turned off are turned off except for the segment display section 750. The segment display section 750 is turned on with the symbol "
By lighting up the part that should be off as "3", it creates a partially missing display as pattern "3" (missing margin display, missing base display). Pattern 713h has a partially missing part as pattern "3", but has sufficient distinctiveness as pattern "3". From another perspective, pattern 713h has a partially redundant display as pattern "3", but has sufficient distinctiveness as pattern "3".

The symbol 713i shown in FIG. 42(2) is a display state in which one part of the symbol "3" in the special game is missing. In the symbol 713i, all of the segment display parts 707 and 708 that should be lit in cherry blossom color are lit in cherry blossom color, and the segment display part 707 that should be turned off is not lit in cherry blossom color.
, 708, all except for the segment display section 751 are turned off.
The symbol 713i is a symbol "3" that is supposed to be turned off, but instead flashes in cherry blossom color, creating a partially missing symbol "3" (a missing margin symbol, a missing base symbol).
From another point of view, the pattern 713i has sufficient discrimination as the pattern "3" even though it has a partial loss as the pattern "3". Note that the segment display unit 749 flashes cherry blossom color when it should light up in cherry blossom color as the pattern "3", but the pattern "3" can be achieved by flashing or lighting up in a color other than cherry blossom color.
It may also be possible to create a partial loss as shown in the figure.

The pattern 713j shown in FIG. 42(3) is a display state in which the pattern "3" in the special game has multiple (for example, two) partial defects. In the pattern 713j, all of the segment display units 707, 708 that are in positions where they should be lit are lit except for segment display unit 753, and all of the segment display units 707, 708 that are in positions where they should be turned off are turned off except for segment display unit 752. The segment display units 752, 753 are lit where they should be turned off as the pattern "3", and turned off where they should be lit, thereby displaying a partial defect display (
Although the pattern 713j is partially missing as the pattern "3", it has sufficient discrimination as the pattern "3".
3j is a combination of the lit part missing display and the unlit part missing display as the pattern "3", but the pattern "3
" and has sufficient distinctiveness as a

Pattern 713k shown in FIG. 42(4) is a display state in which there are multiple (for example, two) partial defects in the pattern "3" in the special game. In pattern 713k, all of the segment display units 707, 708 in positions that should be lit in cherry blossom pink, except for segment display unit 755, are lit in cherry blossom pink, and all of the segment display units 707, 708 in positions that should be turned off, except for segment display unit 754, are turned off. Segment display units 754, 755 flash when they should be turned off as the pattern "3," and flash when they should be lit, thereby producing a partial defect display (lighted portion defect display, unlit portion defect display) for the pattern "3." Pattern 713k is a display state in which there are multiple (for example, two) partial defects in the pattern "3." In pattern 713k, all of the segment display units 707, 708 in positions that should be turned off, except for segment display unit 755, are turned off.
From another perspective, pattern 713k has sufficient discrimination ability as pattern "3" even though it has a mixture of lit-up portion loss display and unlit-up portion loss display as pattern "3." Note that, although segment display units 754 and 755 flash in cherry blossom pink, the partial loss of pattern "3" may be achieved by flashing or lighting in a color other than cherry blossom pink.

The pattern 713m shown in Fig. 42(5) is a modified example of the pattern 713j shown in Fig. 42(3). The pattern 713m is capable of changing the position of the segment display unit that lights up at the position where it should be turned off. In the pattern 713m, the initial position of the segment display unit that lights up at the position where it should be turned off is the segment display unit 752, but this display mode can be changed to the adjacent segment display units 707,
As a result, the pattern 713m is displayed such that the segment display unit that is lit in the position where it should be turned off moves along the path 756. By moving the segment display unit that is lit in the position where it should be turned off to the segment display unit 753, the pattern 713m cancels out the partial loss that is lit in the position where it should be turned off and the partial loss that is turned off in the position where it should be lit, and the pattern 713
(See FIG. 23(1)). In this way, the pattern 713m moves within the pattern display area to display the position of the unlit portion missing display that is lit in the position where it should be unlit, or the position of the lit portion missing display that is unlit in the position where it should be lit. In such a case, the pattern 713m may be designed to create a sense of anticipation for the game by the movement path of the lit portion missing display or the movement path of the unlit portion missing display.

The pattern 713n shown in FIG. 42(6) is a modified example of the pattern 713m shown in FIG. 42(5). The pattern 713n moves and displays the position of the unlit portion missing display that is turned on at the position where it should be turned off, or the position of the lit portion missing display that is turned off at the position where it should be turned on, beyond the pattern display area.
In the case of the symbol 713n, the segment display unit 752 that is lit at the position where it should be turned off is moved along the path 757 to move outside the symbol display area, thereby correcting the lighting state of the segment display unit 752 to be turned off. In addition, the symbol 713n moves the segment display unit 753 that is turned off at the position where it should be turned on and the segment display unit 758 that is lit outside the symbol display area along the path 757 to move into the symbol display area, thereby correcting the lighting state of the segment display unit 753 to be turned on. In this way, the symbol 713n moves and displays the position of the unlit portion missing display that is lit at the position where it should be turned off or the position of the lit portion missing display that is turned off at the position where it should be turned on beyond the symbol display area. In such a case, the symbol 713n may be configured to create a sense of expectation for the game by the moving path of the lit portion missing display or the moving path of the unlit portion missing display.

The pattern 713p shown in FIG. 42(7) and the pattern 713q shown in FIG. 42(8) are the pattern 713 (
23(1)). The symbol 713p shows the symbol 713 moving up one row in the matrix-shaped symbol display area of 10 rows and 7 columns, and the symbol 713q shows the symbol 713 moving up one row in the matrix-shaped symbol display area of 10 rows and 7 columns.
In the figure, the symbol 713 is moved downward by one row in a matrix-shaped symbol display area of 10 rows and 7 columns. The gaming machine 10 can produce a temporary stop motion in which the symbol "3" swings up and down by switching between the symbols 713p, 713, 713q, 713, ....

At this time, the symbol 713p displays a part of the segment display section 762 in the top row 760 as being partially missing. Also, the symbol 713q displays a part of the segment display section 763 in the bottom row 761 as being partially missing. That is, the gaming machine 10 switches between the symbol 713 with no missing part and the symbols 713p and 713q with missing parts during the provisional stopping operation of the symbol "3",
The distinctiveness of the symbol "3" is ensured by the symbol 713.
Even if the symbols 713p and 713q are partially lost to the point where they lose some of their distinctiveness, a temporary stop operation that has the distinctiveness of the symbol "3" is realized. Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 can draw the player's attention to the symbols that are temporarily stopped by performing a partial loss effect at some timing of the temporary stop operation. Note that, although the gaming machine 10 performs a partial loss effect at some timing of the temporary stop operation, this is not limiting, and a partial loss effect may be performed at some timing in symbols that are displayed in a moving or deformed manner.

The left pattern area 704, the center pattern display area 705, and the right pattern display area 706 shown in FIG.
indicates a reach display state in which the left and right symbols are temporarily stopping and displaying the symbol "7", and the center symbol is fluctuating. The symbol "7" displayed in the left symbol area 704 is partially missing from the segment display unit 765, and the symbol "7" displayed in the right symbol area 706 is partially missing from the segment display unit 766. The segment display unit 765 and the segment display unit 766 are in the same positional relationship in the symbol display area in a matrix shape of 10 rows and 7 columns. In this way, the gaming machine 10 can perform symbol missing effect in a plurality of symbol areas, and in this case, the positions and number of the corresponding partially missing displays can be made the same. Such a gaming machine 10 reduces the control processing burden of the symbol missing effect.

The left pattern area 704, the center pattern display area 705, and the right pattern display area 706 shown in FIG.
indicates a reach display state in which the left and right symbols temporarily display the symbol "7" and the center symbol is fluctuating. The symbol "7" displayed by the left symbol area 704 is partially missing the segment display section 765, and the symbol "7" displayed by the right symbol area 706 is partially missing the segment display sections 766 and 767. The segment display section 765 and the segment display section 766 are in the same positional relationship in the symbol display area in a matrix of 10 rows and 7 columns, but the segment display section 765 and the segment display section 767 are not in the same positional relationship in the symbol display area in a matrix of 10 rows and 7 columns. In this way, when performing a symbol missing effect in a plurality of symbol areas, the gaming machine 10 can change the position and number of the corresponding partially missing display. In such a gaming machine 10, the symbols displayed in different symbol display areas can complement each other's distinguishability. In such a case, the gaming machine 10 may create a sense of expectation in the game by combining the missing modes of a plurality of symbols.

The left pattern area 704, the center pattern display area 705, and the right pattern display area 706 shown in FIG.
shows a state in which the left and center patterns temporarily display the pattern "7" and the right pattern temporarily displays the pattern "3." The pattern "7" displayed by the left pattern area 704 displays the segment display unit 768 as a lit-up portion missing, moves the missing display unit along path 769, and displays the segment display unit 770 as an unlit-up portion missing. The pattern "7" displayed by the center pattern area 705 displays the segment display unit 771 as a lit-up portion missing, moves the missing display unit along path 772, and displays the segment display unit 773 as an unlit-up portion missing.

In addition, since the segment display unit 770 is located outside the left pattern area 704, it can be a segment display unit included in the decorative display units 735, 736, 737 in the pending display area 701, or in the decorative display areas 702, 703.

In this way, the left pattern area 704, the center pattern display area 705, and the right pattern display area 706 can move and display the missing display part within each display area, and can also move and display the missing display part beyond each display area.

The left pattern area 704, the center pattern display area 705, and the right pattern display area 706 shown in FIG.
shows a state in which the left and middle symbols temporarily display the symbol "7" and the right symbol temporarily displays the symbol "3". The symbol "3" displayed in the right symbol display area 706 displays the segment display section 774 as a missing light, and the missing display section moves to the segment display section 771 of the middle symbol display area 705 via the path 775. As a result, the segment display section 771 of the middle symbol display area 705
The lighting portion missing display is restored to the normal display mode.

In addition, the symbol "7" displayed in the center symbol display area 705 restores the segment display section 773, which was displaying a missing unlit portion, to a normal display state, and the missing display portion is displayed in the left symbol display area 70 by a path 778.
As a result, the segment display section 773 in the center symbol display area 705 is restored to a normal display state with the unlit portion missing display, and the segment display section 768 in the left symbol display area 704 is moved to the normal display state.
The segment display unit 768 restores the display of the missing unlit portion to the normal display mode.

In this way, the left pattern area 704, the center pattern display area 705, and the right pattern display area 706 can move and display the missing display part between each display area.
05 and the right pattern display area 706 are between the same type of patterns (for example, the left pattern "7" and the middle pattern "7"
) to move the missing part, and between different patterns (for example, the right pattern "3" and the middle pattern "
7") to move the missing display area.

Next, the symbol missing effect of the modified example of the third embodiment is to replace the segment display that is a part of the symbol with a normal shape display, and to make the normal shape segment display missing. The symbol missing effect of the modified example will be described with reference to FIG. 44. FIG. 44 is a diagram showing an example of the symbol missing effect of the modified example of the third embodiment.

The display device 830a is, for example, an LCD display device, and displays the pattern by segments using the LCD. The left pattern area 704a, the center pattern display area 705a, and the right pattern display area 706a each display the pattern by a set of segment displays having a petal shape as a regular shape.

Such a display device 830a loses a portion of the design by changing the shape of segment display units 780 and 781. For example, segment display unit 780 changes its size and loses one petal-shaped segment display of the regular size. Also, segment display unit 781 changes its shape to a single flower and loses one petal-shaped segment display of the regular shape.

The display device 830a can perform a missing pending display presentation in the pending display area 701a, similar to the left pattern area 704a, middle pattern display area 705a, and right pattern display area 706a.

Next, the missing effect of the reserved display will be explained. Since the reserved display is also displayed as a set of a plurality of segment displays like the pattern, a missing effect can be performed by missing a part of it. First, the missing effect when the reserved display occurs will be explained using FIG. 45. FIG. 45 is a diagram (part 1) showing an example of a missing effect when the reserved display occurs in the third embodiment.

As described with reference to Fig. 40, the gaming machine 10 performs a generation animation of the reserved display when a reserved memory occurs. When a missing item effect is not performed, the generation animation sequentially switches the display state of the reserved display section corresponding to the occurrence of the reserved memory, with display state 738 being the initial state, display state 739 being the intermediate state following display state 738, and display state 790 being the final state following display state 739.

On the other hand, when performing a loss effect, the generated animation sequentially switches the display state for the pending display part corresponding to the occurrence of the pending memory, with display state 738 as the initial state, display state 739 as the intermediate state following display state 738, and display state 791 as the final state following display state 739. Alternatively, the generated animation sequentially switches the display state for the pending display part corresponding to the occurrence of the pending memory, with display state 738 as the initial state, display state 739 as the intermediate state following display state 738, and display state 792 as the final state following display state 739.

The display state 790 is a display state (final display state) in which the segment display portion 731a and the segment display portion 731b are lit, and is a display state without any loss. The display state 791 is a display state (final display state) in which the segment display portion 731a is lit and the segment display portion 731b is turned off, and is a display state with some loss. The display state 792 is a display state (final display state) in which the segment display portion 731a is turned off and the segment display portion 731b is lit, and is a display state with some loss. In this way, the gaming machine 10 can perform a loss presentation when a reserved display occurs. In addition, since the gaming machine 10 can perform different types of loss presentation when a reserved display occurs, a sense of expectation for playing may be created depending on the loss type of the reserved display.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 has three final states (display state 79
However, the display state 790 may be an intermediate state and the game may branch into three final states (display states 790, 791, 792).
The three final states (display state 79) are obtained by excluding intermediate states from the initial state (display state 738).
0, 791, 792).

Here, the different development forms of the missing part effects will be described with reference to FIG. 28. FIG.
FIG. 2 shows an example of a missing display when a hold display occurs in the embodiment.
46(1), display state 738 is the initial state, display state 739 is the intermediate state following display state 738, and display state 791 is the final state following display state 739. This type of developed form (deficit pattern 1) can create a strong sense of surprise because it does not include display state 790, which has no loss display, as an intermediate state.

46(2) has display state 738 as the initial state, display state 739 as the intermediate state following display state 738, display state 790 as the intermediate state following display state 739, and display state 791 as the final state following display state 790. This type of developed form (deficit pattern 2) holds display state 790, which is the intermediate state, for a predetermined period of time, and can perform a deficit display presentation with a time lag, thereby producing a belated sense of surprise.

46(3), display state 738 is the initial state, display state 739 is the intermediate state following display state 738, and display state 792 is the final state following display state 739. This type of developed form (deficit pattern 3) can create a strong sense of surprise because it does not include display state 790, which has no loss display, as an intermediate state.

46(4) has display state 738 as the initial state, display state 739 as the intermediate state following display state 738, display state 790 as the intermediate state following display state 739, and display state 792 as the final state following display state 790. This type of developed form (deficit pattern 4) holds display state 790, which is the intermediate state, for a predetermined period of time, and can provide a time lag for the deficit display presentation, thereby producing a belated sense of surprise.

In this way, since the gaming machine 10 can perform a loss presentation in different development forms when a hold display occurs, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation for the game depending on the development form up to the loss state when the hold display occurs.

Next, the display mode of the hold display section will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the hold display section of the third embodiment. FIG. 47 (1) shows a hold display area 70
In FIG. 1, when the reserved display of the special game 1 is performed, the reserved memory number of the special game 1 is "0" (special game 1 reserved 0). At this time, the reserved display area 701 is a reserved display area 731, a reserved display area 732, a reserved display area 733, and a reserved display area 734.
34 and the decorative display parts 735, 736, and 737 are displayed in an unlit state.

FIG. 47 (2) shows a state where the reserved memory number of the special game 1 is "3" when the reserved display of the special game 1 is being performed in the reserved display area 701, and the third reserved display is displayed as missing (special game 1 reserved 3 (missing number 3)). At this time, the reserved display area 701 displays the No. 1 reserved display section 731 and the No. 2 reserved display section 732 in the display state 790, and the No. 3 reserved display section 7
33 is displayed in the display state 791, and the fourth reserved display section 734 and the decorative display sections 735, 736, and
37 is displayed in an unlit state.

The reserved display area 701 in FIG. 47(3) shows a state in which the reserved memory number of the special game 1 is "2".
This shows that the second reserved display is missing (Special Chart 1 Reserve 2 (No. 2 Missing)). At this time, the reserved display area 701 displays the No. 1 reserved display section 731 in the display state 790,
The second hold display section 732 is displayed in the display state 791, and the third hold display section 733, the fourth hold display section 734, and the decorative display sections 736 and 737 are displayed in the off state.
is lit in a display mode indicating that a variable display is being performed. In the reserved display area 701, instead of providing a reserved digestion display for indicating that a reserved item is being digested, the decorative display unit 735 also serves as the reserved digestion display.

The reserved display area 701 in FIG. 47(4) shows a state where a reserved game has been created from the state in FIG. 47(3). Thus, FIG. 47(4) shows a state where the reserved memory count for the special game 1 is "3", the second reserved display is missing, and the third reserved display is displaying a generated animation (special game 1 reserved 3 (missing game 2, generating animation 3)). At this time, the reserved display area 701 shows the No. 1 reserved display section 731 in the display state 790, and the No. 2 reserved display section 7
The No. 32 and No. 3 reserved display areas 733 are displayed in the display state 791, and the No. 4 reserved display area 734 and the decorative display area 736 are displayed in the off state. The decorative display area 735 is lit in a display state indicating that a variable display is in progress, and the decorative display area 737 is lit in a display state indicating that a reserved item has been generated.
01, the decorative display section 737 indicates that a hold has occurred, informing users that the No. 3 hold display section 733 in which a hold is occurring has not been confirmed as a missing display.

The reserved display area 701 in Fig. 47(5) shows the state where the animation that was taking place in the state of Fig. 47(4) has ended. Therefore, Fig. 47(5) shows the number of reserved memories for the special game chart 1 being "3", and the second reserved display being missing (special game chart 1 reserved 3 (number 2 missing)). At this time, the reserved display area 701 displays the number 1 reserved display section 731 and the number 3 reserved display section 733 in display state 790, and displays the number 2 reserved display section 732 in display state 791,
The No. 4 reserved display section 734 and the decorative display sections 736 and 737 are displayed in an off state. The decorative display section 735 is lit in a display mode indicating that a variable display is in progress. The reserved display area 701 notifies the user that the No. 3 reserved display section 733, which has been placed on hold due to the decorative display section 737 being turned off, will not display a missing item. The No. 3 reserved display section 733 may display a missing item at a different time, such as during a shift.

FIG. 47 (6) shows a state where the reserved memory number of the special game 2 is "1" (special game 2 reserved 1) when the reserved display of the special game 2 is being performed in the reserved display area 701. At this time, the reserved display area 701 displays the No. 1 reserved display section 731 in the display state 790, and the No. 2 reserved display section 732, the No. 3 reserved display section 733, the No. 4 reserved display section 734, and the decorative display sections 735 and 736.
The decorative display unit 736 is turned on in a display mode indicating that the special game 2 is on hold. The reserved display area 701 is provided with a display mode indicating that the special game 1 is on hold and the special game 2 is on hold. Instead of providing a special display to distinguish between the special game 1 and the special game 2, the decorative display unit 73
6 also serves as a distinguishing mark.

In addition, when performing the missing symbol or reserved display missing effect, the gaming machine 10 can execute other effects (special effects) in addition to the missing symbol or reserved display missing effect. For example, the special effect is a moving display effect of the missing symbol display part performed in conjunction with the missing symbol or a moving display effect of the decorative display part 735 in conjunction with the missing symbol or reserved display missing effect.
, 736, 737. The special effects include effects related to the reserved display during the missing symbol effect, and effects related to the symbols during the missing symbol effect. The special effects include effects related to the reserved display area 700, the reserved display area 701, the decorative display area 702, and the like.
, 703, a petal scattering effect using a segment display unit that resembles a petal, and other effect effects. In addition to other display effects performed by the display device 830, the special effects include sound output effects performed by the sound output devices 19a, 19b, etc., operation effects performed using the push button 25, etc., light emission effects performed by the board decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18, and movable effects performed by the board decoration device 44, etc.

Next, as a modification of the third embodiment, a missing part effect for a symbol that displays an outline in an emphasized manner and an indistinct (non-emphasized) manner in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
A figure showing the highlighted and ambiguous (non-highlighted) display of the outline of the pattern during a missing effect in a modified example of the third embodiment.

The pattern width and outline of the decorative pattern A and the decorative pattern B during the missing part performance are shown in FIG. 48 (1), and the comparison of the outline thickness of the decorative pattern A and the decorative pattern B during the missing part performance and the outline thickness of the missing part is shown in FIG. 48 (2).
As shown in.

The decorative pattern A and the decorative pattern B can each perform a missing part of the pattern. When the missing part of the pattern causes a missing outline, the decorative pattern A and the decorative pattern B each display a missing part outline corresponding to the missing part of the pattern.

The decorative pattern A has a pattern width of w1, a number width of w2 (<w1), a number outline width (thickness) of w3 (<w2), and a missing portion outline width of w10. The decorative pattern B has a pattern width of w4, a pattern outline width (thickness) of w5 (<w4), and a missing portion outline width of w11.

The game machine 10 makes the width w3 of the contour line of the number part of the decorative pattern A larger than the width w5 of the contour line of the decorative pattern B, thereby making the player aware that the contour display of the number part of the decorative pattern A is emphasized and the contour display of the decorative pattern B is blurred.

In addition, the missing portion outline width w10 is thinner than the outline width w3 of the number part of the decorative pattern A, which can help to appreciate the width w3 of the outline of the number part of the decorative pattern A. In addition, the missing portion outline width w11 is thinner than the outline width w5 of the decorative pattern B, which can help to appreciate the width w5 of the outline of the decorative pattern B.

In addition, the thickness w10 of the contour of the missing portion is thicker than the width w3 of the contour of the number portion of the decorative pattern A, which can help the user to sense the missing portion of the number portion of the decorative pattern A. In addition, the thickness w11 of the contour of the missing portion is thicker than the width w5 of the contour of the pattern of the decorative pattern B, which can help the user to sense the missing portion of the pattern of the decorative pattern B.

Furthermore, by making the contour line width w10 of the missing portion of decorative pattern A and the contour line width w11 of the missing portion of decorative pattern B the same thickness, the gaming machine 10 can use this as a standard for perceiving the contour line width w3 of the number portion of decorative pattern A or the contour line width w5 of the pattern of decorative pattern B.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 may set the thickness w10 of the contour of the missing portion of the decorative pattern A to be different from the thickness w11 of the contour of the missing portion of the decorative pattern B. In this case, the gaming machine 10 may set the thickness w10 of the contour of the missing portion of the decorative pattern A to be different from the pattern width w1, the width w2 of the number portion, or the width w3 of the contour of the number portion.
The game machine 10 may determine the decorative pattern B
The thickness w11 of the contour of the missing portion may be determined according to the ratio or difference between the width w4 of the pattern or the width w5 of the contour of the pattern.

The gaming machine 10 may also be one that varies the size of the contour line width w10 of the missing portion of the decorative pattern A, and guides the player's sense of anticipation in the game according to the size of the contour line width w10 of the missing portion of the decorative pattern A. The gaming machine 10 may also be one that varies the size of the contour line width w11 of the missing portion of the decorative pattern B, and guides the player's sense of anticipation in the game according to the size of the contour line width w11 of the missing portion of the decorative pattern B.

In addition, the thickness w10 of the contour line of the missing portion of the decorative pattern A and the thickness w11 of the contour line of the missing portion of the decorative pattern B may be fixed at all times, or may be switchable depending on the variable display state. For example,
The emphasis on the outline of the number part of the decorative pattern A and the de-emphasis on the outline of the pattern of the decorative pattern B are as follows:
It may be fixed at all times, or may be switchable depending on the changing display state. In that case, from the viewpoint of making it easier to perceive the emphasis on the outline display of the number part of decorative pattern A and the de-emphasis on the outline display of the pattern of decorative pattern B, it is desirable that the outline thickness w10 of the missing part of decorative pattern A and the outline thickness w11 of the missing part of decorative pattern B are fixed.

The de-emphasis of the outline of the number part of the decorative pattern A and the emphasis of the outline of the pattern of the decorative pattern B are as follows:
It may be fixed at all times, or may be switchable depending on the changing display state. In that case, from the viewpoint of easily perceiving the de-emphasis of the outline display of the number portion of decorative pattern A and the emphasis of the outline display of the pattern of decorative pattern B, it is desirable that the outline thickness w10 of the missing portion of decorative pattern A and the outline thickness w11 of the missing portion of decorative pattern B are fixed.

Next, a more detailed display mode of the decorative symbols A and B during the temporary stop display will be described with reference to Fig. 49. Fig. 49 is a diagram showing an example of a temporary stop display using decorative symbols during the missing performance of the modified example of the third embodiment. Note that the same reference numerals may be used to designate the same components as those in the first embodiment, and the description may be omitted.

FIG. 49(1) shows a temporary stop display mode of the symbol 527 as an example of the decorative symbol A during the temporary stop display while performing the missing effect. The temporary stop display mode of the symbol 527 is (a), (b), (c), (d), (e), (f), (g), (h), (h), (i), (i), (j), (i), (j,j,j,j,
Steps c) and d) are repeated periodically.

When the pattern 527 is displayed in a temporary stop state, the background portion 527d is fixed, and the number portion 527n, which is missing part of it but still has the ability to be identified as the pattern 527, swings left and right (first temporary stop action) while expanding and contracting up and down (second temporary stop action).

The numeral part 527n expands and contracts in the vertical direction while oscillating in the horizontal direction with the relative position, relative size, and (relative) thickness w10 of the contour of the defect fixed.
The term "relative" here refers to the relationship between the number portion 527n and the missing portion, and the term "absolute" refers to the relationship between the display area of the display device 830 and the display position of the missing portion.

Furthermore, the numeric portion 527n may be displayed in a provisional stop state by varying at least one of the position, size, and contour line width w10 of the missing portion (third provisional stop operation).
In addition, instead of the number portion 527n swinging left and right and expanding and contracting up and down,
The temporary stopping operation may be performed by varying at least one of the position, size, and thickness w10 of the contour of the defect.

49(2) and (3) show a temporary stop display mode of the symbol 537 as an example of the decorative symbol B during the temporary stop display while performing the missing effect. The temporary stop display mode of the symbol 537 is as follows:
, (b), (c), and (d) are repeated periodically. The symbol 537 displayed as a provisional stop oscillates in the vertical direction as a whole while a part of the symbol 537 is missing.

The pattern 537 may be displayed as a temporary stop by varying at least one of the position, size, and thickness w11 of the contour of the missing portion. Also, instead of swinging in the up-down direction, the pattern 537 may be displayed as a temporary stop by varying at least one of the position, size, and thickness w11 of the contour of the missing portion.

In addition, the decorative pattern B shown in FIG. 49 (2) that is temporarily stopped while performing the missing effect is
This is a display mode in which the relative position of the missing part with respect to the pattern 537 is fixed (not variable), and the absolute position is variable (not fixed) with respect to the display area of the display device 830. This type of missing part display makes it possible to display the pattern 537 and the missing part as one unit, and also makes it possible to increase the display range of the rear side facing the missing part by swinging the pattern 537.

In addition, the decorative pattern B shown in FIG. 49(3) that is temporarily stopped while performing the missing effect is
This is a display mode in which the relative position of the missing part with respect to the pattern 537 is variable (not fixed), and the absolute position is fixed (not variable) with respect to the display area of the display device 830. This type of missing part display can display the pattern 537 without a sense of unity with the missing part, and can fix the display range on the rear side facing the missing part even if the pattern 537 sways.

Next, as a modification of the third embodiment, the application of a loss effect to the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment in which the thickness of the outline display of the decorative pattern can be changed for each part will be described with reference to Fig. 50. Fig. 50 is a diagram showing an example of a temporary stop mode of the decorative pattern during the loss effect of the modification of the third embodiment.

The figure shows a partially missing "7" (pattern 537) of decorative pattern B shown in FIG. 50(1) rotated along the vertical axis and displayed temporarily stopped. Pattern 550 shows the "7" of decorative pattern B rotated left along the vertical axis by a predetermined angle. Pattern 551 shows the "7" of decorative pattern B as seen from the front. Pattern 552 shows the "7" of decorative pattern B rotated right along the vertical axis by a predetermined angle. For example,
The gaming machine 10 can perform a provisional stop display by switching from the symbol 550 to the symbol 551 to the symbol 552, and then from the symbol 552 to the symbol 551 to the symbol 550.

At this time, the gaming machine 10 can switch the thickness (degree of emphasis) of the outline display for each of the switching target outline display parts (the left half of the pattern and the right half of the pattern) as shown in FIG. 50(2).
Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 can change the thickness (degree of emphasis) of the contour display of the missing part, as shown in FIG. 50(2).

In the gaming machine 10, the left half of the pattern 550 is referred to as the left part 550L, and the right half of the pattern 550 is referred to as the right part 550R.
50R, the outline of the left part 550L that appears to move away is displayed thin (non-highlighted, vague), and the outline and missing part outline of the right part 550R that appears to move toward are displayed thick (highlighted). In other words, the gaming machine 10 displays the outline of the left part 550L that appears farther away than the right part 550R thinner than the outline and missing part outline of the right part 550R, and displays the outline and missing part outline of the right part 550R that appears closer than the left part 550L thicker than the outline of the left part 550L.

In addition, when the left half of the pattern 551 is the left portion 551L and the right half of the pattern 551 is the right portion 551R, the gaming machine 10 sets the outline display of the left portion 551L, the outline display of the right portion 551R, and the outline display of the missing portion to a standard thickness (standard display). In other words, the gaming machine 10 displays the outline display of the left portion 551L, the outline display of the right portion 551R, and the outline display of the missing portion, which are seen at approximately the same depth position, to the same thickness (standard thickness).

In addition, when the left half of the pattern 552 is the left part 552L and the right half of the pattern 552 is the right part 552R, the gaming machine 10 displays the outline of the left part 552L, which appears to move in the approaching direction, in a thicker outline (highlighted), and displays the outline of the right part 552R, which appears to move in the receding direction, and the outline of the missing part in a thinner outline (non-highlighted, vague).
The contour display of the right part 552R, which is seen farther away than the left part 552L, and the contour display of the missing part are displayed in the left part 55
The contour display of the left portion 552L, which appears closer to the right portion 552R than the contour display of the missing portion, is displayed thicker than the contour display of the right portion 552R.

This allows the gaming machine 10 to easily grasp the temporary stop display state of the decorative symbols and the missing effect. The left and right parts of the symbols may be uniformly highlighted or unhighlighted, or the degree of highlighting or unhighlighting may be varied depending on the distance from the vertical axis (center axis).

In addition, the gaming machine 10 may divide one missing display into two areas in the temporary stop display state of the decorative symbol, and control the thickness of the missing part outline display in each area.
Alternatively, more than one missing display may be displayed, and the thickness of the missing portion outline display may be controlled for each missing display. For example, the gaming machine 10 displays the missing portion outline display thin (non-highlighted, vague) for the left missing portion of the pattern 550 (the left region when one missing display is divided into two, or the left missing display of the two missing displays), and displays the missing portion outline display thick (highlighted) for the right missing portion (the right region when one missing display is divided into two, or the right missing display of the two missing displays). The gaming machine 10 also sets the missing portion outline display to a standard thickness for the left missing portion and right missing portion of the pattern 551 (standard display).
0 displays the outline of the missing portion on the left side of the design 552 in a thicker color (highlighted), and displays the outline of the missing portion on the right side in a thinner color (not highlighted, ambiguous).

In addition, the gaming machine 10 may display the missing portion outline without an outline display when the decorative symbol is in a provisionally stopped display state.
In addition, the gaming machine 10 may display the missing part outline display with a thickness in the depth direction in the temporary stop display state of the decorative pattern, and in this case, the thickness of the missing part outline display may be controlled at the front position and the depth position of one missing part display. For example, the gaming machine 10 displays the missing part outline display thin (non-highlighted display, vague display) in front of the missing part with depth of the pattern 550, and displays the missing part outline display thick (highlighted display) in the back of the missing part with depth. In addition, the gaming machine 10 sets the missing part outline display to a standard thickness (standard display) in front of the missing part with depth of the pattern 551 and the back of the missing part with depth. In addition, the gaming machine 10 displays the missing part outline display thick (highlighted display) in front of the missing part with depth of the pattern 552, and displays the missing part outline display thin (non-highlighted display, vague display) in the back of the missing part with depth.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 may perform a missing effect on the message effect in the variable display game described with reference to FIG. 23, and can perform a missing effect on the message display in which the thickness of the outline display part of the message display is controlled.
0 allows you to control the position, number, size, and outline thickness of missing parts when displaying a message.

The gaming machine 10 of the above-described third embodiment (including the modified examples) has the following feature in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a first presentation means (for example, a game control device 100a that performs a missing presentation, a presentation control device 300, a display device 83, etc.) that can display display elements (for example, a special symbol, a reserved display) related to a game (for example, a special symbol 1 game, a special symbol 2 game) to present the game.
0), and a second presentation means capable of presenting a game in a presentation mode different from that of the first presentation means at the same time as the first presentation means (for example, a game control device 100a that performs a special presentation, a presentation control device 300
, display device 830), and the first presentation means, when displaying the display elements, is capable of displaying in a first state in which all of the display elements are displayed (for example, pattern 713, display state 790 of the pending display) and a second state in which a portion of the display elements is missing (for example, pattern 713a, display state 791 of the pending display) (see Figures 41 and 47).

(2) The gaming machine 10 includes a first presentation means (for example, a game control device 100a, a presentation control device 300, a display device 83, etc.) that can display display elements (for example, a special symbol, a reserved display) related to a game (for example, a special symbol 1 game, a special symbol 2 game) to present the game.
0), and a second presentation means capable of presenting a game in a presentation mode different from that of the first presentation means at the same time as the first presentation means (for example, a game control device 100a that performs a special presentation, a presentation control device 300
, display device 830), and the first performance means, when displaying the display element as a collection of two or more display components (for example, lighted ones of segment display units 707, 708), produces a first state (for example, pattern 71) in which the display element is displayed by all of the display components.
3, a display state 790 of the reserved display) and a second state in which a display element is displayed by missing a part of the display component (for example, a pattern 713a, a display state 791 of the reserved display) (
See Figures 41 and 47.

(3) The display elements (1) or (2) are patterns that are displayed variably during the game.
See Figures 41 to 43.
(4) The display element (1) or (2) is a reservation display that indicates the right to play the game in the game (see Figures 45 to 47).

(5) The gaming machine 10 includes a control unit (e.g., the game control device 100a, the presentation control device 300) that can exclusively execute a first game (e.g., the special chart 1 game) and a second game (e.g., the special chart 2 game) at a predetermined execution time (e.g., a variable display time). The control unit determines the execution time of the first game based on the total value of the number of stored execution rights for the first game and the number of stored execution rights for the second game (see FIG. 35).

(6) The control unit of (5) determines that the execution time of the first game is longer as the sum of the number of stored execution rights for the first game and the number of stored execution rights for the second game is larger (see FIG. 35).

(7) The control unit of (5) determines that the expected execution time of the first game is greater as the sum of the number of stored execution rights for the first game and the number of stored execution rights for the second game is greater (see FIG. 35).

(8) The gaming machine 10 includes a control unit (e.g., the gaming control device 100a, the presentation control device 300) capable of exclusively executing a first game (e.g., the special chart 1 game) and a second game (e.g., the special chart 2 game) at a predetermined execution time (e.g., a variable display time). The control unit determines the execution time of the first game based on the number of stored execution rights for the first game and the number of stored execution rights for the second game, and determines the execution time of the second game based only on the number of stored execution rights for the second game, regardless of the number of stored execution rights for the first game (see FIG. 35).

(9) The maximum number of play rights for the second game in (5) to (8) that can be stored is smaller than the maximum number of play rights for the first game (see FIG. 31).
(10) The maximum number of execution rights for the second game in (9) that can be stored is 1 (see FIG. 31).
.

[Fourth embodiment]
In the description of the gaming machines of the first to third embodiments, a gaming board 30 (see FIG. 2)
28 or a game board 800 (see FIG. 28), the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment can be applied to either of them. Note that the same reference numerals may be used to designate the same components as those of the first to third embodiments, and the description thereof may be omitted.

The gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment informs the player of the result of the variable display game in advance by an advance notice, thereby preventing the game presentation after the advance notice from becoming redundant and reducing a decline in interest.

First, three variable display commands (variable display commands A, B, and C) that can be notified in advance and have different variable display times among the variable display commands prepared by the gaming machine 10 will be described. First, variable display command A that can derive a win in a relatively short time will be described with reference to Fig. 51. Fig. 51 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display mode corresponding to variable display command A of the fourth embodiment.

The variable display command A is one of the variable display commands that the game control device 100 transmits to the performance control device 300. The game control device 100 may transmit a stop pattern command, a reserved display command, etc. together with the variable display command. The variable display command A is a command corresponding to the variable display performance of the variable time T0.

The performance control device 300 receives the variable display command A, generates a variable display performance with a variable time T0, and executes the variable display performance in a required performance device. The variable display command A has an aspect that the variable time is short, so there is not enough time to perform various performances, but it also has an aspect that the time required to derive the result is fast.

The performance control device 300 executes a first half variation and a second half variation within the variation time T0. The first half variation is a common performance mode for multiple variation display commands, and is responsible for, for example, the period until the stopped displayed symbols are displayed to vary at a predetermined speed. The second half variation is a performance mode that differs for each variation display command, and is responsible for, for example, the period until the symbols are stopped, including reach performance. The variation display command A allocates time T01 of the variation time T0 to the first half variation, and time T02 to the second half variation. Note that time T01 is shorter than time T02.

The latter half of the change display command A includes a notice performance at time T021, a reach performance at time T022, and a short SP (special) reach performance at time T023.
It is a performance that predicts the result of the variable display game with a predetermined reliability. For example, the prediction performance includes a confirmed prediction (certain win prediction) performance that predicts a confirmed jackpot, a high reliability prediction performance that predicts a jackpot with a higher reliability than the low reliability prediction performance, and a low reliability prediction performance that predicts a jackpot with a lower reliability than the high reliability prediction performance. The prediction performance may also predict the value of the win or the performance mode of the process of deriving the win.

The reach effect is the effect of the variable display process of the variable display game, and for example, the reach establishment process and the reach with low expectation that is considered to be a normal reach are produced. The short SP reach effect is one form of the developed reach that develops from the normal reach, and produces a reach with a medium expectation.

In addition, the variable display command A is for deriving a win as a result of the short SP reach presentation, and the gaming machine 10 prepares a command for deriving a miss as a result in addition to the variable display command A.

Next, the variable display command B that can derive a hit in a longer time than the variable display command A will be described with reference to Fig. 52. Fig. 52 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display mode corresponding to the variable display command B of the fourth embodiment.

The variable display command B is one of the variable display commands that the game control device 100 transmits to the presentation control device 300. The variable display command B is a command corresponding to the variable display presentation of the variable time T1 (>T0).

The performance control device 300 receives the variable display command B, generates a variable display performance with a variable time T1, and executes the variable display performance in a required performance device. The variable display command B has a longer variable time than the variable display command A, so it can perform more diverse performances than the variable display command A, but it also has a slower time to derive a result than the variable display command A.

The performance control device 300 executes the first half variation and the second half variation in the variation time T1. The variation display command B assigns the time T11 (=T01) of the variation time T1 to the first half variation and the time T12 (>T02) to the second half variation. Note that the time T11 is shorter than the time T12.

The latter half of the change display command B includes a notice performance at time T121, a reach performance at time T122, and a long SP reach performance at time T123 (performance pattern B01).
The notice performance at time T121, the reach performance at time T122, and the time T124 (= T023)
There is also a case where the short SP reach effect is included, and a winning confirmation effect during the fluctuation of time T125 (effect pattern B02).

The long SP reach performance is a form of an advanced reach that develops from a normal reach, and produces a reach with a high expectation. The winning confirmation performance during the change produces a performance that a win is confirmed before the variation display result is derived. The winning confirmation performance during the change may be, for example, a fanfare performance performed during the change, or a lottery performance such as a pattern, probability change, or normal power support. The winning confirmation performance during the change may also be a freeze performance or a lively performance, and may also display the remaining time of the change. The winning confirmation performance during the change may be performed by displaying a pattern as a result of the change display, or may be performed by concealing the pattern as a result of the change display. Even if the winning confirmation performance during the change is performed by concealing the pattern as a result of the change display, the pattern as a result of the change display is displayed by the end of the winning confirmation performance during the change.

The performance control device 300 can selectively execute performance pattern B01 and performance pattern B02 when receiving a variable display command B, and when a winning performance is executed in the advance notice performance, the performance pattern B02 is made easier to select than the performance pattern B01.

Since the gaming machine 10 makes it easier to select a presentation pattern B02 capable of announcing the result before the presentation pattern B01, since arousing a sense of expectation in the presentation after the execution of the final notice presentation does little to contribute to increasing interest. In this way, the gaming machine 10 prevents the game presentation after the notice presentation from becoming redundant and causing a decrease in interest, and enables the game presentation after the result is finalized even during the variable display, thereby increasing interest.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can make the game presentation after the advance notice non-redundant by the amount that the time T124 of the short SP reach presentation is shorter than the time T123 of the long SP reach presentation. Also, the gaming machine 10 can allocate only the time T125 of the variable winning confirmation presentation to the presentation after the winning confirmation.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 informs the game result by the short SP reach presentation similar to that of the variable display command A in the variable display command B, which has a longer variable time than the variable display command A,
By allocating variable winning effects to the surplus time, non-redundant game progress can be achieved.

In addition, the variable display command B derives a win as a result of the short SP reach presentation or the long SP reach presentation, and the gaming machine 10 prepares a command that derives a miss as a result separately from the variable display command B.

Next, a variable display command C that can derive a hit in a longer time than the variable display command B will be described with reference to Fig. 53. Fig. 53 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display mode corresponding to the variable display command C of the fourth embodiment.

The variable display command C is one of the variable display commands that the game control device 100 transmits to the presentation control device 300. The variable display command C is a command corresponding to the variable display presentation of the variable time T2 (>T0, T1).

The performance control device 300 receives the variable display command C, generates a variable display performance of a variable time T2, and executes the variable display performance in a required performance device. The variable display command C has a longer variable time than the variable display commands A and B, so it can perform more diverse performances than the variable display commands A and B, but it also has a slower time to derive the result than the variable display commands A and B.

The performance control device 300 executes the first half variation and the second half variation in the variation time T2. The variation display command C assigns the time T21 (=T01, T11) of the variation time T2 to the first half variation, and the time T22 (>T02, T12) to the second half variation.
is shorter than time T22.

The latter half of the fluctuation of the fluctuation display command C may include a preview performance at time T221, a reach performance at time T222, and a long SP reach performance via a short SP reach at time T223 (performance pattern C01), or it may include a preview performance at time T221, a reach performance at time T222, a short SP reach performance at time T224 (= T023), and a confirmed win performance during fluctuation at time T225 (> T125) (performance pattern C02).

The long SP reach via short SP reach performance is a form of developed reach that develops from a normal reach, and produces a highly anticipated reach that goes through a short SP reach and then to a long SP reach.

The performance control device 300 can selectively execute performance pattern C01 and performance pattern C02 when receiving a variable display command C, and when a winning performance is executed in the advance notice performance, the performance pattern C02 is made easier to select than the performance pattern C01.

Since the game machine 10 makes it easier to select a presentation pattern C02 capable of announcing the result before the presentation pattern C01, since arousing expectation in the presentation after the execution of the final notice presentation does little to contribute to increasing interest. In this way, the game machine 10 prevents the game presentation after the notice presentation from becoming redundant and causing a decrease in interest, and enables the game presentation after the result is finalized even during the variable display, thereby increasing interest.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can make the game presentation after the advance notice non-redundant by the amount that the time T224 of the short SP reach presentation is shorter than the time T223 of the long SP reach presentation via the short SP reach.
Only this can be assigned to the performance after a win is confirmed.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 informs the game result by the short SP reach presentation similar to that of the variable display command A in the variable display command C, which has a longer variable time than the variable display command A,
By allocating variable winning effects to the surplus time, non-redundant game progress can be achieved.

In addition, the variable display command C derives a win as a result of a short SP reach presentation or a long SP reach presentation via a short SP reach, and the gaming machine 10 prepares a command that derives a miss as a result in addition to the variable display command C.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 uses the variable display commands A, B, and C to realize a hit as a result of a short SP reach presentation by variable display command A, a hit as a result of a long SP reach presentation by variable display command B, a hit as a result of a long SP reach presentation via a short SP reach by variable display command C, and a hit as a result of a short SP reach presentation accompanied by a winning confirmation presentation during fluctuation by variable display commands B and C.

The fluctuation pattern table described with reference to FIG. 2 includes tables (such as a second half fluctuation group table and a second half fluctuation pattern selection table) for determining the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern after the reach state is reached, and tables (such as a first half fluctuation group table and a first half fluctuation pattern selection table) for determining the first half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern before the reach state is reached. The first half fluctuation in the fluctuation display commands A, B, and C may correspond to the performance content selected in the first half fluctuation group table or the first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc. Also, the second half fluctuation in the fluctuation display commands A, B, and C may correspond to the performance content selected in the second half fluctuation group table or the second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.

In addition, in the variable display commands A, B, and C, the first half variation is a presentation mode common to multiple variable display commands, and for example, it is described as being responsible for the display of the stopped displayed pattern varying at a predetermined speed, but it may also be responsible for other predetermined presentation boundaries, such as until a reach is reached.

Next, the display screen during a game corresponding to the variable display commands A, B, and C will be described with reference to Figs. 54 to 58. Fig. 54 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during a game in the fourth embodiment (
FIG. 55 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during a game in the fourth embodiment (part 2).
) FIG. 56 is a diagram (part 3) showing an example of a display screen during a game of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 57 is a diagram (part 4) showing an example of a display screen during a game of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 58 is a diagram (part 5) showing an example of a display screen during a game of the fourth embodiment.

The display screen 600 shown in Fig. 54 (1) is a display screen during the stop of the pattern, and displays the pattern which is the result of the variable display game for a predetermined period after the variable display in the variable display game ends (before the next variable display game starts). The display screen 600 displays a large pattern group 501, a small pattern group 502, a special pattern 1 reserved number display 503, a special pattern 2 reserved number display 504, a reserved display (reserved waiting display) 505, and a reserved consumption display 506.

In the display screen 600, the left symbol indicates that the symbol is stopped at "3", and the center symbol indicates that the symbol is stopped at "3".
The left pattern indicates that the symbol is stopped at "5", and the right pattern indicates that the symbol is stopped at "7". That is, in the display screen 600, the large pattern group 501 indicates that the special symbol variation display game is in a stopped state (symbols are stopped). In the display screen 600, the left pattern, the middle pattern, and the right pattern that constitute the small pattern group 502 all indicate that the corresponding special symbol variation display game is in a stopped state.

The special number display 503 displays the number of reserved memories for the special game 1. In the display screen 600, the special number display 503 indicates that the number of reserved memories for the special game 1 is "3".
The special number of reserved games 2 display 504 displays the number of reserved games for the special number 2 game. In the display screen 600, the special number of reserved games 2 display 504 indicates that the number of reserved games for the special number 2 game is "0". The reserved display 505 displays the reserved number of games for the special number 1 game or the reserved number of games for the special number 2 game depending on the game status. In the display screen 600, the reserved display 505 displays the number of reserved games for the special number 1 game or the reserved number of games for the special number 2 game.
Three reservation icons 507 are displayed corresponding to the number of reservation memories for the game.

The reserved consumption display 506 can indicate whether the special chart variable display game is in a variable display state and can notify the expectation for the game result depending on its display mode. On the display screen 600, the reserved consumption display 506 shows that the special chart variable display game is in a stopped state by leaving the frame blank. After this, the gaming machine 10 starts a variable display corresponding to, for example, a variable display command A, a variable display command B, or a variable display command C.

The display screen 602 shown in FIG. 54(2) is a display screen after the start of the change display, and corresponds to the first half change common to the change display commands A, B, and C. The display screen 602 is,
This is a screen after the display screen 600, and shows a screen during the variable display (three symbols variable). In the display screen 602, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol of the large symbol group 501 are variable, and it shows that the special symbol variable display game is variable. In the display screen 602, the small symbol group 502
The left, middle and right patterns are changing, indicating that the special pattern change display game is currently displaying a change.

On the display screen 602, the special chart 1 reserved number display 503 indicates that the reserved memory number of the special chart 1 game is "2".
The special number of reserved games 504 indicates that the reserved number of the special number 2 game is "0", and the reserved number of the special number 1 game is "2". Also, on the display screen 602, the reserved consumption display 506 displays the reserved consumption icon 508 (reserved memory display in consumption), indicating that the special number of games is being changed.

The display screen 604 shown in Figure 54 (3) is a display screen corresponding to the latter half of the fluctuation, and is a display screen (type 1) corresponding to the preview performance of the latter half of the fluctuation common to the fluctuation display commands A, B, and C.

The display screen 604 includes the pre-suggested performance display 520 in its display contents. The display screen 604 is a display screen in a state where a pre-suggested performance is being performed when the left pattern of the large pattern group 501 is temporarily stopped. The pre-suggested performance display 520 displays an image imitating a push button (performance button 25) and the word "Ready?", thereby suggesting (premonitory) in advance that the push button operation performance will start (the push button will become operable).

55(1) is a display screen (part 2) corresponding to the preview performance following the display screen 604. The display screen 606 includes a suggestion performance reception display 523 in its display contents.
The suggestion effect reception display 523 notifies the player that it is time to accept a push button operation by displaying an image of a push button and the text "Push!". The suggestion effect reception display 523 also displays a gauge showing the time when the push button operation can be accepted.

A display screen 608 shown in FIG. 55(2), a display screen 610 shown in FIG. 55(3), and FIG.
The display screen 612 shown in FIG. 6(1) is displayed when a push button operation is accepted.
This is a display screen for predicting the result of the variable display game. The gaming machine 10 may not predict the result of the variable display game when the push button operation is not accepted within the acceptable time for the push button operation, or may predict the result of the variable display game after waiting for the acceptable time for the push button operation to expire. When predicting the result of the variable display game after waiting for the acceptable time for the push button operation to expire, the gaming machine 10 may reduce the appearance rate of predictions with high expectations compared to when predicting the result of the variable display game by accepting the push button operation.

The display screen 608 is a display screen (part 3) corresponding to the preview performance following the display screen 606. The display screen 608 includes a preview notification display 609 in its display contents. The preview notification display 609 is,
The cut-in display overlapping the large symbol group 501 includes a tiger-like character and the words "Chance!". The advance notice display 609 is an advance notice performance display that suggests that there is a possibility of a win, although the expectation is low, as a result of the variable display game, and is a form of a non-confirmed advance notice performance that does not notify the confirmation of a win, and among them, is a form of a low-reliability advance notice performance.

The display screen 610 is a display screen (number 4) corresponding to the preview performance following the display screen 606. The display screen 610 includes a preview notification display 611 in the display contents. The preview notification display 611 is,
The cut-in display overlapping the large symbol group 501 includes a tiger-like character wearing sunglasses and the line "It's hot!". The advance notice display 611 is an advance notice performance display that suggests that there is a high expectation of a win as a result of the variable display game, and is a form of non-confirmed advance notice performance that does not notify of a confirmed win, and is a form of high reliability advance notice performance among them. The cut-in display of the advance notice display 611 is displayed larger than the cut-in display of the advance notice display 609, suggesting high reliability.

The display screen 612 is a display screen (number 5) corresponding to the preview performance following the display screen 606. The display screen 612 includes a preview notification display 613 in the display contents. The preview notification display 613 is,
The cut-in display overlapping the large symbol group 501 includes a pig-like character and a message tape "Congratulations!". The advance notice display 613 is an advance notice effect display that suggests that a win has been confirmed as a result of the variable display game, and is one form of a confirmed advance notice effect that notifies the confirmation of a win. The cut-in display of the advance notice display 613 is the advance notice display 60
The fact that it is displayed larger than the cut-in display of 9,611 suggests a higher level of reliability.

The display screen 614 shown in Fig. 56 (2) is a display screen after the advance notice performance, and corresponds to the reach performance common to the variable display commands A, B, and C. The display screen 614 shows a screen during the variable display (three symbols are changing). The display screen 614 shows that the left and right symbols of the large symbol group 501 are temporarily stopped while displaying the symbol "3", and the middle symbol is changing, indicating a reach state.
The display screen 614 produces a so-called normal reach. A normal reach rarely produces a win as a result of the variable display game, but in most cases produces a miss, and when no result is produced, it becomes a linking production of an advanced reach. A reach corresponding to variable display command A, variable display command B, or variable display command C is a linking production of an advanced reach.

The display screen 616 shown in FIG. 56 (3) is the display screen after the reach performance, and is the display screen of the short SP reach performance which has developed from the reach performance. The short SP reach performance is positioned as a so-called low reliability development reach, and produces a low reliability development reach in a relatively short performance time. For example, the short SP reach performance varies the middle symbol in a manner different from that of the normal reach, producing a higher sense of expectation than the normal reach. Note that in the reach performance (normal reach, short SP reach, long SP reach, etc.) or other performances, the gaming machine 10 varies the symbols being displayed in the varying manner in the first embodiment, the second embodiment,
It is also possible to implement an effect in which the thickness of the outline is changed as described in the third embodiment, or an effect in which part of the pattern is missing.

The display screen 618 shown in FIG. 57(1) is a display screen after the reach effect, and is a display screen of the long SP reach effect developed from the reach effect. The long SP reach effect is positioned as a so-called highly reliable developed reach, and produces a highly reliable developed reach with a relatively long performance time. For example, the long SP reach effect suggests the success or failure of the game result depending on the success or failure of the battle effect performed without displaying the large symbol group 501, and is similar to the normal reach and short SP.
It creates a greater sense of anticipation than a reach.

In addition, although the gaming machine 10 is described as producing a short SP reach or a long SP reach via a normal reach, it can also produce a two-stage development reach that develops into a long SP reach via a short SP reach that develops via a normal reach and a short SP reach.

The display screen 620 shown in FIG. 57(2) shows a short S corresponding to the variable display commands B and C.
The display screen 620 shows the winning combination during the change after the P reach effect.
The symbol "3" that is a winning combination is temporarily displayed.
is an example of a winning mode. Moreover, the display screen 620 includes a winning performance display 621 in the display contents. The winning performance display 621 displays a performance image including the letters "Congratulations!" in fireworks indicating a winning status, and the message "Big Win!!" approximately in the center of the display screen 620. The display screen 620 moves and displays the large symbol group 501 to a corner to ensure a display area for the winning performance display 621. The display screen 620 also reduces and displays the large symbol group 501 to ensure a display area for the winning performance display 621. The display screen 620 hides the large symbol group 501 and displays the winning performance display 621.
A display area of 21 may be secured.

The display screen 624 shown in Fig. 58 (1) is a display screen that displays a symbol combination as a change result corresponding to any of the change display commands A, B, and C. In the case of a change display performance corresponding to the change display command A, the display screen 624 is a display screen after a short SP reach performance, in the case of a change display performance corresponding to the change display command B, it is a display screen after a long SP reach performance or a winning confirmation performance during change, and in the case of a change display performance corresponding to the change display command C, it is a display screen after a long SP reach performance via a short SP reach or a winning confirmation performance during change.

The display screen 624 displays three symbols "3" that are winning patterns in the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502. In the display screen 624, the reserved consumption display 506 has a blank frame to indicate that the special symbol variation display game is in a stopped state.

The display screen 626 shown in FIG. 58(2) is a fanfare display screen.
The gaming machine 10 includes in its display contents a fanfare display 627 similar to the winning confirmation display 621 of the winning confirmation display during variation. The fanfare display 627 displays a production image including the letters "Congratulations!" in fireworks to inform of a win, and a message "Big Win!!" in the approximate center of the display screen 626. The display screen 626 does not display the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502. The display screen 626 also does not display the reserved display 505 and the reserved consumption display 506. After displaying the fanfare display screen, the gaming machine 10 displays the round display and interval display during a win.

Next, a preview performance pattern selection table common to the variable display commands A, B, and C will be described with reference to Fig. 59. Fig. 59 is a diagram showing an example of the preview performance pattern selection table and the preview performance pattern reliability of the fourth embodiment.

The preview performance pattern selection table (win) shown in Fig. 59 (1) is referenced when the performance control device 300 selects a preview performance as a display performance corresponding to the variable display commands A, B, and C. Note that the variable display commands A, B, and C are all variable display commands selected when deriving a win.

When the performance control device 300 receives the variable display commands A, B, and C and determines the preview performance, it selects the preview performance pattern YP1 corresponding to the confirmed preview performance with a selection probability YR01, selects the preview performance pattern YP2 corresponding to the high reliability preview performance with a selection probability YR02, and selects the preview performance pattern YP3 corresponding to the low reliability preview performance with a selection probability YR03. For example,
The selection probability YR01 is set to 10% by defining the confirmed preview performance as a performance with a low frequency of occurrence. The selection probability YR02 is set to 70% and the selection probability YR03 is set to 20%. By setting the appearance rate of the preview performance pattern YP2 at the time of winning higher than that of the preview performance pattern YP3, the high reliability of the preview performance pattern YP2 is presented.

The preview performance pattern selection table (miss) shown in FIG. 59 (2) is
This is referenced when selecting a preview effect as a display effect corresponding to a variable display command (for example, variable display commands D, E, F) that derives a "miss" while being assigned the same effects as variable display commands A, B, and C.

When the performance control device 300 receives the variable display commands D, E, and F and determines the preview performance, it selects the preview performance pattern YP1 corresponding to the confirmed preview performance with a selection probability YR11, selects the preview performance pattern YP2 corresponding to the high reliability preview performance with a selection probability YR12, and selects the preview performance pattern YP3 corresponding to the low reliability preview performance with a selection probability YR13. For example,
The selection probability YR11 is a 0% probability for producing a confirmed preview effect.
The probability of selection YR13 is 90%, and the preview performance pattern YP
By setting the appearance rate of the preview performance pattern YP3 at the time of failure higher than that of the preview performance pattern YP2, the low reliability of the preview performance pattern YP3 is expressed.

The reliability of the preview performance pattern shown in Fig. 59 (3) is determined by the preview performance pattern selection table (hit) and the preview performance pattern selection table (miss), as well as the hit probability and the distribution rate of the variable display commands A, B, C, D, E, and F. According to the preview performance pattern selection table (hit), the preview performance pattern selection table (miss), and other conditions, the preview performance pattern reliability is such that the preview performance pattern YP1 corresponding to the confirmed preview performance has reliability YE1, the preview performance pattern YP2 corresponding to the high reliability preview performance has reliability YE2, and the preview performance pattern YP3 corresponding to the low reliability preview performance has reliability YE3. For example, the reliability YE1 is 100% reliability for producing a confirmed preview, the reliability YE2 is 50% reliability for producing a high reliability preview, and the reliability YE3 is 5% reliability for producing a low reliability preview.

In addition, the preview performance pattern selection table (win) and the preview performance pattern selection table (
The preview performance pattern selection table (win) and the preview performance pattern selection table (loss) are common to the variable display commands A, B, and C, but may be provided for each of them. In addition, when the gaming machine 10 has a plurality of game modes and game states, the preview performance pattern selection table (win) and the preview performance pattern selection table (loss) may be common to all game modes and game states, or may be different. In addition, the preview performance pattern reliability is determined by the preview performance pattern selection table (win) and the preview performance pattern selection table (loss), as well as the hit probability and the distribution rate of the variable display commands A, B, C, D, E, and F, but the preview performance pattern reliability may be set in advance in the preview performance pattern, and the preview performance pattern selection table (win) and the preview performance pattern selection table (loss) are set with a selection probability corresponding to the preview performance pattern reliability.

Next, the selection probability of a specific effect pattern executed when receiving the variable display commands A, B, and C will be described with reference to Fig. 60. Fig. 60 is a diagram showing an example of the selection probability of a specific effect pattern in the fourth embodiment.

The specific presentation pattern is a combination pattern of presentations that come after the reach presentation in the latter half of the variation. The specific presentation pattern for the variation display commands A, B, and C is the specific presentation pattern TP1.
, TP2, and TP3. The specific presentation pattern TP1 is a specific presentation pattern in which a short SP reach presentation is executed after a reach presentation to derive a win. The specific presentation pattern TP2 is a specific presentation pattern in which a long SP reach presentation is executed after a reach presentation to derive a win. The specific presentation pattern TP3 is a specific presentation pattern in which a long SP via a short SP reach is executed after a reach presentation.
This is a specific presentation pattern in which a reach presentation is executed to result in a win.

In the variable display commands A, B, and C, the specific effect pattern TP1 is selected with a selection probability TR1, the specific effect pattern TP2 is selected with a selection probability TR2, and the specific effect pattern TP3 is selected with a selection probability TR4.
is selected with a selection probability TR3. For the variable display commands D, E, and F, the specific effect patterns TP1, TP2, and TP3 are also selected with required probabilities, respectively.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 sets the reliability TE1 for the specific effect pattern TP1, sets the reliability TE2 for the specific effect pattern TP2, and sets the reliability TE3 for the specific effect pattern TP3. For example, the reliability TE1 is 5%, the reliability TE2 is 10%, and the reliability TE
E3 is 20%. This allows the gaming machine 10 to perform the short SP reach effect, the long SP reach effect,
The game machine 10 may be set so that the reliability increases in the order of the short SP reach effect, the long SP reach effect via the short SP reach effect, and the long SP reach effect.

In addition, the reliability TE1, TE2, and TE3 are the selection probabilities of the variable display commands A, B, and C, as well as the selection probabilities of the variable display commands D, E, and F, and the selection probabilities of the variable display commands A,
This may vary depending on other parameters, such as the allocation ratio of B, C, D, E, and F.

The selection of such a specific performance pattern is classified in more detail according to the state of the preview performance. For example, the selection probability of the specific performance pattern can be classified according to whether the confirmed preview, the low reliability preview, or the high reliability preview is executed in the preview performance. Note that the selection is not limited to a two-stage selection in which the preview performance pattern is selected in the preview performance and then the specific performance pattern is selected according to the result of the selection of the preview performance pattern, but may be a selection in which a combination of a preview performance pattern and a specific performance pattern that is set in advance is selected at once.

Here, the specific pattern selection ratio for each preview performance in the variable display commands A, B, and C at the time of winning will be described with reference to Fig. 61. Fig. 61 is a diagram showing an example of the specific pattern selection ratio (winning) for each preview performance in the fourth embodiment.

The performance control device 300 executes a short SP reach performance at a rate of 70% when a confirmed notice is executed in a notice performance in a variable display performance based on the variable display commands A, B, and C,
The long SP reach effect is executed at a rate of 10%, and the long SP reach effect via the short SP reach is executed at a rate of 20%.
In the variable display performance based on B and C, when a low reliability prediction is executed in the preview performance, a short SP reach performance is executed at a rate of 20%, a long SP reach performance is executed at a rate of 60%, and a long SP reach performance via a short SP reach is executed at a rate of 20%. Also, in the variable display performance based on the variable display commands A, B, and C, when a high reliability prediction is executed in the preview performance, the performance control device 300 executes a short SP reach performance at a rate of 10%,
The long SP reach performance is executed at a rate of 30% and the long SP reach performance via the short SP reach is executed at a rate of 60%.

In addition, in the variable display performance based on the variable display commands A, B, and C, when the performance control device 300 executes a non-deterministic preview in the preview performance or does not execute a deterministic preview, it executes a short SP reach performance at a rate of (20×a+10×b)%, executes a long SP reach performance at a rate of (60×a+30×b)%, and executes a long SP reach performance via a short SP reach at a rate of (20×a+60×b). In this case, a is the selection probability of a low reliability preview in a non-deterministic preview, and b is the selection probability of a high reliability preview in a non-deterministic preview. However, a, b<1 and a+b=1.

In this way, when the confirmed advance notice performance is executed, the gaming machine 10 is more likely to execute the short SP reach performance than the long SP reach performance or the long SP reach performance via the short SP reach. This makes it possible to prevent the gaming performance after the advance notice from becoming redundant when the confirmed advance notice performance is executed, and to reduce the decrease in interest.
The gaming machine 10 prevents the game presentation after the advance notice from becoming redundant and reduces the decline in interest by performing a winning confirmation presentation during the change in the remaining time in the latter half of the change in the change display presentation based on the change display commands B and C.

Specifically, when a confirmed preview performance is executed, the gaming machine 10 reduces the chances of a long SP reach performance or a long SP reach performance via a short SP reach appearing, thereby preventing the gaming performance after the preview announcement from becoming redundant.

Also, the game machine 10 makes the probability that the short SP reach performance is selected when a low reliability prediction is executed in the prediction performance higher than the probability that the short SP reach performance is selected when a high reliability prediction is executed in the prediction performance.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 is able to prevent players who have lost their sense of expectation due to the low reliability prediction from playing the long S.
The gaming machine 10 suppresses opportunities for players who have lost their sense of expectation due to a low reliability prediction from losing their sense of expectation even further due to a short SP reach performance, and can increase interest by creating a sense of surprise that a win is derived despite the overlap of a low reliability prediction and a short SP reach performance, which have little expectation. On the other hand, the gaming machine 10 can increase opportunities for players who have gained a sense of expectation due to a high reliability prediction to feel interest in the long SP reach performance and the long SP reach performance via a short SP reach.

The specific pattern selection ratio for each preview performance in the variable display commands A, B, and C may be made changeable depending on the game mode or game state. A modified example of changing the specific pattern selection ratio for each preview performance will be described with reference to Figs. 62 and 63. Fig. 62 is a diagram (part 1) showing an example of the specific pattern selection ratio (win) for each preview performance in a modified example of the fourth embodiment.
FIG. 63 is a diagram (part 2) showing an example of a specific pattern selection rate (win) for each preview performance in the modified example of the fourth embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 has a plurality of presentation modes, for example, modes A, B, and C, and transitions between modes are made by a predetermined event trigger (which may be a timer trigger). The gaming machine 10 presents the gameplay of each mode by using different specific pattern selection ratios for each preview presentation for each mode.

FIG. 62(1) shows the specific pattern selection ratio (mode A) for each preview performance. The specific pattern selection ratio (mode A) for each preview performance is the same as the specific pattern selection ratio for each preview performance described with reference to FIG. 61. In mode A, the gaming machine 10 suppresses the opportunity for a player who has lost expectation due to a low-reliability preview to feel redundant due to the long SP reach performance or the long SP reach performance via the short SP reach. In addition, in mode A, the gaming machine 10 suppresses the player who has lost expectation due to a low-reliability preview from losing expectation even more due to the short SP reach performance, and can improve interest by creating a sense of surprise that a win is derived despite the overlap of a low-reliability preview with little expectation and a short SP reach performance. On the other hand, in mode A, the gaming machine 10 can expand the opportunity for a player who has gained expectation due to a high-reliability preview to feel interest due to the long SP reach performance or the long SP reach performance via the short SP reach.

62 (2) shows the specific pattern selection ratio (mode B) for each preview performance. In the variable display performance based on the variable display commands A, B, and C, when the performance control device 300 executes a confirmed preview in the preview performance, it executes a short SP reach performance at a rate of 100%, executes a long SP reach performance at a rate of 0%, and executes a long SP reach performance via a short SP reach at a rate of 0%. Also, in the variable display performance based on the variable display commands A, B, and C, when the performance control device 300 executes a low reliability preview in the preview performance, it executes a short SP reach performance at a rate of 0%, executes a long SP reach performance at a rate of 70%, and executes a long SP reach performance via a short SP reach at a rate of 30%. Furthermore, in the variable display performance based on the variable display commands A, B and C, when a high reliability notice is executed in the notice performance, the performance control device 300 executes a short SP reach performance at a rate of 0%, executes a long SP reach performance at a rate of 30%, and executes a long SP reach performance via a short SP reach at a rate of 70%.

In this way, when the confirmed advance notice performance is executed, the gaming machine 10 executes the short SP reach performance without executing the long SP reach performance or the long SP reach performance via the short SP reach performance. In this way, when the confirmed advance notice performance is executed, the gaming machine 10 prevents the game performance after the advance notice notification from becoming redundant, and makes it possible to reduce the decrease in interest.
In the variable display presentation based on the variable display commands B and C, a variable win confirmation presentation is performed during the excess time in the latter half of the variation, thereby preventing the game presentation after the advance notice from becoming redundant and reducing the decline in interest.

Specifically, when a confirmed preview performance is executed, the gaming machine 10 prevents the game performance after the preview announcement from becoming redundant by eliminating the opportunity for a long SP reach performance or a long SP reach performance via a short SP reach to appear.

In addition, the game machine 10 prevents the short SP reach performance from being selected when a low reliability notice or a high reliability notice is executed in the notice performance, and increases the chances for a player who has a sense of expectation from the notice performance to feel interest in the long SP reach performance or the long SP reach performance via the short SP reach.

Also, the game machine 10 can increase the chances for a player who has higher expectations from the preview performance when a high reliability preview is executed than when a low reliability preview is executed to feel interest in the long SP reach performance via the short SP reach.

62 (3) shows the specific pattern selection ratio (mode C) for each preview performance. In the variable display performance based on the variable display commands A, B, and C, when the preview performance executes a confirmed preview, the performance control device 300 executes a short SP reach performance at a rate of 70%, a long SP reach performance at a rate of 10%, and a long SP reach performance via a short SP reach at a rate of 20%.
In addition, in the variable display performance based on the variable display commands A, B, and C, when the performance control device 300 executes a low reliability notice in the notice performance, it executes a short SP reach performance at a rate of 10% and executes a long SP reach performance at a rate of 30%.
The long SP reach effect via the P reach is executed at a rate of 60%.
0: In the variable display performance based on the variable display commands A, B, and C, when a high reliability notice is executed in the notice performance, the short SP reach performance is executed at a rate of 20%, the long SP reach performance is executed at a rate of 60%, and the long SP reach performance via the short SP reach is executed at a rate of 20%.
Execute at a rate of .

The game machine 10 makes the probability that the short SP reach performance is selected when a low reliability notice is executed in the notice performance smaller than the probability that the short SP reach performance is selected when a high reliability notice is executed in the notice performance.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 is able to prevent players who have lost their sense of expectation due to the low reliability prediction from playing the long S.
The P reach effect and the long SP reach effect via the short SP reach effect increase the chances of feeling redundant. Also, the gaming machine 10 increases the chances that a player who has lost his sense of expectation due to the low reliability notice loses his sense of expectation even more due to the short SP reach effect.

Such a gaming machine 10 is suitable for a presentation mode that provides interest in casual game presentation. In addition, such a gaming machine 10 has the effect of highlighting the characteristics of each mode in comparison with each other.

The gaming machine 10 has a plurality of gaming states, for example, a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state A.
, B, and transition of the gaming state is made by a predetermined event trigger. The gaming machine 10 provides gameplay for each gaming state by using different specific pattern selection ratios for each preview performance for each gaming state.

In addition, the normal game state and the specific game states A and B may be distinguished as different game states, for example, the normal game state is low probability, mainly special game 1 game progress, no normal power support, the specific game state A is high probability, mainly special game 2 game progress, with normal power support, the specific game state B is low probability, mainly special game 2 game progress, no normal power support, etc. In addition, the specific game state B may have other game characteristics such as high probability, mainly special game 1 game progress, no normal power support, etc.

FIG. 63(1) shows the specific pattern selection ratio (normal game state) by the advance notice performance. The specific pattern selection ratio (normal game state) by the advance notice performance is the same as the specific pattern selection ratio by the advance notice performance described using FIG. 61. The gaming machine 10 suppresses the opportunity for a player who has lost a sense of expectation due to a low reliability advance notice in a normal game state to feel redundant due to the long SP reach performance or the long SP reach performance via the short SP reach. Also, the gaming machine 10 suppresses the player who has lost a sense of expectation due to a low reliability advance notice in a normal game state from losing a sense of expectation further due to the short SP reach performance, and can improve interest by creating a sense of surprise that a hit is derived despite the overlap of a low reliability advance notice with a low sense of expectation and a short SP reach performance. On the other hand, the gaming machine 10 can increase the opportunity for a player who has a sense of expectation due to a high reliability advance notice in a normal game state to feel interest in the long SP reach performance or the long SP reach performance via the short SP reach.

63(2) shows the specific pattern selection ratio (specific game state A) for each preview performance. The specific pattern selection ratio (specific game state A) for each preview performance is the same as the specific pattern selection ratio for each preview performance described using FIG. 62(2).

In this way, when the confirmed advance notice performance is executed, the gaming machine 10 executes the short SP reach performance without executing the long SP reach performance or the long SP reach performance via the short SP reach performance. In this way, when the confirmed advance notice performance is executed, the gaming machine 10 prevents the game performance after the advance notice notification from becoming redundant, and makes it possible to reduce the decrease in interest.
In the variable display presentation based on the variable display commands B and C, a variable win confirmation presentation is performed during the excess time in the latter half of the variation, thereby preventing the game presentation after the advance notice from becoming redundant and reducing the decline in interest.

Specifically, when a confirmed preview performance is executed, the gaming machine 10 prevents the game performance after the preview announcement from becoming redundant by eliminating the opportunity for a long SP reach performance or a long SP reach performance via a short SP reach to appear.

In addition, the game machine 10 prevents the short SP reach performance from being selected when a low reliability notice or a high reliability notice is executed in the notice performance, and increases the chances for a player who has a sense of expectation from the notice performance to feel interest in the long SP reach performance or the long SP reach performance via the short SP reach.

Also, the game machine 10 can increase the chances for a player who has higher expectations from the preview performance when a high reliability preview is executed than when a low reliability preview is executed to feel interest in the long SP reach performance via the short SP reach.

63(3) shows the specific pattern selection ratio for each preview performance (specific game state B). The specific pattern selection ratio for each preview performance (specific game state B) is the same as the specific pattern selection ratio for each preview performance described using FIG. 62(3).

The game machine 10 makes the probability that the short SP reach performance is selected when a low reliability notice is executed in the notice performance smaller than the probability that the short SP reach performance is selected when a high reliability notice is executed in the notice performance.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 is able to prevent players who have lost their sense of expectation due to the low reliability prediction from playing the long S.
The P reach effect and the long SP reach effect via the short SP reach effect increase the chances of feeling redundant. Also, the gaming machine 10 increases the chances that a player who has lost his sense of expectation due to the low reliability notice loses his sense of expectation even more due to the short SP reach effect.

Such a gaming machine 10 is suitable for a gaming state where a player is interested in casual game presentation. In addition, such a gaming machine 10 has the effect of highlighting the characteristics of each gaming state in comparison with each other. In addition, when the gaming state is revealed to the player, such a gaming machine 10 assists the player in estimating the gaming state.

Note that the specific pattern selection ratios for preview performances for each performance mode described using FIG. 62 and the specific pattern selection ratios for preview performances for each game state described using FIG. 63 are merely examples, and other selection ratios may be used. Also, the performance modes described using FIG. 62 are modes A, B, and C, but the classification of the performance modes is not limited to three, and may be two, or may be four or more. Also, the game states described using FIG. 63 are the normal game state and specific game states A and B, but the classification of the game states is not limited to three, and may be two, or may be four or more.
It may be two, or it may be four or more.

In addition, the classification of the game state may be such that a game state that is normally treated as one may be classified into two or more according to a predetermined condition. For example, even in the normal game state, the period from the end of the normal power support to the variable display count of 20 times may be classified as normal game state A, and the other normal game states may be classified as normal game state B. Also, even in the normal power support game state, the first half of the normal power support variable display count of 100 times up to 50 times may be classified as normal power support game state A.
, 51 times onwards may be classified as a normal power support game state B. Also, even in a probability variable (high probability) game state, the probability variable game state A may be classified until a predetermined trigger is detected after the probability variable, and the probability variable game state B may be classified after the predetermined trigger.

In addition, the transition between the divided game states may be unidirectional, such as from a specific game state A to a specific game state B, or it may be bidirectional, such as from a specific game state A to a specific game state B, or from a specific game state B to a specific game state A.

Next, a modified example of the variable display mode corresponding to the variable display command B will be described with reference to Fig. 64. Fig. 64 is a diagram showing an example of the variable display mode corresponding to the variable display command B1 of the modified example of the fourth embodiment.

The variable display command B1 is one of the variable display commands that the game control device 100 transmits to the presentation control device 300. The variable display command B1 is a command corresponding to the variable display presentation of the variable time T1 (>T0).

The performance control device 300 receives the variable display command B1, generates a variable display performance for a variable time T1, and executes the variable display performance in a required performance device.
Since the variable display command has a longer variable time than the variable display command A, it has the advantage that it can produce a wider variety of effects than the variable display command A, but it also has the advantage that it takes longer to derive results than the variable display command A.

The performance control device 300 executes the first half variation and the second half variation in the variation time T1. The variation display command B1 assigns the time T11 (=T01) of the variation time T1 to the first half variation and the time T12 (>T02) to the second half variation. Note that the time T11 is the time T12.
is shorter than.

The latter half of the fluctuation of the fluctuation display command B1 may include a preview performance at time T121, a reach performance at time T122, and a long SP reach performance at time T123 (performance pattern B01), or it may include a preview performance at time T121, a reach performance at time T122, a winning confirmation performance during the fluctuation at time T125, and a short SP reach performance at time T124 (= T023) (performance pattern B03).

In this way, the gaming machine 10 may perform a confirmed win during fluctuation performance prior to a short SP reach performance. Also, the gaming machine 10 may divide the confirmed win during fluctuation performance in half and sandwich the short SP reach performance between the two divided confirmed win during fluctuation performances. Also, the gaming machine 10 may perform a confirmed win during fluctuation performance prior to a reach performance. Also, the gaming machine 10 may perform a confirmed win during fluctuation performance prior to a notice performance. However,
When performing a winning confirmation effect during a change prior to the advance notice effect, the gaming machine 10 may replace the winning confirmation effect during a change with a freeze effect that does not notify the winning confirmation. In addition, the gaming machine 10 may insert a subdivided winning confirmation effect during a change at any point during the latter half of the change, for example, before or after a reach effect.

The performance control device 300 can selectively execute performance pattern B01 and performance pattern B03 when receiving a variable display command B1, and when a winning performance is executed in the advance notice performance, the performance pattern B03 is made easier to select than the performance pattern B01.

Since the game machine 10 makes it easier to select the presentation pattern B03 capable of announcing the result before the presentation pattern B01, since arousing expectation in the presentation after the execution of the final notice presentation does little to contribute to increasing interest. In this way, the game machine 10 prevents the game presentation after the notice presentation from becoming redundant and causing a decrease in interest, and enables the game presentation after the result is finalized even during the variable display, thereby increasing interest.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can make the game presentation after the advance notice non-redundant by the amount that the time T124 of the short SP reach presentation is shorter than the time T123 of the long SP reach presentation. Also, the gaming machine 10 can allocate only the time T125 of the variable winning confirmation presentation to the presentation after the winning confirmation.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 has a variable display command B1 whose variable display time is longer than that of the variable display command A.
In this case, the game result is announced by a short SP reach presentation similar to the variable display command A, and a variable win confirmation presentation is assigned to the remaining time, thereby realizing a non-redundant game progress.

In addition, the variable display command B1 derives a win as a result of the short SP reach presentation or the long SP reach presentation, and the gaming machine 10 prepares a command that derives a miss as a result separately from the variable display command B1.

Next, another example of a modified variable display mode corresponding to the variable display command B is shown in FIG.
65 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display mode corresponding to the variable display command B2 in the modified example of the fourth embodiment.

The variable display command B2 is one of the variable display commands that the game control device 100 transmits to the presentation control device 300. The variable display command B2 is a command corresponding to the variable display presentation of the variable time T1 (>T0).

The performance control device 300 receives the variable display command B2, generates a variable display performance for the variable time T1, and executes the variable display performance in a required performance device.
Since the variable display command has a longer variable time than the variable display command A, it has the advantage that it can produce a wider variety of effects than the variable display command A, but it also has the advantage that it takes longer to derive results than the variable display command A.

The performance control device 300 executes the first half variation and the second half variation in the variation time T1. The variation display command B2 assigns the time T11 (=T01) of the variation time T1 to the first half variation and the time T12 (>T02) to the second half variation. Note that the time T11 is the time T12.
is shorter than.

The latter half of the change display command B2 may include a preview performance at time T121, a reach performance at time T122, and a long SP reach performance at time T123 (performance pattern B01), a preview performance at time T121, a reach performance at time T122, and a winning performance during the change at time T123 (performance pattern B04), or a preview performance at time T121 and a winning performance at time T126.
There is also a case where this includes a winning confirmation effect during the fluctuation of (=T122+T123) (effect pattern B05).

In this way, the gaming machine 10 may perform the winning confirmation effect during the change without performing the short SP reach effect. Also, the gaming machine 10 may perform the winning confirmation effect during the change without performing not only the short SP reach effect but also the reach effect.

The performance control device 300 can selectively execute performance pattern B01, performance pattern B04, and performance pattern B05 when receiving a variable display command B2, and when a winning performance is executed in the advance notice performance, the performance patterns B04 and B05 are made easier to select than the performance pattern B01.

Since the game machine 10 makes it easier to select the performance patterns B04 and B05 that can notify the result before the performance pattern B01, since arousing expectation in the performance after the execution of the final notice performance does little to contribute to increasing interest. In this way, the game machine 10 prevents the game performance after the notice notification from becoming redundant and causing a decrease in interest, and enables the game performance after the result is determined even during the variable display, thereby increasing interest.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can make the game presentation after the advance notice or the time T123 of the long SP reach presentation non-redundant. Also, the gaming machine 10 can allocate the time T123 of the long SP reach presentation plus the time T122 of the reach presentation to the presentation after the winning is confirmed.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 has a variable display command B2, which has a longer variable time than the variable display command A.
In this case, non-redundant game progress can be realized by informing the game result by the final preview performance. Note that the variable display command B2 is for deriving a win as a result, and the gaming machine 10 prepares a command for deriving a loss as a result separately from the variable display command B2.

Next, a modified example of the timing of the appearance of the final preview effect will be described with reference to FIG.
6 is a diagram showing an example of the appearance timing of a confirmed preview effect in a modified example of the fourth embodiment.
When a fixed character that predicts a win is displayed as a fixed notice performance, the gaming machine 10:
Confirmed character appearance patterns 1 to 5 can be used. The confirmed character may inform the player of the confirmed win by its display mode, such as by informing the player of the confirmed win as a message, or may inform the player of the confirmed win by a display mode such as a rainbow display that allows a normal player to naturally sense the confirmed win, or may inform the player of the confirmed win by a display mode that is not shared with other effects and allows a player with gaming experience to sense the confirmed win. Also, the confirmed character does not necessarily have to be a character, and may be a cut-in or a message itself, etc.

The confirmed character appearance pattern 1 is a presentation mode in which a confirmed character appears only once during the presentation period of the confirmed preview presentation. In this case, the appearance period of the confirmed character can be set arbitrarily within the range of the confirmed preview presentation period.

The confirmed character appearance patterns 2 and 3 are performance modes in which the confirmed character continues to appear beyond the performance period of the confirmed preview performance. The appearance period of the confirmed character in the confirmed character appearance pattern 2 can be set arbitrarily within the range of the reach performance period and the short SP reach performance period. The appearance period of the confirmed character in the confirmed character appearance pattern 3 can be set arbitrarily within the range of the variable display period including the variable winning performance period beyond the short SP reach performance period. The confirmed character may change its display mode during its appearance, and may be changed from a caterpillar to a butterfly to inform the player of the expected value to be obtained (for example, the presence or absence of a probability change or normal power support, the amount of game value that can be obtained, etc.).

The confirmed character appearance pattern 4 is a presentation mode in which the confirmed character appears two or more times during the presentation period of the confirmed preview presentation. In this case, the appearance period of the confirmed character can be set arbitrarily within the range of the variable display period starting from the confirmed preview presentation period. In addition to the number of times and timing of appearance, the confirmed character may change its display mode, and the amount of expected value that the player can obtain may be notified from the number of times and timing of appearance, and the display mode.

The fixed character appearance pattern 5 is a performance mode in which two or more fixed characters appear during the performance period of the fixed notice performance. For example, the fixed character appearance pattern 5 makes the fixed character A appear from the fixed notice performance period to the reach performance period, and makes the fixed character B appear from the reach performance period overlapping with the appearance of the fixed character A to beyond the reach performance period.

In addition, the confirmed character A may appear beyond the reach performance period, like the confirmed character B, and may have the same appearance end timing. In addition, when the confirmed character A is a character in a confirmed preview performance, when the character is made to appear in a reach performance, a short SP reach performance, or a long SP reach performance, the character may be changed to a confirmed win mode. In addition, although the confirmed character A and the confirmed character B are made to appear by setting an overlapping timing, three or more confirmed characters may be made to appear by setting an overlapping timing.

In addition, the combination or overlapping state of two or more confirmed characters may be changed, and the amount of expected value that the player can obtain from the combination or overlapping state of the confirmed characters may be indicated.

Next, modified examples of the display screen during a game corresponding to the variable display commands A, B, and C are shown in FIG.
67 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during a game in the modified example of the fourth embodiment.

The display screen 628 shown in FIG. 67(1) is a display screen during the freeze effect, and corresponds to the latter half of the fluctuation common to the fluctuation display commands A, B, and C. The freeze effect can be executed as a confirmation notice effect, and can also be executed as a winning effect during the fluctuation. The display screen 628 includes a large symbol group 501, a small symbol group 502, a special symbol 1 reserved number display 503, a special symbol 2 reserved number display 504, and a large symbol group 505.
, pending display 505, pending completion display 506, pending icon 507, pending completion icon 508
is included in the display content.

The display screen 628 displays a freeze display 629 superimposed on the large symbol group 501. The freeze display 629 displays the message "FREEZE WARNING" and the message "WARNING" in an area partitioned off by yellow and black striped warning tape. The display screen 628 also displays the small symbol group 502 superimposed on the freeze display 629 to clearly indicate that a changing display is being performed in place of the large symbol group 501.

67(2) is a display screen following the display screen 628. In the display screen 630, a character 631 appears from the left end of the display area and pushes the freeze display 629 to the right end, thereby releasing the freeze effect. The character 631 includes, for example, a pig-like character and a message tape saying "Congratulations!"

67(3) is a display screen subsequent to the display screen 630. The display screen 632 shows an effect in which the character 631, who has pushed the freeze display 629 to the right end, exits to the right end while informing the user of the confirmed win with a message tape saying "Congratulations!"
The display screen 632 shows the large symbol group 501 in a display area where the freeze display 629 is pushed to the right end.
The large symbol group 501 is displayed with good visibility. The large symbol group 501 can change the symbol display mode before and after overlapping with the freeze display 629. The display screen 632 displays the large symbol group 501 in a symbol combination that is a winning mode.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can perform a freeze effect. The gaming machine 10 can execute the freeze effect as a winning effect during fluctuation. In this freeze effect, when a winning effect during fluctuation is executed after a short SP reach effect, the large symbol group 501 is displayed in a symbol combination that results in a winning state as shown in the display screen 632. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 64, when a winning effect during fluctuation is executed before a short SP reach effect, the large symbol group 501 may be displayed in a symbol combination that results in a reach state.

Such a game machine 10 prevents the game presentation after the advance notice from becoming redundant and causing a decrease in interest, and improves interest by enabling the game presentation after the result is determined even during a variable display.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 is capable of performing a notice that the game result is a win.
The notification may be made to indicate that the game result is a special result, not limited to a win.
The special result includes, for example, a win, the stopping of a specific pattern, the stopping of a special pattern (a pattern for entering a zone, etc.), etc. The stopping of a specific pattern is the stopping of a pattern that is not limited to a win, and includes, for example, the stopping of a predetermined chance pattern, etc. The chance pattern is a predetermined pattern combination, for example, a permutation combination such as a left pattern "1", a middle pattern "2", and a right pattern "3". The stopping of a special pattern includes the stopping of a pattern with a special meaning. Note that the special pattern may not be displayed during normal times. For example, the special pattern may be a pattern that guides a mode change, a pattern that guides entry into a predetermined zone (a game state, a performance state, etc.), a pattern that guides the occurrence or development of a reach, or a notice or occurrence of a win.

The gaming machine 10 of the above-described fourth embodiment (including the modified examples) has the following feature in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a notice performance means (e.g., the game control device 100, the performance control device 300, the display device 400, etc.) capable of executing a notice performance (e.g., a confirmed notice performance, a low reliability notice performance, a high reliability notice performance) that predicts the result of a game (e.g., a special chart 1 game, a special chart 2 game).
1), and a specific performance means (for example, a short SP reach performance, a long SP reach performance) capable of performing a specific performance that performs a process of deriving a game result after the execution of a preview performance.
The game control device 100, the presentation control device 300, and the display device 41. The advance notice presentation means is capable of selectively executing a definite advance notice presentation (for example, a definite advance notice presentation, FIG. 56 (1)) which definitely announces that the game result is a win, and a non-definite advance notice presentation (for example, a low-reliability advance notice presentation, a high-reliability advance notice presentation, FIG. 55 (2) and (3)) which announces with a predetermined degree of reliability that the game result is a win. The specific presentation means performs the derivation process for a first time (for example, a time T1
A first specific effect (for example, a short SP reach effect) in which the derivation process is performed in a time period (for example, time T123) longer than the first time period can be selectively executed, and when the advance notice performance means executes the final advance notice performance, the proportion at which the second specific effect is selected (for example, 10%,
1) The percentage at which the first specific effect is selected is increased (for example, 70%, FIG. 61).

(2) When the preview performance means of (1) executes a non-deterministic preview performance (e.g., a low-reliability preview performance, a high-reliability preview performance), it can selectively execute a first non-deterministic preview performance (e.g., a low-reliability preview performance) that predicts that the game result will be a win with a first reliability (e.g., 5%, FIG. 59(3)) and a second non-deterministic preview performance (e.g., a high-reliability preview performance) that predicts that the game result will be a win with a second reliability (e.g., 50%, FIG. 59(3)) higher than the first reliability, and the specific performance means, when deriving a win as the game result, makes the rate at which the preview performance means selects the first specific performance (e.g., 20%, FIG. 61) when it executes the first non-deterministic preview performance larger than the rate at which the preview performance means selects the first specific performance (e.g., 10%, FIG. 61) when it executes the second non-deterministic preview performance.

(3) The gaming machine 10 includes a notice performance means (e.g., the game control device 100, the performance control device 300, the display device 400, etc.) capable of executing a notice performance (e.g., a confirmed notice performance, a low reliability notice performance, a high reliability notice performance) that predicts the result of a game (e.g., a special chart 1 game, a special chart 2 game).
1), and a specific performance means (for example, a short SP reach performance, a long SP reach performance) capable of performing a specific performance that performs a process of deriving a game result after the execution of a preview performance.
The game control device 100, the performance control device 300, and the display device 41. The advance notice performance means includes a final advance notice performance (for example,
56(1)) and non-definite prediction effects that predict with a certain degree of reliability that the game result will be a special result (for example, low reliability prediction effects, high reliability prediction effects, FIG. 55(2)).
The specific performance means is capable of selectively executing a first specific performance (e.g., short SP reach performance) in which the derivation process is performed in a first period (e.g., time T124) and a second specific performance (e.g., long SP reach performance) in which the derivation process is performed in a second period (e.g., time T123) different from the first period, and when the advance notice performance means executes the confirmed advance notice performance, the rate at which the first specific performance is selected (e.g., 70%, FIG. 61) is higher than the rate at which the second specific performance is selected (e.g., 10%, FIG. 61).
) to make it larger.

(4) When the pre-notification performance means of (3) executes a non-deterministic pre-notification performance (for example, a low-reliability pre-notification performance or a high-reliability pre-notification performance), the pre-notification performance means determines that the result of the game is a special result with a first reliability (
For example, the device is capable of selectively executing a first non-deterministic preview performance (for example, a low-reliability preview performance) that predicts that the game result will be a special result with a second reliability (for example, 50%, Figure 59 (3)) different from the first reliability, and the specific performance means, when deriving a special result as the game result, makes the rate at which the preview performance means selects the first specific performance when it executes the first non-deterministic preview performance (for example, 20%, Figure 61) greater than the rate at which the preview performance means selects the first specific performance when it executes the second non-deterministic preview performance (for example, 10%, Figure 61).

[Fifth embodiment]
In the description of the gaming machines of the first to fourth embodiments, a gaming board 30 (see FIG. 2)
28 or a game board 800 (see FIG. 28), the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment can be applied to either of them. Note that the same reference numerals may be used to designate the same components as those of the first to fourth embodiments, and the description thereof may be omitted.

The gaming machine 10 of the fifth embodiment creates a sense of expectation for further changes and maintains a greater sense of expectation for the outcome of the game even if a pre-announcement effect is produced by a display mode of the start memory that has little expectation. First, the display screen during play of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 68 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during a game in the fifth embodiment.

The display screen 650 is the display screen after the start of the variable display.
The display contents include 01, a group of small patterns 502, special pattern 1 reserved number display 503, special pattern 2 reserved number display 504, reserved display (reserved waiting display) 505, and reserved consumption display 506.

The hold display (hold waiting display) 505 displays a number of hold icons (hold waiting icons) 660 corresponding to the special chart 1 hold number display 503. The hold icon 660 is a double-structure display form having a colored sphere inside a transparent sphere. The hold digestion display 506 displays a hold digestion icon 655. The hold digestion icon 655, like the hold icon 660,
It is a double-structure display mode with a colored sphere inside a transparent sphere, but it is a display mode that can be distinguished from the hold icon 660 because it is larger than the hold icon 660.

Here, the dual-structure display mode of the hold icon 660 will be explained with reference to FIG.
FIG. 69 is a diagram showing an example of a dual-structure display mode of a hold icon in the fifth embodiment.
The reserved icon 660 includes an outer shell icon 661 and an inner core icon 662 as display elements. The reserved icon 660 has a double-structure display mode in which the transparent and spherical outer shell icon 661 contains the colored and spherical inner core icon 662. The inner core icon 662 has a function of notifying the expectation level for the result of the variable display game (expectation level notifying function) based on its display mode. The outer shell icon 661 has a function of suggesting the possibility that the expectation level indicated by the inner core icon 662 may change (expectation level change suggesting function). Note that the reserved consumption icon 65
5 has a similar configuration to the hold icon 660.

Next, a display mode for clearly indicating the expectation level of the core icon 662 will be described with reference to Fig. 70. Fig. 70 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between the display mode of the core icon and the expectation level in the fifth embodiment. The core icon 662 has the core icon display modes pt01, pt02, pt03, pt04, pt05, and pt06 as display modes for clearly indicating the expectation level.

The core icon display mode pt01 is a standard (default) display mode that does not provide any guidance on the degree of expectation. The core icon display mode pt01 is, for example, a white spherical shape. The core icon display mode pt02 is a display mode that provides guidance on a low expectation degree (for example, a low expectation degree of about 5%). The core icon display mode pt02 is, for example, a green spherical shape. The core icon display mode pt03 is a display mode that provides guidance on a medium expectation degree (for example, a medium expectation degree of about 20%). The core icon display mode pt03 is, for example, a blue spherical shape. The core icon display mode pt04 is a display mode that provides guidance on a high expectation degree (for example, a high expectation degree of about 30%). The core icon display mode pt04 is, for example, a yellow spherical shape. The core icon display mode pt05 is a display mode that provides guidance on an extremely high expectation degree (for example, an extremely high expectation degree of about 80%). The core icon display mode pt05 is
For example, the icon is a red sphere. The icon display mode pt06 is a display mode that notifies the player of a hit (for example, a hit is confirmed). The icon display mode pt06 is, for example,
It is spherical in shape with a rainbow colored pattern and the character "to" (appearance).

Next, a display mode for indefinitely informing the expectation level of the inner core icon 662 will be described with reference to FIG. 71. FIG. 71 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode for indefinitely informing the expectation level of the inner core icon in the fifth embodiment. The inner core icon 662 has inner core icon display modes pt01, pt02, pt03, pt04, pt05, and pt06 as display modes for clearly informing the expectation level.
As described above, the core icon 662 has the core icon display mode pt01
, pt02, pt03, pt04, pt05, and pt06 may be displayed simultaneously to indicate one of the expectations indicated by the two color elements.

The core icon 662 shown in FIG. 71(1) is the core icon display mode pt02, and is a green sphere that clearly indicates a low expectancy.
2a is 75% for the core icon display mode pt02 and 25% for the core icon display mode pt03.
The core icon 662a is a spherical shape with a gradation of 75% green and 25% blue, and indicates whether the expectation is low or medium, with the low expectation being the more unclear. The core icon 662b shown in FIG. 71(3) is a display mode including the core icon display mode pt
The display mode includes 50% of the inner core icon display mode pt02 and 50% of the inner core icon display mode pt03. The inner core icon 662b is a spherical shape with a gradation of 50% green and 50% blue, which indicates whether the expectation is low or medium to the same degree. The inner core icon 662c shown in FIG. 71(4) is a display mode including 25% of the inner core icon display mode pt02 and 50% of the inner core icon display mode pt03.
The display mode includes 75% of 03. The inner core icon 662c is a spherical shape with a gradation of 25% green and 75% blue, and provides unclear guidance as to whether the expectation is low or medium, leaning more toward the medium expectation.

In this way, the core icon 662 is the core icon display mode pt01, pt02, pt
Not only can pt03, pt04, pt05, and pt06 clearly indicate the degree of expectation, but they can also provide unclear guidance on which degree of expectation it is while indicating the possibility.

Although the inner core icons 662a, 662b, and 662c show a mixture of two colors by gradation, they may show a mixture of two colors in a mosaic or stripe style, may show the original color by mixing colors in an unclear manner, or may show a color that may be changed to by animation without showing a unique color. Also, although the inner core icons 662a, 662b, and 662c show a mixture of two colors, they may show a mixture of three or more colors.

By using such an inner core icon 662 to give a pending notice, the gaming machine 10 can give an unclear notification of the degree of expectation in addition to a clear notification of the degree of expectation.
Furthermore, even when an unclear expectation degree is notified, the gaming machine 10 can guide candidates for the display mode to be changed to. Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 can suggest the possibility when guiding candidates for the display mode to be changed to.

Next, the display mode of the outer shell icon 661 will be described with reference to Fig. 72. Fig. 72 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between the display mode of the outer shell icon and the possibility of change in the fifth embodiment. The outer shell icon 661 does not have a display mode that directly indicates the expectation level, but the inner core icon 66
The outer shell icon 661 has a display mode that guides the change possibility of the inner core icon 66.
2 to produce the appearance of the inner core icon 662, and the disappearance of the outer shell icon 661 triggers a change in the display mode of the inner core icon 662.

The outer shell icon 661 shown in FIG. 72(1) is a standard display mode, which is a display mode that makes it easy to observe the contained inner core icon 662 (not shown) by displaying transparently. The outer shell icon 661a shown in FIG. 72(2) is an outer shell change notice mode a. The outer shell icon 661a is a display mode that shows a slight crack in the outer shell. The outer shell icon 661a indicates the possibility of the outer shell icon 661 disappearing, that is, the possibility of the display mode of the inner core icon 662 changing, based on the appearance of the crack in the outer shell. The outer shell icon 661a also indicates that the possibility of the change in the display mode of the inner core icon 662 is not large because the crack in the outer shell is slight.

The shell icon 661b shown in FIG. 72(3) is a shell change notice mode b. The shell icon 661b is a display mode showing that the shell has many cracks.
1b indicates that the outer shell icon 661 may disappear, i.e., the display state of the inner core icon 662 may change, based on the appearance of many cracks in the outer shell.
b also indicates that there is a high possibility that the display mode of the inner core icon 662 will change due to the large number of cracks in the outer shell.

The shell icon 661c shown in FIG. 72(4) is a shell change notice mode c. The shell icon 661c is a display mode showing the appearance of the shell collapsing and disappearing.
The outer shell icon 661 disappears from the appearance of the outer shell collapsing and disappearing, that is, the inner core icon 6
The display mode of the hold icon 660 is changed when the outer shell icon 661 disappears.

In addition, the outer shell icons 661a, 661b, and 661c are cracked, and the outer shell icon 66
However, the possibility of disappearance of outer shell icon 661 in other ways, that is, the possibility of change in the display mode of inner core icon 662, may be indicated.

The gaming machine 10 uses such an outer shell icon 661 to indicate the possibility of a change in the inner core icon 662, so that even if the display mode of the inner core icon 662 does not change, the gaming machine 10 can indicate the possibility of a change in the inner core icon 662.
The change in the display mode of the outer shell icon 6
The number, size, shape, etc. of the cracks in the outer shell icon 661 may indicate the extent of the change in the display mode of the inner core icon 662. For example, the gaming machine 10 may raise the display mode of the inner core icon 662 by one rank (for example,
When the outer shell icon 661 disappears with only a slight crack, the display mode of the inner shell icon 662 is raised by two ranks (for example, from the inner shell icon display mode pt01 to the inner shell icon display mode pt02).
t03).

Next, the change pattern of the hold icon 660 will be explained using Figures 73 and 74.
73 is a diagram showing an example of a change pattern of the hold icon in the fifth embodiment (part 1); FIG. 74 is a diagram showing an example of a change pattern of the hold icon in the fifth embodiment (part 2);
It is.

The hold icon change pattern shown in FIG. 73(1) shows how the display mode of the hold icon 660 changes as the inner core icon 662 changes its display mode while the outer shell icon 661 does not change its display mode. The inner core icon 662 is in the standard display mode (
For example, the core icon display mode pt01) is changed to a standard display mode (for example, the core icon display mode pt02) which is one step higher than the initial mode through the core change notice modes a, b, and c.
) (successful pending change presentation by the core icon 662). At this time, the core change notice modes a, b, and c are a display mode in which the core icon display mode pt01 and the core icon display mode pt02 are mixed.

By using this type of pending icon change pattern, the gaming machine 10 can present the possibility of a change in the pending display mode and the destination of the change by changing the display mode of the inner core icon 662 even when the display mode of the outer shell icon 661 does not change.

The pending icon change pattern shown in FIG. 73(2) shows how the display mode of the outer shell icon 661 and the inner core icon 662 change, causing the display mode of the pending icon 660 to change. The inner core icon 662 changes from a standard display mode (e.g., inner core icon display mode pt01), which is the initial mode, through inner core change notice modes a, b, and c to a standard display mode (e.g., inner core icon display mode pt02) with one level of expectation higher than the initial mode. At this time, the inner core change notice modes a, b, and c change from the inner core icon display mode pt01 to the inner core icon display mode p
t02 and t03 are mixed. The outer shell icon 661 disappears after passing through the outer shell change notice modes a, b, and c from the standard mode, which is the initial mode.
2 is a standard display mode with a higher expectation level than the initial mode (for example, the core icon display mode p
By causing the outer shell icon 661 to disappear at the timing when the icon changes to the display mode of the inner core icon 662 (t02), it is possible to present the possibility of a change in the reserved display mode and the destination of the change from both the display mode change of the inner core icon 662 and the display mode change of the outer shell icon 661 (presentation of successful reservation change by the outer shell icon 661). Note that, since such a reservation icon change pattern involves the disappearance of the outer shell icon 661, the destination of the inner core icon 662 may be a standard display mode (for example, inner core icon display mode pt04) with a higher expectation level by two or more stages.

The hold icon change pattern shown in FIG. 73(3) shows how the display mode of the hold icon 660 changes as the inner core icon 662 changes its display mode while the outer shell icon 661 does not change its display mode. The inner core icon 662 is in the standard display mode (
For example, the core icon display mode pt01) is changed to a standard display mode (for example, the core icon display mode pt02) which is one step higher than the initial mode through the core change notice modes a, b, and c.
), but does not change to the initial standard display mode (for example, the core icon display mode pt0
1) (failed hold change presentation). The gaming machine 10 performs such a development of expectation (for example,
By using a hold icon change pattern that does not involve promotion from the inner core icon display mode pt01 to the inner core icon display mode pt02, it is possible to ensure opportunities to frequently execute hold performances.

The pending icon change pattern shown in FIG. 73(4) shows how the display mode of the outer shell icon 661 and the inner core icon 662 change, and the display mode of the pending icon 660 changes. The inner core icon 662 does not change from the standard display mode (for example, inner core icon display mode pt01) that is the initial mode through the inner core change notice modes a, b, and c to a standard display mode (for example, inner core icon display mode pt02) with one level higher expectation than the initial mode, but returns to the standard display mode (for example, inner core icon display mode pt01) that is the initial mode, but the outer shell icon 661 disappears from the standard mode that is the initial mode through the outer shell change notice modes a, b, and c, and changes to the display mode (for example, inner core icon display mode pt02) with a delayed timing (pending change rescue performance). The gaming machine 10 reports the failure of the inner core icon 662 to change to the outer shell icon 6
61. Similarly, the gaming machine 10 can remedy a failure to change the outer shell icon 661 by changing the inner core icon 662. Even if the reserved change presentation fails, such a gaming machine 10 can create a high sense of expectation due to the presence of the reserved change presentation.

In the hold icon change pattern shown in FIG. 74(1), the display mode of the outer shell icon 661 is changed while the display mode of the inner core icon 662 is not changed.
6 shows a state in which the display mode of the outer shell icon 660 does not change. The inner shell icon 662 does not change from the standard display mode (for example, the inner shell icon display mode pt01) which is the initial mode.
61 changes from the standard state, which is the initial state, to the shell change notice state a, b, but does not disappear and returns to the standard state. The gaming machine 10 can ensure frequent opportunities to execute reserved effects by the reserved icon change pattern that does not involve such an increase in expectation (for example, promotion from the inner core icon display state pt01 to the inner core icon display state pt02). In addition, the gaming machine 10 can ensure frequent opportunities to execute reserved effects by the reserved icon change pattern that does not involve a change in the display state of the inner core icon 662.

The hold icon change pattern shown in FIG. 74(2) shows a state in which the display mode of the outer shell icon 661 changes while the display mode of the inner core icon 662 does not change, and the display mode of the hold icon 660 changes.
disappears through the outer shell change notice modes a, b, and c from the standard mode which is the initial mode. As a result, the inner core icon display mode pt01 changes to a standard display mode (for example, the inner core icon display mode pt02) with one level of expectation higher than the initial mode without passing through the inner core change notice modes a, b, and c. The gaming machine 10 can perform a surprise hold notice performance by the change in the outer shell icon 661 even if there is no change in the inner core icon 662.

In addition, the intermediate display mode of the inner core icon 662 (for example, the inner core change notice mode a, b, c)
The intermediate display mode of the shell icon 661 (for example, shell change advance notice modes a, b, c) is
They can be initialized at any timing. In addition, the initialization of the intermediate display mode of the inner core icon 662 and the initialization of the intermediate display mode of the outer shell icon 661 may be performed simultaneously or at different timings. For example, the intermediate display mode of the inner core icon 662 and the intermediate display mode of the outer shell icon 661 may be initialized for each variable display, or may be initialized by holding the intermediate display mode for two or more variable displays and being initialized by a predetermined initialization trigger.

Although the hold icon change pattern has been described for the hold icon 660, the same can be done for the hold digestion icon 655. The intermediate display mode of the hold icon 660 may be initialized when transitioning to the hold digestion icon 655, or may be retained.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can create a greater sense of expectation for the outcome of the game even if the display mode of the reserved display lacks expectation. Also, the gaming machine 10 can ensure opportunities to execute the reserved display at various times.

Here, a modified example of the dual-structure display mode of the hold icon 660 will be described with reference to Fig. 75. Fig. 75 is a diagram showing an example of the dual-structure display mode of the hold icon in a modified example of the fifth embodiment.

FIG. 75(1) shows a first variation of the hold icon 660.
4 has an outer shell icon 661 similar to the hold icon 660, but
The difference is that the reserved icon 664 has an inner core icon 665 of a different size compared to the inner core icon 662 of the reserved icon 664. The size of the reserved icon 665 of the reserved icon 664 can be changed in relation to the degree of expectation to be notified and the possibility of notification. This allows the gaming machine 10 to perform a variety of reserved advance notice performances.

FIG. 75(2) shows a second modification of the hold icon 660.
6 has an outer shell icon 661 similar to the hold icon 660, but
The difference is that the reserved icon 666 has an inner core icon 667 that is different in shape compared to the inner core icon 662 of the reserved icon 666. The reserved icon 666 can have a different shape in relation to the magnitude of the expectation level to be notified and the possibility of notification. This allows the gaming machine 10 to perform a variety of reserved advance notice performances.

In addition, although the change in size and shape of the inner core icon 662 has been described as a modification of the reserved icon 660, the change in size and shape of the outer shell icon 661 may be performed. In addition, although the modification of the reserved icon 660 has been described, the same can be done for the reserved digestion icon 655.

Next, as a modified example of the hold icon 660 with a double structure as the initial state, a hold icon that does not have a double structure as the initial state will be described with reference to Fig. 76. Fig. 76 is a diagram showing an example of a hold waiting display, a hold digestion display, and an inner core icon row in a modified example of the fifth embodiment.

FIG. 76 (1) shows the hold display 505 and the hold digestion display 506. The hold display 505 displays a hold icon 669 corresponding to the number of holds. The hold digestion display 506 displays a hold digestion icon 668 during the changing display. The hold digestion icon 668 and the hold icon 669 are in their initial state with only an outer shell icon and no inner core icon. The hold digestion icon 668 and the hold icon 669 are displayed in the same shape and size, but may be displayed in different ways to be distinguishable. The hold digestion icon 668 and the hold icon 66
9 are aligned in a row at equal intervals. The pending digestion icon 668 and the pending icon 669 can be distinguished from each other by the fact that the pending digestion icon 668 has a pedestal display (an oval display indicated by a dashed line in the figure).

FIG. 76(2) shows the core icon row. The core icon row does not indicate the execution right of the start memory, and when it overlaps with the hold display 505 or the hold consumption display 506,
5 or the reserved consumption display 506. The core icon row is made up of eight core icons 670a, 670b, 670c, 670d, 670e,
670f, 670g, 670h are lined up. The number of the inner core icons is not limited to eight, and may be five corresponding to the reserved consumption icon 668 and the reserved icon 669, an infinite number of them may be lined up, or even just one. The row of inner core icons is aligned in accordance with the alignment interval of the reserved consumption icon 668 and the reserved icon 669. The expectation level set for each inner core icon constituting the row of inner core icons is determined each time a reserved performance is performed, and the number and combination of the inner core icon display modes pt01, pt02, pt03, pt04, pt05, pt06 differ depending on the expectation level to be performed. For example, the inner core icons 670a, 670c, 670d, 670e,
Icons 670f and 670h are inner core icon display modes pt01, icon 670b is inner core icon display mode pt02, and icon 670g is inner core icon display mode pt03.

Another example of the core icon string is shown in FIG. 76(3). For example, the core icon 670a is the core icon display mode pt01, the core icons 670b and 670f are the core icon display mode pt02, and the core icons 670c and 670g are the core icon display mode pt03.
t03, the core icons 670d and 670h are in the core icon display mode pt04, and the core icon 670e is in the core icon display mode pt05. In this way, the gaming machine 10 can create a variety of expectations by changing the display modes of the core icons that make up the core icon row.

Next, regarding the pending change in the pending digestion icon 668 and the pending icon 669, FIG.
77 is a diagram showing an example of a pending change in the pending icon and the pending icon according to a modified example of the fifth embodiment.

The pending consumption icon 668 and the pending icon 669 change to a pending state by the inner core icon row scrolling behind the pending consumption icon 668 and the pending icon 669 and then stopping (a pending icon roulette effect).

The reserved icon roulette (reserved icon roulette presentation) shown in FIG. 77(1) displays one reserved consumption icon 668 and four reserved icons 669, and shows how the row of inner core icons scrolls left behind them. In FIG. 77(1), the inner core icon 670b overlaps the reserved consumption icon 668, and it is notified that this display mode corresponds to the expectation level (low expectation level) set in the inner core icon display mode pt02. Also, the first reserved icon 66
The inner core icon 670c overlaps the 9th hold icon 669, informing the user that the display mode corresponds to the expectation level (standard) set in the inner core icon display mode pt01. The inner core icon 670d overlaps the 2nd hold icon 669, informing the user that the display mode corresponds to the expectation level (standard) set in the inner core icon display mode pt01. The inner core icon 670e overlaps the 3rd hold icon 669, informing the user that the display mode corresponds to the expectation level (standard) set in the inner core icon display mode pt01. The inner core icon 670f overlaps the 4th hold icon 669, informing the user that the display mode corresponds to the expectation level (standard) set in the inner core icon display mode pt01.

The reserved icon roulette shown in FIG. 77(2) displays one reserved consumption icon 668 and four reserved icons 669, and shows how the core icon row scrolls left behind them.
, 670g, and 670h are positioned offset from the reserved consumption icon 668 and the reserved icon 669. The gaming machine 10 shifts the display position of the inner core icon row, and the eight inner core icons 670a, 670b, 670h are positioned offset from the reserved consumption icon 668 and the reserved icon 669.
The icon row is made up of eight icons 670a, 670b, 670c, 670d, 670e, 670f, 670g, and 670h.
670d, 670e, 670f, 670g, and 670h are arranged in a loop, and the inner core icon that has reached the outside of the display area from the left end is made to appear within the display area from the right end.

The reserved icon roulette shown in FIG. 77(3) has eight core icons 670a, 670b, 670c, 670d, and 670e for the reserved consumption icon 668 and the reserved icon 669.
670e, 670f, 670g, and 670h are determined. By determining which of the reserved digestion icon 668 and the reserved icon 669 corresponds to, only the corresponding core icon is displayed, and the uncorresponding core icon is not displayed.

As a result, the pending digestion icon 668 and the first to third pending icons 6
It is notified that the fourth reserved icon 669 is a display mode corresponding to the expectation level (standard) set in the core icon display mode pt01. It is also notified that the fourth reserved icon 669 is a display mode corresponding to the expectation level (medium expectation) set in the core icon display mode pt03.

Next, the display mode of the reserved icon after the reserved icon roulette effect will be described with reference to Fig. 78. Fig. 78 is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the reserved icon after the reserved icon roulette effect in the modified example of the fifth embodiment.

The hold icon (including the hold icon 669 and the hold clearing icon 668) shown in FIG. 78(1) is the same as the hold icon 669 and the hold clearing icon 668 shown in FIG. 77(3).
The inner core icon is displayed overlapping the outer shell icon. In this manner, the gaming machine 10 makes it possible to distinguish the display modes of the reserved icon 669 and the reserved consumption icon 668 before and after the reserved icon roulette presentation.

The reserved icon shown in Fig. 78(2) (including the reserved icon 669 and the reserved consumption icon 668) is changed from the display state of the reserved icon 669 and the reserved consumption icon 668 shown in Fig. 77(3) to the outer shell icon in the color applied to the inner core icon, thereby making the inner core icon invisible. In this way, the gaming machine 10 makes it possible to distinguish the display state of the reserved icon 669 and the reserved consumption icon 668 before and after the reserved icon roulette presentation.

Next, as a modification of the fifth embodiment, the display performance of the reserved pedestal will be described with reference to Figs. 79 to 81. Fig. 79 is a diagram (part 1) showing an example of the reserved pedestal display of the modification of the fifth embodiment. Fig. 80 is a diagram (part 2) showing an example of the reserved pedestal display of the modification of the fifth embodiment. Fig. 81 is a diagram (part 3) showing an example of the reserved pedestal display of the modification of the fifth embodiment. The reserved performance in the reserved icon (including the reserved icon 669 and the reserved consumption icon 668) is only for the reserved performance, and even if there is a reserved performance with high expectation, it is only for the reserved performance and is not related to the reserved performance after the next time. The gaming machine 10 of the modification of the fifth embodiment makes it possible to produce a sense of expectation by relating the result of a predetermined reserved performance to the reserved performance after the next time.

The reserved pedestal 670 shown in FIG. 79(1) includes four reserved accumulation displays 671 consisting of round windows and an operation trigger display 672. The four reserved accumulation displays 671 store and display the display state of the reserved digestion icon 668 that has been digested during a predetermined period. For example, the reserved accumulation displays 671 display new history on the left and older history on the right in chronological order.
71 may be displayed in a predetermined order, such as in order of expectation level, rather than in chronological order. For example, the first reserved accumulation display 671 from the left displays the expectation level (e.g., green) corresponding to the reserved consumption icon 673 on the reserved base 670, the second and third reserved accumulation displays 671 display the expectation level (e.g., green and blue) corresponding to the past reserved consumption icons 668, and the fourth reserved accumulation display 671 displays blank as there is nothing to display. The activation trigger display 672 indicates that there is no activation trigger for the display effect (reserved base effect) on the reserved base. The activation trigger display 672 may, for example, display a message such as "POWER
"ON" is displayed in a non-reverse manner.

The reserved pedestal 670 shown in FIG. 79(2) stores and displays the display mode of the new reserved digestion icon 673 in the reserved cumulative display 671, which is the first from the left, and
The reserved pedestal 670 regards the fact that all four reserved accumulation displays 671 are filled as an activation trigger for the reserved pedestal effect in the reserved pedestal. The gaming machine 10 executes the reserved pedestal effect upon obtaining the activation trigger for the reserved pedestal effect. For example, the gaming machine 10 inverts the display mode of the activation trigger display 672 (inverts the message display "POWER ON") to inform the user that the activation trigger has been obtained, and shifts the reserved consumption icon 6
73 is displayed as an effect.

The reserved pedestal 670 shown in FIG. 79(3) updates the display mode of the reserved digestion icon 673 on the reserved pedestal 670, for example, from green before the change to yellow with a higher expectation based on the four reserved cumulative displays 671.
The display mode of No. 1 is reset to a blank display.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 displays the display mode of the reserved consuming icon 668 on the reserved pedestal 670 as a history, and changes the display mode of the reserved consuming icon 668 based on the history display. In this way, the gaming machine 10 can relate the result of a predetermined reserved performance to the next and subsequent reserved performances, thereby enabling the sustaining of a sense of expectation.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 changes the display mode of the reserved consumption icon 673 on the reserved base 670 upon receiving an activation trigger. However, the activation state is maintained for a predetermined period of time, and the reserved consumption icon 668, which is consumed after the reserved consumption icon 673 on the reserved base 670, is not displayed.
The display mode may be changed.

In addition, although the hold accumulation display 671 is described as storing and displaying the display modes of different hold consumption icons 668, it may also display the display mode of the hold consumption icon 673 placed on the hold base 670, which starts as hold icon 669 and then goes through a hold shift to become the hold consumption icon 673.

The holding base 680 shown in FIG. 80(1) is a holding base in the shape of a gas stove.
0 includes four pending accumulation displays 681 in the form of flames and an activation trigger display 682. The four pending accumulation displays 681 store and display the display state of the pending consumption icon 668 consumed in a predetermined period. The four pending accumulation displays 681 in the form of flames are display states according to the expectation of the pending consumption icon 668 consumed in a predetermined period. For example, the higher the expectation, the brighter the color,
It may become a big flame. The reserved pedestal 680 differs from the reserved pedestal 680 in that the display mode is changed to store and display the expectation of the reserved consumption icon 668 consumed during a predetermined period, as compared with the reserved pedestal 680 storing and displaying the expectation in the same display mode. For example, the first reserved accumulation display 681 from the left displays the expectation corresponding to the reserved consumption icon 683 on the reserved pedestal 680 (for example, a small red flame), the second and third reserved accumulation displays 681 display the expectation corresponding to the past reserved consumption icon 668 (for example, a small red flame and a yellow flame), and the fourth reserved accumulation display 681 displays blank because there is no display target. The operation trigger display 682 displays that there is no operation trigger for the display performance (reserved pedestal performance) on the reserved pedestal. The operation trigger display 682 displays, for example, the message display "TURN ON" in a non-inverted manner.

The reserved pedestal 680 shown in FIG. 80(2) stores and displays the display mode of the new reserved digestion icon 683 in the reserved cumulative display 681, which is the first from the left, so that the previous reserved cumulative display 681
The reserved pedestal 680 uses the fact that all four reserved cumulative displays 681 are filled as a trigger for the reserved pedestal performance in the reserved pedestal. The gaming machine 10 obtains the reserved pedestal performance activation trigger and executes the reserved pedestal performance. For example, the gaming machine 10 displays the display mode of the activation trigger display 682 in inverted mode (the message display "TURN ON" is displayed in inverted mode).
The user is informed that an operation trigger has been obtained, and a pending action digestion icon 68 on a pending action base 680 is displayed.
For example, the display mode of the upper surface of the reserve pedestal 680 is changed to produce the effect of heat generated from a flame acting on the reserve extinguishing icon 683.

The reserved pedestal 680 shown in FIG. 80(3) updates the display mode of the reserved digestion icon 683 on the reserved pedestal 680, for example, from green before the change to yellow with a higher expectation based on the four reserved cumulative displays 681.
The display mode of No. 1 is reset to a blank display.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 displays the display mode of the reserved consumption icon 683 on the reserved base 680 as a history, and changes the display mode of the reserved consumption icon 683 based on the history display. In this way, the gaming machine 10 can relate the result of a predetermined reserved performance to the next and subsequent reserved performances, thereby enabling the sustained sense of expectation to be created. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can accommodate a variety of performance forms by storing and displaying the expectation level of the reserved consumption icon 683 consumed by the reserved base 680 during a predetermined period by converting the display mode.

The reserved pedestal 680 shown in Fig. 81 (1) displays the reserved digestion icon 684 on the gas stove-shaped reserved pedestal in the shape of a raw egg. For example, the gaming machine 10 displays the reserved icon 669 in the shape of an egg, and when the reserved game is digested, the contents are removed from the shell to become the reserved digestion icon 684 on the gas stove-shaped reserved pedestal. That is, the gaming machine 10 can change the display mode from the reserved icon 669 to the reserved digestion icon 684 to match the reserved pedestal 680. Such a gaming machine 10 can suitably present the appearance of the flame of the gas stove acting on the reserved digestion icon 684.

In addition, the reserved consumption icon 684 changes from a raw egg shape to a fried egg shape,
The reserved accumulation display 681 can appropriately guide the amount of action that acts on the reserved consumption icon 684. At this time, the gaming machine 10 can make the expectation level indicated by the reserved consumption icon 684 correspond to the degree of doneness or browning of the fried egg.

The reserved pedestal 680 shown in Fig. 81 (2) carries a reserved digestion icon 685 that is smaller than the reserved digestion icon 684 carried by the reserved pedestal 680 shown in Fig. 81 (1). The size of such reserved digestion icon 685 creates the impression of easy cooking, and it changes from a raw egg shape to a fried egg shape with less heat than the reserved digestion icon 684 carried by the reserved pedestal 680. In other words, the gaming machine 10 can perform expectation effects not only by the display mode of reserved accumulation display 681 on the reserved pedestal 680, but also by a combination with the reserved digestion icon 685.

The gaming machine 10 of the above-described fifth embodiment (including the modified examples) has the following feature in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 stores a start memory as a right to play a game (for example, a special game 1 or a special game 2), and is capable of changing the hold display mode of the start memory in relation to the result of the game corresponding to the start memory to execute a hold notice performance, and a display means (for example, a display device 41
), and control means (e.g., the game control device 100, the performance control device 300). The display means is capable of displaying the starting memory. The control means causes the display means to display the starting memory in a pending display mode including a first display element (e.g., an inner core icon 662) indicating the degree of expectation for the game result, and a second display element (an outer shell icon 661) indicating the possibility of change of the first display element (FIGS. 69, 70, 72, 73).

Sixth embodiment
In the description of the gaming machines of the first to fifth embodiments, a gaming board 30 (see FIG. 2)
28 or a game board 800 (see FIG. 28), the gaming machine of the sixth embodiment can be applied to either of them. Note that the same reference numerals may be used to designate components similar to those of the first to fifth embodiments, and the description thereof may be omitted.

The movement of the icon display in the gaming machine 10 of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 82. Fig. 82 is a diagram for explaining the movement of the icon display indicating the reserved memory in the sixth embodiment as the game progresses. In the following, when there is no distinction between the reserved icon and the reserved consumption icon, they will be described as icon display.

FIG. 82(1) shows the state of the reserved display 505 and the reserved consumption display 506 while a variable display game is being executed. The reserved display 505 can display an icon display showing up to four reserved memories (start memories) and displays a waiting reserved (a reserved memory other than the variable display game being executed). The reserved display 505 displays the icon display that is first in the waiting order (execution order) at the first waiting position 50.
5a, the second icon display in the standby order is in the second standby position 505b, the third icon display in the standby order is in the third standby position 505c, and the fourth icon display in the standby order is in the fourth standby position 505d.
Display in.

In Fig. 82 (1), the gaming machine 10 displays an icon display 801 in the normal position (also called the reference display position or standard display position) of the reserved consumption display 506, indicating that the variable display game corresponding to the icon display 801 is being executed. The gaming machine 10 also displays an icon display 802 in the normal position of the first standby position 505a, an icon display 803 in the normal position of the second standby position 505b, and an icon display 804 in the normal position of the third standby position 505c, indicating that there are three reserved variable display games.

FIG. 82(2) shows the state of the reserved display 505 and the reserved consumption display 506 after FIG. 82(1) and when the variable display game is ended. In FIG. 82(2),
In the case of the pending completion display 506, the icon display 801 (more specifically, the icon display 801 displayed in the normal position of the pending completion display 506) is hidden, and the icon display 8
This indicates that the variable display game corresponding to 01 has ended.

FIG. 82(3) shows the state of the reserved display 505 and the reserved consumption display 506 after FIG. 82(2) when the variable display game corresponding to the icon display 802 starts to open. In FIG. 82(3), the gaming machine 10 moves the icon display 802 (more specifically, the icon display 802 from the first waiting position 505a (reserved display 505) to the reserved consumption display 506 (more specifically, the icon display 802 from the normal position of the first waiting position 505a to the reserved consumption display 506).
On the other hand, the gaming machine 10 moves the icon display 803 and the icon display 804 to the second waiting position 505b and the third waiting position 505c.
The standby position 505c (more specifically, the second standby position 505b and the third standby position 505c)
The stop display is displayed in the normal position (as shown in the figure).

FIG. 82(4) shows the state of the reserved display 505 and the reserved consumption display 506 after FIG. 82(3) when the variable display game corresponding to the icon display 802 starts to open. In FIG. 82(4), the gaming machine 10 moves the icon display 803 (
More specifically, the icon display 803) is moved from the normal position of the second standby position 505b to the normal position of the first standby position 505a. In addition, the gaming machine 10 moves the icon display 803) from the third standby position 505c to the second standby position 505b in response to the start of the variable display game corresponding to the icon display 802.
8 (more specifically, the icon display 804 is moved from the normal position of the third standby position 505c to the normal position of the second standby position 505b).

Fig. 82(5) shows the state of the reserved display 505 and the reserved consumption display 506 after Fig. 82(4) when the variable display game corresponding to the icon display 802 starts to open. In Fig. 82(5), the gaming machine 10 displays (displays in a stopped state) the icon display 803 at the first standby position 505a (more specifically, at the normal position of the first standby position 505a), and
This indicates that the movement of the icon display 803 from the standby position 505b to the first standby position 505a has been completed. In addition, the gaming machine 10 displays an icon display 804 at the second standby position 505b (more specifically, at the normal position of the second standby position 505b), indicating that the movement of the icon display 804 from the third standby position 505c to the second standby position 505b has been completed. On the other hand, the gaming machine 10 continues to move the icon display 802, and the reserved consumption display 5
This indicates that the movement to 06 has not yet been completed.

Fig. 82(6) shows the state of the reserved display 505 and the reserved consumption display 506 after Fig. 82(5) when the variable display game corresponding to the icon display 802 starts to open. In Fig. 82(6), the gaming machine 10 displays the icon display 802 on the reserved consumption display 506 (more specifically, on the normal position of the reserved consumption display 506), indicating that the movement of the icon display 802 from the first waiting position 505a to the reserved consumption display 506 has been completed.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 makes the timing of the icon display movement between each waiting position different from the timing of the icon display movement between the reserved display 505 and the reserved consumption display 506. By making the timing of the movement different in this way, the gaming machine 10 can provide a sense of interest in multiple stages by the performance of the movement of each icon display. Also, by making the timing of the movement different in this way and moving (operating) in multiple stages, the gaming machine 10 can attract the player's attention more to each icon display (can guide the player's gaze to each icon display).

In addition, during the period in which the icon display is moved from the reserved display 505 to the reserved digestion display 506 (
82(3) to 82(5)), the movement of the icon display between each waiting position is completed (the movement of the icon display from the reserved display 505 to the reserved consumption display 506 starts before the icon display starts moving between each waiting position and continues even after the icon display has finished moving between each waiting position), so the gaming machine 10 can naturally draw the player's attention to the reserved consumption icon (the icon display that moves to the reserved consumption display 506). For example, since the icon display between each waiting position is not performed immediately after the start of or immediately before the end of the reserved consumption display 506, the gaming machine 10 can draw the player's attention more to the reserved consumption icon immediately after the start of or immediately before the end of the reserved consumption display 506.

In the above movement example, the time required for movement from the first standby position 505a to the reserved consumption display 506 (FIG. 82(3) to FIG. 82(6)) is longer than the time required for movement between each standby position (FIG. 82(4) to FIG. 82(5)), but the gaming machine 10 can achieve this by varying the movement speed, for example. Also, the gaming machine 10 may achieve this by making the distance from the first standby position 505a to the reserved consumption display 506 longer than the distance between each standby position.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 can set the icon display movement presentation mode to another movement presentation mode (for example, fading out to the lower side at the position before the movement, and fading in from the upper side at the position after the movement) regardless of the horizontal movement shown in FIG. 82. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can set the icon display movement presentation mode between each waiting position and the first waiting position 505.
The movement presentation of the icon display between a and the pending consumption display 506 can also be made different.

Next, the timing of the icon display movement will be described in more detail with reference to Fig. 83. Fig. 83 is a diagram (part 1) showing an example of a timing chart showing the timing of the icon display movement in accordance with the progress of the variable display game of the reserved memory in the sixth embodiment.

The time interval (period) A is the interval (time lag) between the timing when the pattern fluctuation stops with the end of the variable display game and the timing when the icon display displayed in the reserved consumption display 506 is hidden. The time interval (period) B is the interval between the timing when the pattern fluctuation starts with the start of the variable display game and the timing when the icon display starts to be displayed in the reserved consumption display 506 (the movement of the icon display to the reserved consumption display 506 ends), and is set to be longer than the time interval A.

The time interval (period) C is the interval from the start of the movement of the icon display from the first waiting position 505a to the pending digestion display 506 to the end of the movement (from the first waiting position 505a to the pending digestion display 506).
06) Time interval (period) D is the interval from the start of movement of the icon display between each waiting position to the end of the movement (time interval required for the icon display to move between each waiting position). Time interval (period) E is the interval between the timing when the pattern starts to change with the start of the variable display game and the timing when the icon display stops moving between each waiting position.

In addition, in Figure 83, it is explained that the Nth variable display game starts from t1, and the N+1th variable display game starts from t8.
The gaming machine 10 starts changing the pattern at timing t1 in conjunction with the start of the Nth changing display game, and starts moving the icon display from the first waiting position 505a (pending display 505) to the pending consumption display 506, starts moving the icon display between each waiting position at timing t2, finishes moving the icon display between each waiting position at timing t3, and finishes moving the icon display from the first waiting position 505a to the pending consumption display 506 at timing t4.

Thereafter, the gaming machine 10 stops the pattern variation at timing t5 with the end of the Nth variable display game, and makes the icon display corresponding to the Nth variable display game that was displayed in the reserved consumption display 506 invisible at timing t6.

After that, the gaming machine 10 receives a command for the presentation of the N+1th variable display game at timing t7. Then, the gaming machine 10 determines the moving mode (
A process of selecting (setting) the movement performance mode, movement speed, etc. (the current (N+
A process for setting the icon display movement effect corresponding to the variable display game (first (N+1) game) is performed first, and then a process for setting the icon display movement mode between each waiting position (a process for setting the icon display movement effect corresponding to the next (N+2) game or later variable display game having a lower priority) is performed. The process for selecting the icon display movement mode is performed, for example, in the effect display editing process of step D23.

According to this, the gaming machine 10 moves the reserved consumption display 50 from the first waiting position 505a with a high priority.
Since the manner in which the icon display moves to pending consumption display 506 has been determined in advance, even if an error or other problem occurs, the risk of a malfunction occurring in the performance of the icon display moving to pending consumption display 506 can be prevented.

Thereafter, at timing t8, the gaming machine 10 starts changing the pattern in conjunction with the start of the N+1th changing display game, and starts moving the icon display from the first waiting position 505a to the pending consumption display 506, starts moving the icon display between each waiting position at timing t9, finishes moving the icon display between each waiting position at timing t10, and finishes moving the icon display from the first waiting position 505a to the pending consumption display 506 at timing t11.

The above is an example of the timing of movement of the icon display as the variable display game progresses in the gaming machine 10.
In this way, the gaming machine 10 stops the symbol variation when the variable display game ends,
Since a predetermined time lag (time interval A) is provided between the display of the icon (icon display corresponding to the variable display game) of the pending consumption display 506 and the non-display of the icon, the player can be made to feel a sense of anticipation that the variable display game will change again.

Generally, the teasing effect that confuses the derived result of the game (win or loss) is performed by the time interval for teasing (the time lag between the stop of the pattern change that occurs with the end of the variable display game and the non-display of the icon display of the reserved consumption display 506, the time interval that makes the progress of the game uncertain).
If it is made too long (if it is too exciting), it may cause players to lose trust.

In contrast, the movement of the icon display to the reserved consumption display 506 (the time lag from the start of the movement to the end of the movement) that accompanies the start of the variable display game is performed at the start of the game and is not a teasing effect that confuses the derived result of the game (win, lose), so even if the time interval is long, it is unlikely to cause distrust among players.

Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can set the time required for the movement of the icon display to the pending consumption display 506 to a time interval C that is longer than the time interval A (for example, a time interval of a length that may cause distrust if there is a time lag between the cessation of pattern change accompanying the end of the variable display game and the disappearance of the icon display on the pending consumption display 506), thereby allowing for greater freedom in the movement presentation.

This allows the gaming machine 10 to increase the interest of the presentation of the movement of the icon display to the pending consumption display 506, and can attract more of the player's attention to the icon display (pending consumption icon) corresponding to the changing display game when the change begins.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 is designed so that it takes a time interval C, which is longer than the time interval D, to move the icon display to the pending consumption display 506, so that the movement presentation of the icon display to the pending consumption display 506 can be made more flexible than the movement presentation of the icon display between each waiting position.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can increase the interest in the presentation of the icon display moving to the pending consumption display 506 more than the interest in the presentation of the icon display moving between each waiting position, and can attract the player's attention more to the icon display (pending consumption icon) corresponding to the variable display game when the variable starts.

The gaming machine 10 may provide more freedom in the movement presentation by setting the time interval D longer than the time interval A (for example, a time interval of a length that may cause distrust if there is a time lag between the stop of the pattern change accompanying the end of the changing display game and the non-display of the icon display of the reserved consumption display 506).By providing more freedom in the movement presentation, the gaming machine 10 can increase the interest of the movement presentation of the icon display between the waiting positions, and can attract the player's attention to the icon display corresponding to the next or subsequent changing display games at the start of the movement.

In addition, by making the time interval D instantaneous, the gaming machine 10 can prevent the player's attention from being drawn to the icon display corresponding to the next or subsequent variable display games at the start of the variable display.
In addition, the gaming machine 10 is not limited to requiring a time interval C longer than time interval D to move the icon display to the pending consumption display 506, and time interval C and time interval D may be the same length.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 is not limited to making the time interval C longer than the time interval D and the time interval A, and may make the time interval C shorter than the time interval D and the time interval A.
Next, modified examples of the timing of icon display movement will be described with reference to Fig. 84 to Fig. 91. Fig. 84 is a diagram (part 2) showing an example of a timing chart showing the timing of movement of the icon display indicating reserved memory in the sixth embodiment with the progress of the game.
FIG. 85 is a diagram (part 3) showing an example of a timing chart showing the timing of movement of the icon display indicating reserved memory in the sixth embodiment as the game progresses.
FIG. 87 is a diagram (part 5) showing an example of a timing chart showing the movement timing of the icon display showing the reserved memory in the sixth embodiment as the variable display game progresses. FIG. 88 is a diagram (part 6) showing an example of a timing chart showing the movement timing of the icon display showing the reserved memory in the sixth embodiment as the variable display game progresses. FIG. 89 is a diagram (part 7) showing an example of a timing chart showing the movement timing of the icon display showing the reserved memory in the sixth embodiment as the variable display game progresses. FIG. 90 is a diagram (part 8) showing an example of a timing chart showing the movement timing of the icon display showing the reserved memory in the sixth embodiment as the variable display game progresses. FIG. 91 is a diagram (part 9) showing an example of a timing chart showing the movement timing of the icon display showing the reserved memory in the sixth embodiment as the variable display game progresses.

First, a description will be given of the timing chart of Fig. 84. In Fig. 84, the Nth variable display game is started from t1, and the N+1th variable display game is started from t7.

The gaming machine 10 starts changing the pattern at timing t1 in conjunction with the start of the Nth changing display game, and starts moving the icon display from the first waiting position 505a to the pending consumption display 506, starts moving the icon display between each waiting position at timing t2, finishes moving the icon display between each waiting position at timing t3, and finishes moving the icon display from the first waiting position 505a to the pending consumption display 506 at timing t4.

Thereafter, upon completion of the Nth variable display game, the gaming machine 10 stops the pattern variation at timing t5 and makes the icon display corresponding to the Nth variable display game that was displayed in the reserved consumption display 506 invisible.

After that, the gaming machine 10 receives a command for the presentation of the N+1th variable display game at timing t6. Then, the gaming machine 10 first performs a process of selecting the movement mode of the icon display from the first waiting position 505a to the reserved consumption display 506, which is performed with the start of the N+1th variable display game, and then performs a process of setting the movement mode of the icon display between each waiting position.

According to this, the gaming machine 10 moves the reserved consumption display 50 from the first waiting position 505a with a high priority.
Since the manner in which the icon display moves to pending consumption display 506 has been determined in advance, even if an error or other problem occurs, the risk of a malfunction occurring in the performance of the icon display moving to pending consumption display 506 can be prevented.

After that, the gaming machine 10 starts the pattern variation with the start of the N+1th variation display game at timing t7, starts moving the icon display from the first waiting position 505a to the reserved consumption display 506, starts moving the icon display between each waiting position at timing t8, ends moving the icon display between each waiting position at timing t9,
At 10, the movement of the icon display from the first waiting position 505a to the pending completion display 506 is completed.

The above is a modified example of the timing of movement of the icon display accompanying the progress of the variable display game in the gaming machine 10. In this way, instead of first stopping the pattern change and then hiding the icon display displayed in the reserved consumption display 506 (see FIG. 84), the gaming machine 10 can also stop the pattern change and hide the icon display in the reserved consumption display 506 without providing a time lag (time interval A=0).

In this way, the gaming machine 10 is designed so that it takes a time interval C longer than the time interval D to move the icon display to the pending consumption display 506, so that the movement presentation of the icon display to the pending consumption display 506 can be made more flexible than the movement presentation of the icon display between each waiting position.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can increase the interest in the presentation of the icon display moving to the pending consumption display 506 more than the interest in the presentation of the icon display moving between each waiting position, and can attract more of the player's attention to the icon display corresponding to the changing display game when the change starts.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 determines the time required for the icon display to move to the reserved consumption display 506 (
By lengthening the time interval C), it is possible to provide greater freedom in the movement effects.
This allows the gaming machine 10 to increase the interest of the presentation of the movement of the icon display to the pending consumption display 506, and can attract more of the player's attention to the icon display corresponding to the changing display game when the change begins.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 may also lengthen the time interval D to provide more freedom in the movement presentation. By providing more freedom in the movement presentation, the gaming machine 10 can increase the interest of the movement presentation of the icon display between waiting positions, and can further attract the player's attention to the icon display corresponding to the next or subsequent variable display games at the start of the movement.

In addition, by making the time interval D instantaneous, the gaming machine 10 can prevent the player's attention from being drawn to the icon display corresponding to the next or subsequent variable display games at the start of the variable display.
Next, a description will be given of the timing chart of Fig. 85. In Fig. 85, the Nth variable display game is started from t1, and the N+1th variable display game is started from t8.

In addition, in Figure 85, it is explained that the Nth variable display game starts from t1, and the N+1th variable display game starts from t8.
The gaming machine 10 starts changing the pattern at timing t1 in conjunction with the start of the Nth changing display game, and starts moving the icon display from the first waiting position 505a to the pending consumption display 506, starts moving the icon display between each waiting position at timing t2, finishes moving the icon display between each waiting position at timing t3, and finishes moving the icon display from the first waiting position 505a to the pending consumption display 506 at timing t4.

Thereafter, upon completion of the Nth variable display game, the gaming machine 10 makes the icon display corresponding to the Nth variable display game displayed in the reserved consumption display 506 invisible at timing t5, and stops the pattern variation at timing t6.

After that, the gaming machine 10 receives a command for the presentation of the N+1th variable display game at timing t7. Then, the gaming machine 10 first performs a process of selecting a movement mode of the icon display from the first waiting position 505a to the reserved consumption display 506, which is performed with the start of the N+1th variable display game, and then performs a process of setting a movement mode of the icon display between each waiting position.

According to this, the gaming machine 10 moves the reserved consumption display 50 from the first waiting position 505a with a high priority.
Since the manner in which the icon display moves to pending consumption display 506 has been determined in advance, even if an error or other problem occurs, the risk of a malfunction occurring in the performance of the icon display moving to pending consumption display 506 can be prevented.

Thereafter, at timing t8, the gaming machine 10 starts changing the pattern in conjunction with the start of the N+1th changing display game, and starts moving the icon display from the first waiting position 505a to the pending consumption display 506, starts moving the icon display between each waiting position at timing t9, finishes moving the icon display between each waiting position at timing t10, and finishes moving the icon display from the first waiting position 505a to the pending consumption display 506 at timing t11.

The above is an example of the timing of movement of the icon display with the progress of the variable display game in the gaming machine 10. In this way, the gaming machine 10 can stop the pattern variation first and then hide the icon display displayed in the reserved consumption display 506 (see FIG. 84), or can stop the pattern variation later after hiding the icon display displayed in the reserved consumption display 506 first.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 stops the symbol variation when the variable display game ends,
Since a predetermined time lag (time interval A) is provided between the display of the icon in the pending consumption display 506 and the non-display of the icon, the player can feel a sense of anticipation that the variable display game will change again.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 sets the time required to perform the movement of the icon display to the pending consumption display 506 to time interval C, which is longer than time interval A, allowing for greater freedom in the movement performance.

This allows the gaming machine 10 to increase the interest of the presentation of the movement of the icon display to the pending consumption display 506, and can attract more of the player's attention to the icon display corresponding to the changing display game when the change begins.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 is designed so that it takes a time interval C, which is longer than the time interval D, to move the icon display to the pending consumption display 506, so that the movement presentation of the icon display to the pending consumption display 506 can be made more flexible than the movement presentation of the icon display between each waiting position.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can increase the interest in the presentation of the icon display moving to the pending consumption display 506 more than the interest in the presentation of the icon display moving between each waiting position, and can attract more of the player's attention to the icon display corresponding to the changing display game when the change starts.

The gaming machine 10 may provide greater freedom in the movement presentation by setting the time interval D longer than the time interval A. By providing greater freedom in the movement presentation, the gaming machine 10 can increase the interest of the movement presentation of the icon display between waiting positions, and can better attract the player's attention to the icon display corresponding to the next or subsequent variable display games at the start of the movement.

In addition, by making the time interval D instantaneous, the gaming machine 10 can prevent the player's attention from being drawn to the icon display corresponding to the next or subsequent variable display games at the start of the variable display.
Next, a description will be given of the timing chart of Fig. 86. Note that in Fig. 86, the explanation will be given assuming that the Nth variable display game starts from t1, and the N+1th variable display game starts from t8.

The gaming machine 10 starts changing the pattern at timing t1 with the start of the Nth changing display game, starts moving the icon display from the first waiting position 505a to the pending consumption display 506 at timing t2, starts moving the icon display between each waiting position at timing t3, and ends moving the icon display between each waiting position and moving the icon display from the first waiting position 505a to the pending consumption display 506 at timing t4.

Thereafter, the gaming machine 10 stops the pattern variation at timing t5 with the end of the Nth variable display game, and makes the icon display corresponding to the Nth variable display game that was displayed in the reserved consumption display 506 invisible at timing t6.

After that, the gaming machine 10 receives a command for the presentation of the N+1th variable display game at timing t7. Then, the gaming machine 10 first performs a process of selecting a movement mode of the icon display from the first waiting position 505a to the reserved consumption display 506, which is performed with the start of the N+1th variable display game, and then performs a process of setting a movement mode of the icon display between each waiting position.

According to this, the gaming machine 10 moves the reserved consumption display 50 from the first waiting position 505a with a high priority.
Since the manner in which the icon display moves to pending consumption display 506 has been determined in advance, even if an error or other problem occurs, the risk of a malfunction occurring in the performance of the icon display moving to pending consumption display 506 can be prevented.

Thereafter, the gaming machine 10 starts changing the pattern with the start of the N+1th changing display game at timing t8, starts moving the icon display from the first waiting position 505a to the pending consumption display 506 at timing t9, starts moving the icon display between each waiting position at timing t10, and ends moving the icon display between each waiting position and moving the icon display from the first waiting position 505a to the pending consumption display 506 at timing t11.

The above is an example of the timing of movement of the icon display accompanying the progress of the variable display game in the gaming machine 10. In this manner, the gaming machine 10 may synchronize the timing of the end of the movement of the icon display to the reserved consumption display 506 with the timing of the end of the movement of the icon display between each waiting position.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 stops the symbol variation when the variable display game ends,
Since a predetermined time lag (time interval A) is provided between the display of the icon in the pending consumption display 506 and the non-display of the icon, the player can feel a sense of anticipation that the variable display game will change again.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 makes the time interval B from the start of the pattern change to the end of the movement of the icon display to the pending consumption display 506 the same as the time interval E from the start of the pattern change to the end of the movement of the icon display between each waiting position (the timing at which the movement of the icon display to the pending consumption display 506 ends is the same as the timing at which the movement of the icon display between each waiting position ends), so that the player can quickly understand that the movement of the icon display will not continue any further and the player's attention can be quickly shifted to the pattern change.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 makes the time interval B from the start of the pattern change to the end of the movement of the icon display to the reserved consumption display 506 longer than the time interval C from the start of the movement of the icon display to the reserved consumption display 506 to the end of the movement, and makes the time interval D from the start of the movement of the icon display between each waiting position to the end of the movement shorter than the time interval C from the start of the movement of the icon display to the reserved consumption display 506 to the end of the movement (time interval B > time interval C > time interval D).Furthermore, the pattern operates (starts to change) before the icon display operates (starts to move).
The player's attention can also be drawn to the symbols (for example, at the start of a variable display game, attention can be drawn to the symbols for a moment).

In addition, the gaming machine 10 is designed so that it takes a time interval C, which is longer than the time interval D, to move the icon display to the pending consumption display 506, so that the movement presentation of the icon display to the pending consumption display 506 can be made more flexible than the movement presentation of the icon display between each waiting position.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can increase the interest in the presentation of the icon display moving to the pending consumption display 506 more than the interest in the presentation of the icon display moving between each waiting position, and can attract more of the player's attention to the icon display corresponding to the changing display game when the change starts.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 may provide more freedom in the movement presentation by setting the time interval C longer than the time interval A. By providing more freedom in the movement presentation, the gaming machine 10 can increase the interest of the movement presentation of the icon display to the reserved consumption display 506, and can further attract the player's attention to the icon display corresponding to the variable display game at the start of the variation.

The gaming machine 10 may provide greater freedom in the movement presentation by setting the time interval D longer than the time interval A. By providing greater freedom in the movement presentation, the gaming machine 10 can increase the interest in the movement presentation of the icon display between waiting positions, and can better attract the player's attention to the icon display corresponding to the next or subsequent variable display games at the start of the movement.

In addition, by making the time interval D instantaneous, the gaming machine 10 can prevent the player's attention from being drawn to the icon display corresponding to the next or subsequent variable display games at the start of the variable display.
Next, a description will be given of the timing chart of Fig. 87. In Fig. 87, the Nth variable display game is started from t1, and the N+1th variable display game is started from t9.

The gaming machine 10 starts the pattern change at timing t1 with the start of the Nth change display game, starts moving the icon display from the first waiting position 505a to the reserved consumption display 506 at timing t2, starts moving the icon display between each waiting position at timing t3, finishes moving the icon display from the first waiting position 505a to the reserved consumption display 506 at timing t4, and finishes moving the icon display between each waiting position at timing t5 (a timing after timing t4 and a timing at which the relationship time interval C > time interval D is established).

Thereafter, the gaming machine 10 stops the pattern variation at timing t6 upon completion of the Nth variable display game, and at timing t7 makes the icon display corresponding to the Nth variable display game that was displayed in the reserved consumption display 506 invisible.

After that, the gaming machine 10 receives a command for the presentation of the N+1th variable display game at timing t8. Then, the gaming machine 10 first performs a process of selecting a movement mode of the icon display from the first waiting position 505a to the reserved consumption display 506, which is performed with the start of the N+1th variable display game, and then performs a process of setting a movement mode of the icon display between each waiting position.

According to this, the gaming machine 10 moves the reserved consumption display 50 from the first waiting position 505a with a high priority.
Since the manner in which the icon display moves to pending consumption display 506 has been determined in advance, even if an error or other problem occurs, the risk of a malfunction occurring in the performance of the icon display moving to pending consumption display 506 can be prevented.

Thereafter, the gaming machine 10 starts changing the pattern with the start of the N+1th changing display game at timing t9, starts moving the icon display from the first waiting position 505a to the reserved consumption display 506 at timing t10, starts moving the icon display between each waiting position at timing t11, finishes moving the icon display from the first waiting position 505a to the reserved consumption display 506 at timing t12, and finishes moving the icon display between each waiting position at timing t13 (a timing after timing t12 and at which the relationship time interval C > time interval D is established).

The above is an example of the timing of movement of the icon display accompanying the progress of the variable display game in the gaming machine 10. In this manner, the gaming machine 10 may set the timing of the end of the movement of the icon display between each waiting position to be delayed from the timing of the end of the movement of the icon display to the reserved consumption display 506.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 stops the symbol variation when the variable display game ends,
Since a predetermined time lag (time interval A) is provided between the display of the icon in the pending consumption display 506 and the non-display of the icon, the player can feel a sense of anticipation that the variable display game will change again.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 makes the time interval B from the start of the pattern change to the end of the movement of the icon display to the reserved consumption display 506 longer than the time interval C from the start of the movement of the icon display to the reserved consumption display 506 to the end of the movement, and makes the time interval E from the start of the pattern change to the end of the movement of the icon display between each waiting position longer than the time interval D from the start of the movement of the icon display between each waiting position to the end of the movement (time interval B>time interval C, time interval E>time interval D).
), and the icon display starts to move before the pattern starts to change.
This allows the player's attention to be drawn to the symbols as well (for example, at the start of a variable display game, attention can be drawn to the symbols for a moment).

In addition, the gaming machine 10 is designed so that it takes a time interval C, which is longer than the time interval D, to move the icon display to the pending consumption display 506, so that the movement presentation of the icon display to the pending consumption display 506 can be made more flexible than the movement presentation of the icon display between each waiting position.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can increase the interest in the presentation of the icon display moving to the pending consumption display 506 more than the interest in the presentation of the icon display moving between each waiting position, and can attract more of the player's attention to the icon display corresponding to the changing display game when the change starts.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 delays the end of the time interval D from the end of the movement of the icon display to the reserved consumption display 506, so that the player's attention can also be drawn to the icon display corresponding to the next and subsequent variable display games at the start of the variable display.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 may provide more freedom in the movement presentation by setting the time interval C longer than the time interval A. By providing more freedom in the movement presentation, the gaming machine 10 can increase the interest of the movement presentation of the icon display to the reserved consumption display 506, and can further attract the player's attention to the icon display corresponding to the variable display game at the start of the variation.

The gaming machine 10 may provide greater freedom in the movement presentation by setting the time interval D longer than the time interval A. By providing greater freedom in the movement presentation, the gaming machine 10 can increase the interest in the movement presentation of the icon display between waiting positions, and can better attract the player's attention to the icon display corresponding to the next or subsequent variable display games at the start of the movement.

In addition, by making the time interval D instantaneous, the gaming machine 10 can prevent the player's attention from being drawn to the icon display corresponding to the next or subsequent variable display games at the start of the variable display.
Next, a description will be given of the timing chart of Fig. 88. In Fig. 88, the Nth variable display game is started from t1, and the N+1th variable display game is started from t8.

The gaming machine 10 starts the pattern variation with the start of the Nth variation display game at timing t1, starts the movement of the icon display from the first waiting position 505a to the reserved consumption display 506 and the movement of the icon display between each waiting position at timing t2, ends the movement of the icon display between each waiting position at timing t3, and ends the movement of the icon display between the first waiting position 505a at timing t4.
The movement of the icon display from to the pending completion display 506 is completed.

Thereafter, the gaming machine 10 stops the pattern variation at timing t5 with the end of the Nth variable display game, and makes the icon display corresponding to the Nth variable display game that was displayed in the reserved consumption display 506 invisible at timing t6.

After that, the gaming machine 10 receives a command for the presentation of the N+1th variable display game at timing t7. Then, the gaming machine 10 first performs a process of selecting a movement mode of the icon display from the first waiting position 505a to the reserved consumption display 506, which is performed with the start of the N+1th variable display game, and then performs a process of setting a movement mode of the icon display between each waiting position.

According to this, the gaming machine 10 moves the reserved consumption display 50 from the first waiting position 505a with a high priority.
Since the manner in which the icon display moves to pending consumption display 506 has been determined in advance, even if an error or other problem occurs, the risk of a malfunction occurring in the performance of the icon display moving to pending consumption display 506 can be prevented.

After that, the gaming machine 10 starts the pattern variation with the start of the N+1th variation display game at timing t8, moves the icon display from the first waiting position 505a to the reserved consumption display 506 at timing t9, and starts the movement of the icon display between each waiting position, ends the movement of the icon display between each waiting position at timing t10, and ends the movement of the first
The movement of the icon display from the waiting position 505a to the pending completion display 506 is completed.

The above is an example of the timing of movement of the icon display accompanying the progress of the variable display game in the gaming machine 10. In this manner, the gaming machine 10 may unify the timing of starting the movement of the icon display to the reserved consumption display 506 and the timing of starting the movement of the icon display between each waiting position.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 stops the symbol variation when the variable display game ends,
Since a predetermined time lag (time interval A) is provided between the display of the icon in the pending consumption display 506 and the non-display of the icon, the player can feel a sense of anticipation that the variable display game will change again.

In addition, since the gaming machine 10 simultaneously starts moving the icon display to the pending consumption display 506 and between each waiting position, the player can quickly understand that the movement of the icon display has started.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 makes the time interval B from the start of the pattern change to the end of the movement of the icon display to the reserved consumption display 506 longer than the time interval C from the start of the movement of the icon display to the reserved consumption display 506 to the end of the movement, and makes the time interval D from the start of the movement of the icon display between each waiting position to the end of the movement shorter than the time interval C from the start of the movement of the icon display to the reserved consumption display 506 to the end of the movement (time interval B > time interval C > time interval D).Furthermore, the pattern operates (starts to change) before the icon display operates (starts to move).
The player's attention can also be drawn to the symbols (for example, at the start of a variable display game, attention can be drawn to the symbols for a moment).

In addition, the gaming machine 10 is designed so that it takes a time interval C, which is longer than the time interval D, to move the icon display to the pending consumption display 506, so that the movement presentation of the icon display to the pending consumption display 506 can be made more flexible than the movement presentation of the icon display between each waiting position.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can increase the interest in the presentation of the icon display moving to the pending consumption display 506 more than the interest in the presentation of the icon display moving between each waiting position, and can attract more of the player's attention to the icon display corresponding to the changing display game when the change starts.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 may provide more freedom in the movement presentation by setting the time interval C longer than the time interval A. By providing more freedom in the movement presentation, the gaming machine 10 can increase the interest of the movement presentation of the icon display to the reserved consumption display 506, and can further attract the player's attention to the icon display corresponding to the variable display game at the start of the variation.

The gaming machine 10 may provide greater freedom in the movement presentation by setting the time interval D longer than the time interval A. By providing greater freedom in the movement presentation, the gaming machine 10 can increase the interest in the movement presentation of the icon display between waiting positions, and can better attract the player's attention to the icon display corresponding to the next or subsequent variable display games at the start of the movement.

In addition, by making the time interval D instantaneous, the gaming machine 10 can prevent the player's attention from being drawn to the icon display corresponding to the next or subsequent variable display games at the start of the variable display.
Next, a description will be given of the timing chart of Fig. 89. In Fig. 89, the Nth variable display game is started from t1, and the N+1th variable display game is started from t8.

The gaming machine 10 starts the pattern variation with the start of the Nth variation display game at timing t1, and starts the movement of the icon display between each waiting position, starts the movement of the icon display from the first waiting position 505a to the reserved consumption display 506 at timing t2, ends the movement of the icon display between each waiting position at timing t3 (a timing after timing t2, and a timing at which the relationship of time interval C>time interval D is established), and
4. The movement of the icon display from the first waiting position 505a to the pending completion display 506 is completed.

Thereafter, the gaming machine 10 stops the pattern variation at timing t5 with the end of the Nth variable display game, and makes the icon display corresponding to the Nth variable display game that was displayed in the reserved consumption display 506 invisible at timing t6.

After that, the gaming machine 10 receives a command for the presentation of the N+1th variable display game at timing t7. Then, the gaming machine 10 first performs a process of selecting a movement mode of the icon display from the first waiting position 505a to the reserved consumption display 506, which is performed with the start of the N+1th variable display game, and then performs a process of setting a movement mode of the icon display between each waiting position.

According to this, the gaming machine 10 moves the reserved consumption display 50 from the first waiting position 505a with a high priority.
Since the manner in which the icon display moves to pending consumption display 506 has been determined in advance, even if an error or other problem occurs, the risk of a malfunction occurring in the performance of the icon display moving to pending consumption display 506 can be prevented.

At timing t8, the gaming machine 10 starts changing the symbols in response to the start of the (N+1)th changing display game, and starts moving the icon display between each waiting position.
At timing t10 (a timing after timing t9 at which the relationship time interval C>time interval D is established), the movement of the icon display between each waiting position is completed, and at timing t11, the movement of the icon display from the first waiting position 505a to the pending completion display 506 is completed.

The above is an example of the timing of the movement of the icon display accompanying the progress of the variable display game in the gaming machine 10. In this way, the gaming machine 10 may start the movement of the icon display between each waiting position earlier than the movement start timing of the icon display to the reserved consumption display 506. Note that in the above timing chart, the timing of the start of the variation of the symbols and
Although an example has been described in which the timing at which the icon display starts moving between waiting positions is the same, this is not limited to the above, and the icon display may start moving between waiting positions a predetermined time after the pattern starts to change.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 stops the symbol variation when the variable display game ends,
Since a predetermined time lag (time interval A) is provided between the display of the icon in the pending consumption display 506 and the non-display of the icon, the player can feel a sense of anticipation that the variable display game will change again.

In addition, since the gaming machine 10 starts moving the icon display between each waiting position before starting to move the icon display to the reserved consumption display 506,
Since the player's attention can be directed to the hold display 505 before the icon display starts to move to the hold display 506, the player can be made to recognize with certainty that the icon display has started to move from the hold display 505 to the hold consumption display 506.

In addition, since the gaming machine 10 starts moving the icon display between each waiting position before starting to move the icon display to the pending consumption display 506, the movement of the icon display between waiting positions with a short movement time (time interval D < time interval C) can also attract the player's attention.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 is designed so that it takes a time interval C, which is longer than the time interval D, to move the icon display to the pending consumption display 506, so that the movement presentation of the icon display to the pending consumption display 506 can be made more flexible than the movement presentation of the icon display between each waiting position.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can increase the interest in the presentation of the icon display moving to the pending consumption display 506 more than the interest in the presentation of the icon display moving between each waiting position, and can attract more of the player's attention to the icon display corresponding to the changing display game when the change starts.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 may provide more freedom in the movement presentation by setting the time interval C longer than the time interval A. By providing more freedom in the movement presentation, the gaming machine 10 can increase the interest of the movement presentation of the icon display to the reserved consumption display 506, and can further attract the player's attention to the icon display corresponding to the variable display game at the start of the variation.

The gaming machine 10 may provide greater freedom in the movement presentation by setting the time interval D longer than the time interval A. By providing greater freedom in the movement presentation, the gaming machine 10 can increase the interest in the movement presentation of the icon display between waiting positions, and can better attract the player's attention to the icon display corresponding to the next or subsequent variable display games at the start of the movement.

In addition, by making the time interval D instantaneous, the gaming machine 10 can prevent the player's attention from being drawn to the icon display corresponding to the next or subsequent variable display games at the start of the variable display.
Next, the timing chart of FIG. 90 will be described. The time interval D1 is the interval between the start of movement of the icon display from the second standby position 505b to the first standby position 505a and the end of the movement (the time interval required for the icon display to move from the second standby position 505b to the first standby position 505a). The time interval E1 is the interval between the timing of the start of the change of the pattern performed with the start of the change display game and the timing of the end of the movement of the icon display from the second standby position 505b to the first standby position 505a. The time interval D2 is the interval between the start of movement of the icon display from the third standby position 505c to the second standby position 505b and the end of the movement (the time interval required for the icon display to move from the third standby position 505c to the second standby position 505b). The time interval E2 is the interval between the timing of the start of the change of the pattern performed with the start of the change display game and the timing of the end of the movement of the icon display from the third standby position 505c to the second standby position 505b. The time interval D3 is from the fourth waiting position 5
The time interval E3 is the interval between the timing when the symbol variation that occurs with the start of the variable display game starts and the timing when the icon display ends moving from the fourth standby position 505d to the third standby position 505c (the time interval required for the icon display to move from the fourth standby position 505d to the third standby position 505c). The time interval E4 is the interval between the timing when the symbol variation that occurs with the start of the variable display game starts and the timing when the icon display ends moving from the fourth standby position 505d to the third standby position 505c.

In addition, in FIG. 90, it is assumed that the Nth variable display game starts from t1, and the N+1th variable display game starts from t10.
The gaming machine 10 starts the pattern variation with the start of the Nth variable display game at timing t1, and starts the movement of the icon display from the fourth standby position 505d to the third standby position 505c, starts the movement of the icon display from the third standby position 505c to the second standby position 505b at timing t2, and starts the movement of the icon display from the second standby position 505b to the first standby position 505c at timing t3 (a timing after timing t2 and a timing at which the relationship of time interval C>time interval D3 is established).
The movement of the icon display to the standby position 505a is started, and the movement of the icon display from the fourth standby position 505d to the third standby position 505c is ended at timing t4 (timing t
3, and time interval C>time interval D2 and time interval D3=time interval D
At timing t5 (a timing after timing t4 when the relationships: time interval C > time interval D1 and time interval D2 = time interval D1 are established), movement of the icon display from the first waiting position 505a to the pending completion display 506 is started and movement of the icon display from the third waiting position 505c to the second waiting position 505b is completed, at timing t6 (a timing after timing t7 when the relationships: time interval C > time interval D1 and time interval D2 = time interval D1 are established), movement of the icon display from the second waiting position 505b to the first waiting position 505a is completed, and at timing t7 (a timing after timing t8 when the relationships: time interval C > time interval D1 and time interval D2 = time interval D1 are established), movement of the icon display from the first waiting position 505a to the pending completion display 506 is completed.

Thereafter, the gaming machine 10 stops the pattern variation at timing t7 with the end of the Nth variable display game, and at timing t8 makes the icon display corresponding to the Nth variable display game that was displayed in the reserved consumption display 506 invisible.

After that, the gaming machine 10 receives a command for the presentation of the N+1th variable display game at timing t9. Then, the gaming machine 10 first performs a process of selecting a movement mode of the icon display from the first waiting position 505a to the reserved consumption display 506, which is performed with the start of the N+1th variable display game, and then performs a process of setting a movement mode of the icon display between each waiting position.

After that, the gaming machine 10 starts the pattern variation with the start of the Nth variable display game at timing t10, and starts the movement of the icon display from the fourth standby position 505d to the third standby position 505c, and starts the movement of the icon display from the third standby position 505c to the second standby position 505 at timing t11.
At timing t12, the icon display starts to move from the second standby position 505b to the first standby position 505c.
At timing t13, the icon display starts moving from the first standby position 505a to the pending consumption display 506, and at timing t14, the icon display starts moving from the third standby position 505c to the second standby position 505b. At timing t15, the icon display starts moving from the first standby position 505a to the pending consumption display 506, and at timing t16, the icon display starts moving from the third standby position 505c to the second standby position 505b.
At timing t14, the movement of the icon display from the second waiting position 505b to the first waiting position 505a is completed, and at timing t15, the movement of the icon display from the first waiting position 505a to the pending completion display 506 is completed.

The above is an example of the timing of movement of the icon display in accordance with the progress of the variable display game in the gaming machine 10. In this manner, the gaming machine 10 may vary the timing of movement of the icon display between each waiting position.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 stops the symbol variation when the variable display game ends,
Since a predetermined time lag (time interval A) is provided between the display of the icon in the pending consumption display 506 and the non-display of the icon, the player can feel a sense of anticipation that the variable display game will change again.

In addition, since the gaming machine 10 starts moving the icon display between each waiting position before starting to move the icon display to the reserved consumption display 506,
Since the player's attention can be directed to the hold display 505 before the icon display starts to move to the hold display 506, the player can be made to recognize with certainty that the icon display has started to move from the hold display 505 to the hold consumption display 506.

In addition, since the gaming machine 10 sequentially performs the movement of the icon display starting from the movement of the icon display to the third waiting position 505c, which is the furthest from the pending consumption display 506, the player's gaze (attention) can be naturally guided in the direction of the pending consumption display 506.

In addition, since the gaming machine 10 starts moving the icon display between each waiting position before starting to move the icon display to the pending consumption display 506, the player's attention can also be attracted to the movement of the icon display between waiting positions with short movement times (time interval D1 = time interval D2 = time interval D3 < time interval C).

In addition, the gaming machine 10 moves the icon display to the reserved consumption display 506 at time intervals D1 to D
Since a time interval C longer than 3 is required, the movement of the icon display to the pending consumption display 506 can be made more flexible than the movement of the icon display between each waiting position.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can increase the interest in the presentation of the icon display moving to the pending consumption display 506 more than the interest in the presentation of the icon display moving between each waiting position, and can attract more of the player's attention to the icon display corresponding to the changing display game when the change starts.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 may provide more freedom in the movement presentation by setting the time interval C longer than the time interval A. By providing more freedom in the movement presentation, the gaming machine 10 can increase the interest of the movement presentation of the icon display to the reserved consumption display 506, and can further attract the player's attention to the icon display corresponding to the variable display game at the start of the variation.

The gaming machine 10 may provide greater freedom in the movement presentation by setting the time intervals D1 to D3 longer than the time interval A. By providing greater freedom in the movement presentation, the gaming machine 10 can increase the interest of the movement presentation of the icon display between waiting positions, and can better attract the player's attention to the icon display corresponding to the next or subsequent variable display games at the start of the movement.

Next, a description will be given of the timing chart of Fig. 91. In Fig. 91, the Nth variable display game is started from t1, and the N+1th variable display game is started from t9.

At the timing t1, the gaming machine 10 starts changing the symbols in response to the start of the N-th changing display game, and moves the icon display from the first waiting position 505a to the reserved consumption display 506.
At timing t2, the movement of the icon display from the fourth standby position 505d to the third standby position 505c is completed, and at timing t3, the movement of the icon display from the fourth standby position 505d to the third standby position 505c is completed.
At timing t1, the movement of the icon display from the third waiting position 505c to the second waiting position 505b is completed, at timing t2, the movement of the icon display from the second waiting position 505b to the first waiting position 505a is completed, and at timing t3, the movement of the icon display from the first waiting position 505a to the hold consumption display 506 is completed.

Thereafter, the gaming machine 10 stops the pattern variation at timing t6 upon completion of the Nth variable display game, and at timing t7 makes the icon display corresponding to the Nth variable display game that was displayed in the reserved consumption display 506 invisible.

After that, the gaming machine 10 receives a command for the presentation of the N+1th variable display game at timing t8. Then, the gaming machine 10 first performs a process of selecting a movement mode of the icon display from the first waiting position 505a to the reserved consumption display 506, which is performed with the start of the N+1th variable display game, and then performs a process of setting a movement mode of the icon display between each waiting position.

Thereafter, at timing t9, the gaming machine 10 starts the pattern variation in association with the start of the Nth variation display game, and starts the movement of the icon display from the first waiting position 505a to the reserved consumption display 506, as well as the movement of the icon display between each waiting position, ends the movement of the icon display from the fourth waiting position 505d to the third waiting position 505c at timing t10, ends the movement of the icon display from the third waiting position 505c to the second waiting position 505b at timing t11, ends the movement of the icon display from the second waiting position 505b to the first waiting position 505a at timing t12, ends the movement of the icon display from the first waiting position 505a to the reserved consumption display 506 at timing t13,
The movement of the icon display to 06 is completed.

The above is an example of the timing of movement of the icon display with the progress of the variable display game in the gaming machine 10. In this manner, the gaming machine 10 may vary the time intervals D1 to D3 required for the icon display to move between each waiting position.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 stops the symbol variation when the variable display game ends,
Since a predetermined time lag (time interval A) is provided between the display of the icon in the pending consumption display 506 and the non-display of the icon, the player can feel a sense of anticipation that the variable display game will change again.

In addition, since the gaming machine 10 simultaneously starts moving the icon display to the pending consumption display 506 and between each waiting position, the player can quickly understand that the movement of the icon display has started.

In addition, since the gaming machine 10 sequentially completes the icon display movement performance starting from the movement performance of the icon display to the third waiting position 505c, which is the farthest from the pending consumption display 506, the player's gaze (attention) can be naturally guided in the direction of the pending consumption display 506.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 moves the icon display to the reserved consumption display 506 at time intervals D1 to D
Since a time interval C longer than 3 is required, the movement of the icon display to the pending consumption display 506 can be made more flexible than the movement of the icon display between each waiting position.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can increase the interest in the presentation of the icon display moving to the pending consumption display 506 more than the interest in the presentation of the icon display moving between each waiting position, and can attract more of the player's attention to the icon display corresponding to the changing display game when the change starts.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 may provide more freedom in the movement presentation by setting the time interval C longer than the time interval A. By providing more freedom in the movement presentation, the gaming machine 10 can increase the interest of the movement presentation of the icon display to the reserved consumption display 506, and can further attract the player's attention to the icon display corresponding to the variable display game at the start of the variation.

The gaming machine 10 may provide greater freedom in the movement presentation by setting the time intervals D1 to D3 longer than the time interval A. By providing greater freedom in the movement presentation, the gaming machine 10 can increase the interest of the movement presentation of the icon display between waiting positions, and can better attract the player's attention to the icon display corresponding to the next or subsequent variable display games at the start of the movement.

In the above example of the icon display movement, after the pattern change starts, the reserved consumption display 506
The present invention is not limited to the above example, but may be modified so as to start the movement of the icon display to the reserved consumption display 506 before the start of the pattern change, or to start the movement of the icon display between the waiting positions before the pattern change.

In this case, the gaming machine 10 may end the start of movement of the icon display to the reserved consumption display 506 before the start of the pattern change, or may cause the movement of the icon display to the reserved consumption display 506 to straddle both before and after the start of the pattern change. Also, the gaming machine 10 may end the movement of the icon display between each waiting position before the start of the pattern change, or may cause the movement of the icon display between each waiting position to straddle both before and after the start of the pattern change.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 can change the reserved state (pre-read reserved state notice) when each icon display wins (when the icon display occurs), or can change the reserved state when the icon display moves (from when the icon display moves to the reserved state consumption display 506 until the icon display becomes hidden). For example, the gaming machine 10 can
By changing the reserved bid when a prize is won, the player can quickly understand where the changed reserved bid is located.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 makes the rate at which each icon display is changed to reserved when winning a prize greater than the rate at which it is changed to reserved when moving (from being moved to the reserved consumption display 506 until it is hidden). This allows the gaming machine 10 to give a sense of rarity to the icon display that is changed to reserved when moving (from being moved to the reserved consumption display 506 until it is hidden), and can attract the player's attention when the change is made.

The gaming machine 10 of the sixth embodiment described above has the following feature in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 has a game in which symbols are variably displayed (variable display game), and a start memory (icon display) indicating the right to play the game is placed in a standby position (standby position 50) according to the order in which the game is played.
and a display means (display device 41, 830) for displaying a hold display (hold display 505) displayed on display screen 41a to 41d) and a hold consumption display (hold consumption display 506) displaying a start memory (icon display) corresponding to the game being executed; and a control unit (game control device 100, 100a, presentation control device 300) for controlling so that the first time interval is longer than the second time interval and the third time interval, where a time interval from the start of movement of the display position of the first start memory corresponding to the first game from the hold display to the hold consumption display performed in conjunction with the start of the first game to the end of the movement is a first time interval (time interval C), a time interval from the start of movement of the display position of a start memory other than the first start memory between waiting positions performed in conjunction with the start of the first game to the end of the movement is a second time interval (time interval D), and a time interval between the timing at which the patterns are stopped in conjunction with the end of the first game and the timing at which the first start memory is made non-display in conjunction with the end of the first game is a third time interval (time interval A) (Figures 83 to 85).

(2) The gaming machine 10 includes a display means (display device 41, 830) for displaying a game (variable display game) that variably displays a pattern, a hold display (hold display 505) that displays a start memory (icon display 802-804) indicating the right to play the game at a hold position (hold positions 505a-505d) according to the order in which the game is played, and a hold consumption display (hold consumption display 506) that displays the start memory (icon display 801) corresponding to the game being played, and a first time interval (time interval C) is defined as the time interval required for the display position of the first start memory corresponding to the first game to move from the hold display to the hold consumption display upon the start of the first game, and the timing at which the pattern starts to variably display upon the start of the first game and the time at which the movement of the first start memory to the hold consumption display upon the start of the first game ends. a control unit (game control device 100, 100a, presentation control device 300) that controls the first time interval to be smaller than the second time interval and larger than the third time interval and to be the same length as the fourth time interval, where the time interval between the start of the first game and the timing at which the pattern starts to change and the timing at which the movement of the start memory corresponding to a game after the first game between waiting positions is defined as a second time interval (time interval B), the time interval required for the movement of the display position of the start memory corresponding to a game after the first game between waiting positions which is performed in conjunction with the start of the first game is defined as a third time interval (time interval D), and the time interval between the timing at which the pattern starts to change and the timing at which the movement of the start memory corresponding to a game after the first game between waiting positions which is performed in conjunction with the start of the first game is ended as a fourth time interval (time interval E) (Figure 86).

(3) The gaming machine 10 includes a display means (display device 41, 830) for displaying a game (variable display game) that variably displays symbols, a hold display (hold display 505) that displays a start memory (icon display 802-804) indicating the right to play the game at a hold position (hold positions 505a-505d) according to the order in which the game is played, and a hold consumption display (hold consumption display 506) that displays the start memory (icon display 801) corresponding to the game being played, and a first time interval that is a time interval required for the display position of the first start memory corresponding to the first game to move from the hold display to the hold consumption display when the first game is started. a first time interval (time interval C), a second time interval (time interval B) between the timing when the patterns start to change with the start of the first game and the timing when the movement of the first start memory to the reserved consumption display with the start of the first game is completed, a third time interval (time interval D) is the time interval required for the display position of the start memory corresponding to the game after the first game to move between standby positions with the start of the first game, and a fourth time interval (time interval A) is the time interval between the timing when the patterns stop with the end of the first game and the timing when the first start memory is made non-display with the end of the first game.
a control unit (game control device 100, 100a, presentation control device 300) that controls the second time interval to be longer than the fourth time interval (time interval B>time interval A), the first time interval to be longer than the third time interval (time interval C>time interval D), and the start time (t1) of the third time interval to be earlier than the start time (t2) of the first time interval;
(Figure 89).

(4) The gaming machine 10 includes display means (display device 41, 830) for displaying a game (variable display game) that displays a variable pattern, a hold display (hold display 505) that displays a start memory (icon display 802-804) indicating the right to play the game at a hold position (hold positions 505a-505d) according to the order in which the game is played, and a hold consumption display (hold consumption display 506) that displays the start memory (icon display 801) corresponding to the game being played, and a period for moving the display of the start memory corresponding to the first game from the display position of the hold display to the display position of the hold consumption display. A control unit (game control device 100, 100a, presentation control device 300) that controls so that the first period is different from the second period and the third period, where a first period (time interval C) is a period during which the display of the start memory corresponding to a game subsequent to the first game is moved within the standby position, a second period (time interval D) is a period from a first timing (timing t5) at which the symbols are stopped with the end of the first game to a second timing (timing t6) at which the start memory corresponding to the first game is made non-display, is provided (see FIG. 83).
).

(5) The gaming machine 10 includes a display means (display device 41, 830) for displaying a game (variable display game) that variably displays symbols, a hold display (hold display 505) that displays a start memory (icon display 802-804) indicating the right to play the game at a hold position (hold positions 505a-505d) according to the order of playing the game, and a hold consumption display (hold consumption display 506) that displays a start memory (icon display 801) corresponding to the game being played, and a first period (time interval C) during which the display of the start memory corresponding to the first game is moved from the display position of the hold display to the display position of the hold consumption display, a second period (time interval D) during which the display of the start memory corresponding to a game subsequent to the first game is moved within the hold position, and a first timing (timing t
When the period from the first timing (timing t5) to the second timing (timing t6) at which the symbols are stopped is defined as a third period (time interval A), the control unit (game control device 100, 100a, performance control device 300) controls so that the first period is different from the second period and the third period (FIG. 85
).

[Seventh embodiment]
In the description of the gaming machines of the first to sixth embodiments, a gaming board 30 (see FIG. 2)
28 or a game board 800 (see FIG. 28), the gaming machine of the seventh embodiment can be applied to either. Note that the same reference numerals may be used to designate the same components as those of the first to sixth embodiments, and the description thereof may be omitted.

The gaming machine 10 of the seventh embodiment can enhance the interest in the reserved display by making it possible to execute the reserved display performance in a superimposed manner. On the other hand, since the gaming machine 10 executes the reserved display performance in a superimposed manner, there is a risk that the visibility of the reserved display may decrease at some timings, so the gaming machine 10 is capable of executing reserved display control that suppresses the decrease in visibility.

First, the reserved display in the gaming machine 10 of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 92. Fig. 92 is a diagram showing an example of the reserved display in the seventh embodiment. The reserved display in the gaming machine 10 is displayed on a display screen similar to the display screen 650 shown in Fig. 68. However,
The reserved icons, including the reserved consumption icon and the reserved waiting icon, are different from those shown on the display screen 650. Note that, although the gaming machine 10 is described as being capable of executing a variable display game, it is also applicable to other games (for example, two-type games) and the like as long as it is possible to reserve an opportunity to execute the game.

FIG. 92(1) shows a pending waiting display 505 and a pending consumption display 506. The pending waiting display 505 displays pending waiting icons 902, 903, and 904 in numbers corresponding to the special pattern 1 pending number display 503 or the special pattern 2 pending number display 504. The pending consumption display 506 displays a pending consumption icon 901. The pending waiting display 505 has four display positions according to the game execution order, and from left to right, the display position for execution order "1", the display position for execution order "2", the display position for execution order "3", and the display position for execution order "4" are arranged. The pending consumption display 506 also has four display positions according to the game execution order, and the display positions for execution order "1", "2", "3", and "4" are arranged.
has one display position and is capable of displaying a pending redemption icon while the game is being played.

The on-hold waiting icons 902, 903, and 904 are displayed in a generally V-shape. The on-hold clearing icon 901 is also displayed in a generally V-shape like the on-hold waiting icons 902, 903, and 904, but is larger than the on-hold waiting icons 902, 903, and 904, making it distinguishable from the on-hold waiting icons 902, 903, and 904.

The gaming machine 10 can execute a hold static effect, a hold dynamic effect, a hold standby shift effect, and a hold standby outside shift effect as hold display effects for the hold consumption icon 901 and the hold standby icons 902, 903, and 904. The gaming machine 10 can execute two or more of the hold static effect, the hold dynamic effect, the hold standby inside shift effect, and the hold standby outside shift effect in a superimposed manner.

FIG. 92(2) shows the pending transaction clearing icon 901 and pending transaction waiting icon 902 shown in FIG.
The pending static presentations are shown for the pending consumption icon 901 and the pending standby icons 902, 903, and 904. The pending consumption icon 901 and the pending standby icons 902, 903, and 904 each have a presentation in which a band-shaped high-luminance portion periodically changes in luminance from the lower right to the upper left.

The reserved static performance is performed by the reserved consumption icon 901 and the reserved waiting icons 902, 903,
The hold effect periodically changes the display mode within the outline of 904, for example, the brightness or color is periodically changed. Since the hold static effect periodically changes the display mode, the degree of visibility may also be periodically changed to some extent.

The reserved static presentation is not limited to the reserved consumption icon or the reserved waiting icon. It can also be applied to a display unit that displays the reserved consumption icon or the reserved waiting icon. For example, the reserved static presentation can be applied to two LEDs in the special game variation display status display device 9. In this case, the blinking of the two LEDs in the special game variation display status display device 9 can be the reserved static presentation that replaces the reserved consumption icon.

FIG. 92(3) shows the pending transaction clearing icon 901 and pending transaction waiting icon 902 shown in FIG.
The pending dynamic presentations of the pending consumption icon 901 and the pending standby icons 902, 903, and 904 are each a presentation that periodically performs a half rotation in one direction and a pause.

In addition, the pending dynamic performance is performed by the pending consumption icon 901 and the pending waiting icons 902, 903,
This is a hold effect that periodically changes the display mode that does not remain within the outline of 904. For example,
This is a presentation that periodically rotates, moves, changes in appearance, or a combination of these. The pending dynamic presentation also periodically changes the display mode, so the degree of visibility may also be periodically changed to some extent.

Figures 92 (4) and 92 (5) show the shift presentation within hold standby and the shift presentation outside hold standby for the hold consumption icon 901 and hold standby icons 902, 903, and 904 shown in Figure 92 (1).

When the variable display corresponding to the hold digestion icon 901 shown in Fig. 92 (1) ends, the hold digestion icon 901 is erased. Instead, a variable display based on the start memory corresponding to the hold standby icon 902 is started. As a result, the hold standby icon 902 in the hold standby display 505 becomes the new hold digestion icon 901, and moves (shifts) from the display position of the hold standby display 505 to the display position of the hold digestion display 506. Such a display in which the hold digestion icon (hold standby icon) moves from the display position of the hold standby display 505 to the display position of the hold digestion display 506 is the shift-out-of-hold-standby display.

In addition, one of the display positions of the pending standby display 505 (execution order "1
Since the display position of the pending icon " is vacant, the icon is moved (left shifted) to fill the vacant display position. This effect of moving the display position of the pending icon within the pending display 505 is called a shift effect within pending display.

It should be noted that the shift out of hold standby performance and the shift in hold standby performance are hold performances that move and are displayed accompanied by a specified action (for example, a jumping motion); however, during the shift out of hold standby performance or the shift in hold standby performance, a static hold performance or a dynamic hold performance may be superimposed, or a hold performance may be accompanied by an alternative to the static hold performance or the dynamic hold performance.

Next, the execution timing of the reserved static performance, the reserved dynamic performance, the reserved standby shift performance, and the reserved standby outside shift performance will be described with reference to Fig. 93. Fig. 93 is a diagram showing an example of the execution timing of the reserved display performance of the seventh embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 can variably display the main symbol by the gaming control device 100.
The special pattern 1 display unit 53 and the special pattern 2 display unit 54 are displayed on the collective display device 50 (FIG. 5
In addition, in the gaming machine 10, the performance control device 300 can variably display the decorative symbols and the fourth symbol based on a command from the game control device 100. The decorative symbols include a large symbol group 501 and a small symbol group 502 displayed on the display device 41 (see FIG. 68). The fourth symbol is displayed by the left LED of the special symbol game variation display status display device 98, which displays the variation display status of the special symbol 1 variation display game.
A special game change display state display device 9 that displays the change display state of the special game 2 change display game
There are 8 right side LEDs (see FIG. 28).

For example, the gaming machine 10 stops the variable display game at timing t1, and after displaying the result state for a period s1, starts the next variable display game at timing t2, which is indicated by the stop and start of the variation of the main special symbol. Note that the gaming machine 10 accurately stops the variation of the main special symbol at timing t1 and starts the variation of the main special symbol at timing t2 by the gaming control device 100, but there may be a slight time lag for the decorative symbols due to the intervention of the performance control device 300. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 controls the decorative symbols to stop varying at timing t1 and start varying at timing t2, but the period during which the variable display game is stopped is
The period s2 may be different from the period s1.

The pending completion icon indicates the display mode of the pending completion icon (pending completion icon 901). The pending completion icon 901 is displayed in a fixed position (display position of the pending completion display 506) at timing t1, and then is erased and displayed for a period s2. The pending completion icon 901 is switched from the pending standby icon 902 at the display position of execution order "1" in the pending standby display 505 at timing t2, and is moved and displayed during a period m1 from timing t2 to timing t5, before being displayed in the fixed position.

Pending (1) indicates the display mode of the pending waiting icon (pending waiting icon 902) corresponding to the display position of execution order "1" in the pending waiting display 505. The pending waiting icon 902 becomes the pending digestion icon 901 at timing t2, and is erased and displayed for a period d1 from timing t1 to timing t3 when the moving display of the pending waiting icons 903 and 904 begins. Note that since it is impossible to distinguish between the pending digestion icon 901 being moved and the erased pending waiting icon 902, the pending waiting icon 902 is hidden in terms of control, but it does not appear that the pending waiting icon 902 has disappeared from the outside.

The pending waiting icon 902 is the execution order “2” in the pending waiting display 505 at timing t3.
and is switched from the hold waiting icon 903 at the display position of the hold waiting icon 903, and is displayed in a moving manner during a period m2 from timing t3 to timing t4, before being displayed in the fixed position.

Pending (2) indicates a display mode of the pending waiting icon (pending waiting icon 903) corresponding to the display position of execution order "2" in the pending waiting display 505. The pending waiting icon 903 is switched from the pending waiting icon 904 at the display position of execution order "3" in the pending waiting display 505 at timing t3, and is displayed in a fixed position after being moved during a period m2 from timing t3 to timing t4.

Pending (3) indicates a display mode of a pending waiting icon (pending waiting icon 904) corresponding to the display position of execution order "3" in the pending waiting display 505. The pending waiting icon 904 is erased by being switched to the pending waiting icon 903 at the display position of execution order "2" in the pending waiting display 505 at timing t3.

The hold static presentation is a hold presentation that is repeated over a period r1 consisting of a change period r2 during which the display mode of the hold digestion icon or the hold standby icon is changed, and a stop period r3 during which the hold digestion icon or the hold standby icon is displayed in a normal display mode. The normal display mode is a display mode with good visibility, for example, the display mode of the hold digestion icon or the hold standby icon shown in FIG. 92(1).

The hold dynamic presentation is a hold presentation that is repeated in cycles of a period a1 consisting of a change period a2 during which the display mode of the hold consumption icon or the hold waiting icon is changed, and a stop period a3 during which the hold consumption icon or the hold waiting icon is displayed in the normal display mode.

Next, the interrelationship between the execution timing of the reserved static performance and the reserved dynamic performance will be described with reference to Fig. 94. Fig. 94 is a diagram showing an example of the interrelationship between the execution timing of the reserved static performance and the reserved dynamic performance of the seventh embodiment.

The period r1, which is one cycle of the reserved static presentation shown in FIG. 94(1), and the period a1, which is one cycle of the reserved dynamic presentation, have a relationship of a1=n×r1 (where n is a natural number). That is, the gaming machine 10 executes the reserved static presentation n times while executing the reserved dynamic presentation only once. This allows the gaming machine 10 to synchronize the execution timing of the reserved static presentation and the reserved dynamic presentation. Note that if the execution timing of the reserved static presentation and the reserved dynamic presentation are synchronized with the relationship of a1=n×r1, there is a risk that the reserved static presentation will change the display mode of the reserved consumption icon or the reserved standby icon during the stop period a3 of the reserved dynamic presentation.

Therefore, the gaming machine 10 may synchronize the execution timing of the reserved static presentation and the reserved dynamic presentation as shown in FIG. 94(2). The period r1, which is one cycle of the reserved static presentation shown in FIG. 94(2), and the period a1, which is one cycle of the reserved dynamic presentation, are expressed as a1=n×r1+w(
where n is a natural number). In the formula, w is a wait period during which the reserved static presentation is not executed, and is a period greater than the stop period a3. In other words, the gaming machine 10 does not execute the reserved static presentation for the wait period w after executing the reserved static presentation n times, while executing the reserved dynamic presentation only once. This allows the gaming machine 10 to synchronize the execution timing of the reserved static presentation and the reserved dynamic presentation, and further prevents the reserved static presentation from changing the display mode of the reserved consumption icon or the reserved standby icon during the stop period a3 of the reserved dynamic presentation.

Next, the synchronization control for resetting the execution timing of the reserved static performance and the reserved dynamic performance in accordance with the reserved standby shift performance and the reserved standby outside shift performance will be described with reference to Fig. 95. Fig. 95 is a diagram showing an example of the synchronization control of the execution timing of the reserved static performance and the reserved dynamic performance of the seventh embodiment.

In response to the stop of the variation of the symbol, the gaming machine 10 displays a static presentation of the reserved number (a static presentation of the reserved number),
Dynamic presentation of digestion hold (dynamic presentation of digestion hold), static presentation of waiting hold (static presentation of waiting hold),
and pauses the dynamic presentation of the reserved waiting (standby reserved dynamic presentation). Even if the game machine 10 starts changing the main symbol at timing t2, it continues pausing the consumed reserved static presentation, the consumed reserved dynamic presentation, the standby reserved static presentation, and the standby reserved dynamic presentation, and waits for timing t5 when the moving display of the consumed reserved is switched to the fixed position display to start. This allows the game machine 10 to perform the hold presentation display in synchronization with the consumed reserved and standby reserved being displayed in the fixed position.

Next, a modified example of the synchronization control for resetting the execution timing of the reserved static performance and the reserved dynamic performance will be described with reference to Fig. 96. Fig. 96 is a diagram showing a modified example (part 1) of the synchronization control of the execution timing of the reserved static performance and the reserved dynamic performance of the seventh embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 suspends the consumption reserved static presentation, the consumption reserved dynamic presentation, the standby reserved static presentation, and the standby reserved dynamic presentation when the main symbol stops changing. Even if the gaming machine 10 starts changing the main symbol at timing t2, the consumption reserved static presentation, the consumption reserved dynamic presentation, the standby reserved static presentation, and the standby reserved dynamic presentation are continued to be suspended. The gaming machine 10 waits for timing t4 when the standby reserved moving display switches to a fixed position display, and then starts the standby reserved static presentation and the standby reserved dynamic presentation.
The static presentation of the consumed reserved ball and the dynamic presentation of the consumed reserved ball are started at the timing t5 when the moving display of the consumed reserved ball is switched to the fixed position display. This allows the gaming machine 10 to promptly and synchronously display the reserved ball presentation for each consumed reserved ball and standby reserved ball that are being displayed at the fixed position.

Further, a modified example of the synchronization control for resetting the execution timing of the reserved static performance and the reserved dynamic performance will be described with reference to Fig. 97. Fig. 97 is a diagram showing a modified example (part 2) of the synchronization control of the execution timing of the reserved static performance and the reserved dynamic performance of the seventh embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 starts the display of the waiting reserved movement with a delay of a period d1 from the start of the display of the consumed reserved movement, and ends the display of the waiting reserved movement with a period d2 earlier than the end of the display of the consumed reserved movement (see FIG. 93).
and period d2, the end of the display of the waiting reserved movement is aligned with the end of the display of the waiting reserved movement. After that, the gaming machine 10 suspends the display of the waiting reserved static effect, the display of the waiting reserved dynamic effect, the display of the waiting reserved static effect, and the display of the waiting reserved dynamic effect as the main symbol stops changing. Even if the main symbol starts changing at timing t2, the gaming machine 10 continues to suspend the display of the waiting reserved static effect, the display of the waiting reserved dynamic effect, the display of the waiting reserved static effect, and the display of the waiting reserved dynamic effect.
The display starts at the timing t5 when the moving display of the consumed reserved ball is switched to the fixed position display. This allows the gaming machine 10 to perform the reserved ball effect display in synchronization with the consumed reserved ball and the waiting reserved ball that are being displayed in the fixed position after the fixed position display of each ball is started.

In addition, although the gaming machine 10 is provided with an opportunity to reset the execution timing of the reserved static effects and the reserved dynamic effects, the gaming machine 10 may not reset the execution timing. In that case, the gaming machine 10 may mask the reserved static effects and the reserved dynamic effects when the reserved static effects and the reserved dynamic effects are not displayed, and may unmask the reserved static effects and the reserved dynamic effects when the reserved static effects and the reserved dynamic effects are displayed again.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 may provide an opportunity to reset the execution timing of the reserved static presentation and the reserved dynamic presentation only when a specific condition is met (for example, the occurrence or end of a super reach, the occurrence or end of a specific variable pattern, the timing of hiding or redisplaying the reserved consumption display 506 or the reserved standby display 505, etc.), rather than providing an opportunity for resetting the execution timing of the reserved static presentation and the reserved dynamic presentation for each variable display. By resetting the execution timing of the reserved static presentation and the reserved dynamic presentation in this way, the gaming machine 10 reduces the opportunity for poor visibility at the timing when the player is interested in the reserved display.

Next, a change in visibility of the reserved static presentation and the reserved dynamic presentation will be described with reference to Fig. 98. Fig. 98 is a diagram showing an example of a change in visibility of the reserved static presentation and the reserved dynamic presentation in the seventh embodiment.

FIG. 98(1) shows an example of a display example of a hold-down icon 901 as an example of a hold-down icon and a hold-waiting icon that perform a hold-down dynamic presentation. The hold-down dynamic presentation of the hold-down icon 901 is performed in the following order: the display mode 901a, which is the normal display mode, is the initial state, and the display mode 901a is followed by the display mode 901b, the display mode 901c, the display mode 901d, and the display mode 901e.
1e, a hold display effect that goes through display mode 901f to display mode 901a.

The pending dynamic presentation by the pending digestion icon 901, which involves such a half-rotation operation, obtains the best visibility (good visibility) in the display mode 901a, but gradually loses visibility to reach the display mode 901d, which has the worst visibility (poor visibility), and gradually recovers visibility to reach the display mode 901a, which has the best visibility. In this way, the pending dynamic presentation periodically changes the display mode that does not remain within the outline of the pending digestion icon or the pending waiting icon, and therefore the degree of visibility is periodically changed. By avoiding overlapping of such a display mode with poor visibility with the display mode (positive display mode) that is the starting point or ending point of other pending display presentations, the overall decrease in visibility can be suppressed.

In addition, the pending digestion icon 901 is not limited to being thin plate-shaped, and may be a thick plate of a predetermined thickness, or may have a required three-dimensional shape, such as a character, as long as it has a different appearance depending on the observation direction.

If the pending digestion icon 901 is thin plate-shaped, there is a risk that the visibility of the pending digestion icon 901 may be reduced to the extent that the pending digestion icon 901 cannot be seen temporarily (for example, display mode 901d), but on the other hand, there is an effect of increasing the visibility of the background side. Also, if the pending digestion icon 901 is thick plate-shaped, it is possible to prevent the visibility from being reduced to the extent that the pending digestion icon 901 cannot be seen even temporarily. Also, if the pending digestion icon 901 is thin plate-shaped, for example, display mode 901d
However, if the pending consumption icon 901 is slab-shaped, the player can perceive the periodic movement as being discontinuous before and after the pending consumption icon 901, and the player can perceive the periodic movement as being more natural and not unnatural.

In addition, the pending digestion icon 901 is not limited to one that changes visibility by fixing the shape and changing the orientation, but may be one that changes shape while fixing the orientation, or one that changes both the orientation and the shape.

98(2) shows an example of a hold consumption icon and a hold waiting icon that perform a hold static presentation, and shows an example of a hold static presentation by a hold consumption icon 901. The hold static presentation of the hold consumption icon 901 is a hold display presentation in which the display mode 901a, which is the normal display mode, is the initial state, and the display mode 901a is followed by the display mode 901g, the display mode 901h, and the display mode 901i to the display mode 901a.

The hold static presentation by the hold digestion icon 901, which is accompanied by such a change in brightness, has the best visibility (good visibility) in the display mode 901a, but gradually loses visibility to reach the display mode 901h, which has the worst visibility (poor visibility), and gradually recovers visibility to reach the display mode 901a, which has the best visibility. In this way, the hold static presentation periodically changes the display mode of the hold digestion icon or the hold waiting icon that remains within its outline, so that the degree of visibility is periodically changed. By avoiding overlapping such a display mode with poor visibility with the display mode (positive display mode) that is the starting point or ending point of other hold display presentations, the overall decrease in visibility can be suppressed.

The pending digestion icon 901 may be made transparent instead of changing the brightness. In that case, there is a risk of temporarily reducing visibility to the extent that the pending digestion icon 901 cannot be confirmed, but on the other hand, it has the effect of increasing the visibility of the background side. Note that when making the pending digestion icon 901 transparent, it is not necessary to make the entire icon transparent, but rather to limit the transparent range to a part (for example, making the outline a non-transparent part, or making the core part a non-transparent part composed of a core and an edge, etc.), thereby obtaining a certain degree of visibility for both the pending display and the background display.

In addition, the visibility of the reserved digestion icon 901 may change not only due to a change in the display mode of the reserved digestion icon 901 (internal change), but also due to a change (external change) in the effect display (for example, a periodic change in the background display, a periodic change in the reserved pedestal, etc.) near the reserved digestion icon 901. In a broad sense, such periodic changes due to external factors are also included in the reserved static presentation of the reserved digestion icon 901.

As an example of a display corresponding to a reserved consumption icon that performs a reserved static presentation, the special game variable display status display device 98 shows an example of a display of a reserved static presentation by a so-called fourth pattern display device. The reserved static presentation of the special game variable display status display device 98 is a reserved display presentation (a consumption reserved presentation) shown by a blinking state of an LED indicating that the special game is in a variable display state. That is, the gaming machine 10 has a display mode 98a in which the LED is turned off and a display mode 98b in which the LED is turned on.
8b are alternately switched to the blinking state. In this case, if the blinking cycle is within an appropriate range relative to the time the player gazes, the player can easily recognize the blinking state. On the other hand, if the blinking cycle is too fast (for example, 16 ms cycle) to be indistinguishable from the lit state, the player cannot recognize the blinking state. In addition, if the blinking cycle is too fast (for example, 16 ms cycle) to be indistinguishable from the lit state, the player cannot recognize the blinking state.
If the blinking cycle is too slow (for example, 2000 ms) compared to the blinking cycle of the reserved game icon (500 ms), the player will not be able to recognize the blinking state, and may mistakenly believe that the light is on or off. Therefore, the reserved static presentation of the special game variable display status display device 98 achieves good visibility (good visibility) when the blinking cycle is within an appropriate range. The gaming machine 10 may provide a display corresponding to the reserved waiting icon, and perform a reserved static presentation in the same manner as the display corresponding to the reserved consumption icon.

Next, the length of each period described above will be described with a specific example using Figure 99. Figure 99 is a diagram showing an example of an execution period of the hold display performance of the seventh embodiment.
First, the length of each period in gaming state A will be described with reference to Figure 99 (1). Note that gaming state A is a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player, such as a normal gaming state.
In addition, when viewed from a different perspective, the game state A is a game state in which the special game 1 (left-handed game) is the main game when the special game 1 and the special game 2 can be played. In addition, when viewed from a different perspective, the game state A is a game state (low probability) when there is a game state (low probability) with a low probability in a game with variable probability and a game state (high probability) with a high probability. In addition, when viewed from a different perspective, the game state A is a game state (without normal power support) when there is a game state without normal power support and a game state with normal power support (with normal power support).

The gaming machine 10 has a reset period of the gaming control device 100 as a basic unit time in game control. The reset period of the gaming control device 100 (game control device reset period) is, for example, 4 ms. Based on the game control device reset period, the gaming machine 10 also sets the display mode update period (collective display device pattern update period) of the special chart 1 pattern display section 53 and the special chart 2 pattern display section 54 in the collective display device 50 to 100 ms. Also, the performance control device 300 sets the drawing update period (display device drawing period) in the display device 41 to 33.3 ms, with 3 periods being 100 ms.
0 ms. In addition, the performance control device 300 sets the blinking period (fourth symbol display device update period) in the special symbol game variable display status display device 98 to 100 ms. In this way, the gaming machine 10 aligns the collective display device symbol update period, the display device drawing period (3 periods), and the fourth symbol display device update period, making it easy to synchronize the update periods of the display modes of each part.
corresponds to 25 reset periods of the game control device.

The gaming machine 10 makes it easy to control the entire gaming machine by making various time values integer multiples of the gaming control device reset period. In particular, it makes it easy to control the performance performed by the gaming control device 100 and the performance control device 300 in cooperation with each other. Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 makes it easy to control the performance in the display device 41 by making various time values not only integer multiples of the gaming control device reset period but also integer multiples of the gaming control device reset period and the display device drawing period (equivalent to the display device drawing period (3 periods)).

The specific fluctuation pattern in the game state A has a fluctuation time of 4000 ms.
00 ms corresponds to 1000 reset cycles of the game control device. The specific variation pattern is a variation display pattern that occurs frequently in the game state A, for example, a variation display pattern that derives a "miss" without performing a special performance. The specific variation pattern in the game state A may be a variation display pattern with the shortest variation time in the game state A.

One cycle of reserved dynamic presentation in game state A (one cycle of reserved dynamic presentation) is 1000 ms. One cycle of reserved static presentation in game state A (one cycle of reserved static presentation) is 200 ms.
Execution time of the shift performance outside the reserved waiting in the game state A (consumption reserved movement display time)
is 400 ms. The execution time of the shift display in the reserved standby state in the game state A (the reserved standby movement display time) is 300 ms. Note that 1000 ms corresponds to 250 times of the reset period of the game control device, 200 ms corresponds to 50 times of the reset period of the game control device, 400 ms corresponds to 100 times of the reset period of the game control device, and 300 ms corresponds to 75 times of the reset period of the game control device.

The relationship of the length of each period in game state A is: reserved dynamic presentation 1 cycle > consumed reserved movement display time > standby reserved movement display time > reserved static presentation 1 cycle. In particular, the relationship of consumed reserved movement display time > standby reserved movement display time works to increase the sense of anticipation for the start of the game. In addition, the relationship of consumed reserved movement display time, standby reserved movement display time > reserved static presentation 1 cycle is:
Since the reserved static presentation is not a dynamic presentation, it is possible to improve the presentation effect of the reserved static presentation without interfering with the reserved standby outside shift presentation or the reserved standby inside shift presentation. Also, the relationship of 1 period of reserved dynamic presentation > consumed reserved movement display time and standby reserved movement display time can be achieved by making the execution time of the reserved standby outside shift presentation or the reserved standby inside shift presentation shorter than the reserved dynamic presentation, so that the player can notice this as a sudden change in the display mode. In other words, the gaming machine 10 is
By making the display change of the hold dynamic presentation, which has a relatively long cycle, slow and making the display change of the hold outside standby shift presentation and the hold inside standby shift presentation sudden, it is possible to increase the attention of the player to the hold outside standby shift presentation and the hold inside standby shift presentation. By increasing the attention of the player, the gaming machine 10 is expected to improve the visibility of the hold display.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 can make the visibility of the reserved display high at the start and end of the fluctuation of the specific fluctuation pattern by making the fluctuation time of the specific fluctuation pattern, or the time obtained by subtracting the moving display time from the fluctuation time of the specific fluctuation pattern, equivalent to an integer multiple of one cycle of the reserved dynamic presentation. In other words, the gaming machine 10 can make the visibility of the reserved display high when the reserved standby outside shift presentation or the reserved standby inside shift presentation is executed.

Furthermore, by making one cycle of the reserved dynamic presentation equivalent to an integer multiple of one cycle of the reserved static presentation, the gaming machine 10 can ensure high visibility of the reserved display at the start and end of the reserved dynamic presentation.

Next, the length of each period in the game state B will be explained using FIG. 99 (2). The game state B is a game state advantageous to the player, for example, a specific game state. When the game state B is viewed from a different aspect, it is a game state in which the special game 2 (a game mainly played by right-hand hit) is the main game when the special game 1 and the special game 2 can be executed. When viewed from a different aspect, the game state B is a game state (high probability) when there is a game state (low probability) with a low probability in a game with variable probability and a game state (high probability) with a high probability. When viewed from a different aspect, the game state B is a game state (with normal power support) when there is a game state without normal power support (without normal power support) and a game state with normal power support (with normal power support).

The specific fluctuation pattern in the game state B has a fluctuation time of 800 ms.
ms corresponds to 200 times of the reset period of the game control device. The specific variation pattern is a variation display pattern that occurs frequently in the game state b, for example, a variation display pattern that derives a "miss" without performing a special performance. Note that the specific variation pattern in the game state B may be the variation display pattern with the shortest variation time in the game state B.

One cycle of the reserved dynamic presentation in game state B (one cycle of reserved dynamic presentation) is 500 ms. One cycle of the reserved static presentation in game state B (one cycle of reserved static presentation) is 100 ms. The execution time of the reserved outside standby shift presentation in game state B (consumption reserved movement display time) is 400 ms. The execution time of the reserved inside standby shift presentation in game state B (standby reserved movement display time) is 300 ms. Note that 500 ms corresponds to 125 reset cycles of the game control device, and 100 ms corresponds to 25 reset cycles of the game control device.

The length relationship of each period in game state B is also as follows: one cycle of reserved dynamic presentation > consumed reserved movement display time > standby reserved movement display time > one cycle of reserved static presentation. In particular, the relationship of consumed reserved movement display time > standby reserved movement display time works to increase anticipation for the start of the game. Also, the relationship of consumed reserved movement display time, standby reserved movement display time > one cycle of reserved static presentation can improve the presentation effect of the reserved static presentation without interfering with the shift presentation outside the reserved standby or the shift presentation inside the reserved standby, since the reserved static presentation is not a dynamic presentation. Also, one cycle of reserved dynamic presentation
The relationship of cycle > consumed reserved movement display time, standby reserved movement display time is such that the execution time of the standby outside shift effect and the standby inside shift effect is shorter than the standby dynamic effect, so that the player can notice this as a sudden change in the display mode.
In the case of the game machine 10, the display change of the hold dynamic presentation, which has a relatively long cycle, is slow, and the display change of the hold outside standby shift presentation and the hold inside standby shift presentation is made sudden, so that the attention of the player to the hold outside standby shift presentation and the hold inside standby shift presentation can be increased. By increasing the attention of the player, the gaming machine 10 is expected to improve the visibility of the hold display.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 can make the visibility of the reserved display high at the start and end of the fluctuation of the specific fluctuation pattern by making the fluctuation time of the specific fluctuation pattern, or the time obtained by subtracting the moving display time from the fluctuation time of the specific fluctuation pattern, equivalent to an integer multiple of one cycle of the reserved dynamic presentation. In other words, the gaming machine 10 can make the visibility of the reserved display high when the reserved standby outside shift presentation or the reserved standby inside shift presentation is executed.

Furthermore, by making one cycle of the reserved dynamic presentation equivalent to an integer multiple of one cycle of the reserved static presentation, the gaming machine 10 can ensure high visibility of the reserved display at the start and end of the reserved dynamic presentation.

Furthermore, by differentiating the time values between game state A and game state B, the gaming machine 10 can provide game presentations according to the game state, and can also suggest the game state to the player from the difference in time values.

In addition, the relationship between the lengths of each period is as follows: 1 cycle of reserved dynamic performance > display time of consumed reserved movement > standby reserved movement display time > 1 cycle of reserved static performance. However, there are also relationships such as 1 cycle of reserved dynamic performance = display time of consumed reserved movement > display time of standby reserved movement > 1 cycle of reserved static performance, 1 cycle of reserved dynamic performance = display time of consumed reserved movement = display time of standby reserved movement > 1 cycle of reserved static performance, and 1 cycle of reserved dynamic performance > display time of consumed reserved movement = display time of standby reserved movement > 1 cycle of reserved static performance.
The relationship may be a period, or one cycle of hold dynamic presentation = waiting hold movement display time > consumed hold movement display time > one cycle of hold static presentation, and even with such a relationship, a certain effect can be obtained.

Next, the visibility of the reserved display can be made high at the start and end of the specific variation pattern will be described with reference to Figure 100. Figure 100 is a diagram showing an example (part 1) of the execution timing of the reserved static performance and the reserved dynamic performance in the specific variation pattern of the seventh embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 starts changing the main symbol, starts changing the decorative symbol, and moves and displays the reserved symbols at timing t21. The gaming machine 10 ends the moving and displaying of the reserved symbols at timing t22, and executes the reserved dynamic presentation and the reserved static presentation with timing t22 as the reset timing. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can display the reserved display with good visibility at timing t22.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 stops the fluctuation of the main symbol, stops the fluctuation of the decorative symbol, and ends the fixed position display of the consumed reserved at timing t23. The gaming machine 10 can achieve a state in which the reserved display has high visibility at timing t22 and timing t23 by setting the fluctuation time in the specific fluctuation pattern, excluding the moving display time of the consumed reserved, to an integer multiple of one cycle of the reserved dynamic presentation and one cycle of the reserved static presentation. Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 can achieve a state in which the reserved display has high visibility at timing t21 and timing t23 by setting the fluctuation time in the specific fluctuation pattern to an integer multiple of one cycle of the reserved dynamic presentation and one cycle of the reserved static presentation. Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 can achieve a state in which the reserved display has high visibility at timing t21 and timing t23.
By setting the fluctuation time in the specific fluctuation pattern and the moving display time of the consumed reserved ball to an integer multiple of one period of the reserved dynamic presentation and one period of the reserved static presentation, respectively, the reserved display can be made highly visible at timing t21, timing t22, and timing t23. Such a gaming machine 10 provides a favorable gaming environment by improving visibility when the reserved display is highly noticeable to the player.

Next, another example of the fact that the visibility of the reserved display can be made high at the start and end of the fluctuation of a specific fluctuation pattern will be described with reference to FIG. 101. FIG. 101 shows an example (part 2) of the execution timing of the reserved static performance and the reserved dynamic performance in the specific fluctuation pattern of the seventh embodiment.
FIG.

The gaming machine 10 starts changing the main symbol, starts changing the decorative symbol, and moves and displays the reserved symbols at timing t31. The gaming machine 10 ends the moving and displaying of the reserved symbols at timing t32, and executes the reserved dynamic presentation and the reserved static presentation with timing t32 as the reset timing. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can display the reserved display with good visibility at timing t32.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 hides the reserved consumption display 506 and the reserved standby display 505 at timing t34 as a display effect, and redisplays the reserved consumption display 506 and the reserved standby display 505 at timing t35. Thus, the gaming machine 10 hides the reserved consumption display 506 and the reserved standby display 505 from timing t34 to timing t35. The gaming machine 10 executes the reserved dynamic effect and the reserved static effect with timing t35 as the reset timing. Thus, the gaming machine 10 can display the reserved display with good visibility at timing t35.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 stops the variation of the main symbol, stops the variation of the decorative symbol, and ends the fixed position display of the consumed reserved at timing t33. In this way, the gaming machine 10 may have a reset timing that is not bound by the relationship between the variation time in the specific variation pattern and one cycle of the reserved dynamic presentation and one cycle of the reserved static presentation. Such a gaming machine 10 improves visibility when the reserved display is highly noticeable to the player, providing a suitable gaming environment.

Next, the display screen in the variable display game will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen in the variable display game of the seventh embodiment.
The display screen 910 shown in FIG. 102(1) is an example of a display screen in the display device 41. The display screen 910 displays the pending waiting display 505 and the pending consumption display 506, which correspond to the special chart 1 game out of the special chart 1 game and the special chart 2 game. Display screen 910
In order to clearly indicate that the reserved waiting display 505 and the reserved consumption display 506 are displaying the number of reserved games in the special game 1, the number of reserved games in the special game 1 display 503 is displayed as the number of reserved games in the special game 2 display 504.
For example, the number of reserved special drawings 50 on the display screen 910 is displayed more emphatically.
3 is displayed larger than the special drawing 2 reserved number display 504. In addition, the special drawing 1 reserved number display 503 on the display screen 910 is displayed closer to the reserved waiting display 505 and the reserved consumption display 506 than the special drawing 2 reserved number display 504. More specifically, the special drawing 1 on the display screen 910
The reserved number display 503 is displayed at a position sandwiched between the reserved waiting display 505 and the reserved consumption display 506. The highlighting of the special chart 1 reserved number display 503 or the special chart 2 reserved number display 504 may be highlighted by a background or an action.

The display screen 912 shown in FIG. 102(2) is the pending consumption display 50 described in FIG.
6 and the pending waiting display 505 are not displayed.
01 is hidden and a battle effect display (special effect) 913 is displayed. At this time, the display screen 912 is in a state where the reserved consumption display 506 and the reserved standby display 505 are not displayed in order to enhance the effect of the battle effect display 913. The gaming machine 10 can reset the reserved dynamic effect and the reserved static effect when the reserved consumption display 506 and the reserved standby display 505 are redisplayed. The gaming machine 10 may selectively reset the reserved dynamic effect and the reserved static effect when the reserved consumption display 506 and the reserved standby display 505 are redisplayed, and may indicate the progress of the game depending on whether or not a reset has been performed. For example, the gaming machine 10 may reset the reserved consumption display 506 and the reserved standby display 505 when the reserved consumption display 506 and the reserved standby display 505 are redisplayed.
6 and the timing when the hold waiting display 505 is redisplayed, the hold dynamic presentation and the hold static presentation may not be reset to provide a winning notice, etc.

Next, setting different reserved dynamic performance cycles and reserved static performance cycles for the special chart 1 game and the special chart 2 game will be described with reference to Fig. 103. Fig. 103 is a diagram showing an example of the execution period of reserved static performance and reserved dynamic performance in a predetermined game state of the seventh embodiment.

FIG. 103(1) shows one reserved dynamic presentation cycle and one reserved static presentation cycle in the special chart 1 game in the game state C, and one reserved dynamic presentation cycle and one reserved static presentation cycle in the special chart 2 game. The gaming machine 10 performs one reserved dynamic presentation cycle in the special chart 1 game in the game state C for 10 minutes.
00 ms, and one cycle of reserved static presentation is 500 ms. In addition, in the gaming machine 10, one cycle of reserved dynamic presentation in the special chart 2 game in the gaming state C is 1000 ms, and one cycle of reserved static presentation is 500 ms. The gaming machine 10 can set such time values in a gaming state that does not distinguish between a gaming progress mainly based on the special chart 1 game and a gaming progress mainly based on the special chart 2 game. In addition, the gaming state C has a gaming state (game nature) in which, for example, the special chart 1 game and the special chart 2 game are executed alternately.

FIG. 103 (2) shows one reserved dynamic presentation cycle and one reserved static presentation cycle in the special chart 1 game in the game state D, and one reserved dynamic presentation cycle and one reserved static presentation cycle in the special chart 2 game. The gaming machine 10 performs one reserved dynamic presentation cycle in the special chart 1 game in the game state D for 10 times.
In the gaming state C, the game machine 10 sets the reserved dynamic performance cycle to 400 ms, and the reserved static performance cycle to 500 ms.
The cycle is 200 ms. The gaming machine 10 has a game progression mainly consisting of the special game 1 and a special game 2.
Such a time value setting can be performed in a game state that distinguishes between a game progress mainly based on the game and a game progress mainly based on the special game. According to such a setting, the gaming machine 10 can suggest to the player whether the game progress is mainly based on the special game 1 or the special game 2. Note that the game state D has a game state (game nature) equivalent to, for example, the game state A or the game state B.

In addition, when the game progress is mainly on the special chart 2 game from the game state (with normal power support) after the first hit from the game progress mainly on the special chart 1 game in the normal game state, the first special chart game in the game state (with normal power support) may not have a start memory in the special chart 2 game yet and the start memory may remain in the special chart 1 game. In this case, the variable display of the first special chart game after the transition to the game state (with normal power support) becomes the special chart 1 game, and after the start memory of the special chart 2 game occurs, the game progresses with the special chart 2 game in priority to the special chart 1 game. Therefore, when switching from the special chart 1 game to the special chart 2 game, the reserved display switches from the reserved display for the special chart 1 game to the reserved display for the special chart 2 game.

At this time, the gaming machine 10 may omit the shift-out-of-pending standby presentation for the pending display relating to the special chart 1 game and display a pending consumption display when displaying the change in the first special chart game after transitioning to the game state (with regular power support), thereby making it possible to distinguish between game progress through the special chart 2 game, which does not omit the shift-out-of-pending standby presentation, and game progress through the special chart 1 game.

At this time, the gaming machine 10 further displays the reserved display mode (
For example, the display pattern of the reserved display of the special chart 2 game in the game state (with normal power support) may be changed from a substantially V-shaped pattern to a star-shaped pattern, so that special processing for displaying one reserved display of the special chart 1 game can be avoided and the control burden can be reduced. In addition, in order to make it easier to distinguish between the game progress of the special chart 1 game and the game progress of the special chart 2 game, the gaming machine 10 may hide the consumed reserved display of the special chart 1 game in the game progress mainly based on the special chart 2 game (especially when the first special chart game is displayed after transitioning to the game state (with normal power support)), and may further hide the standby reserved display of the special chart 1 game.

In addition, in order to allow the player to recognize the switch from the special chart 1 game to the special chart 2 game, when switching from the hold display for the special chart 1 game to the hold display for the special chart 2 game, the gaming machine 10 may first hide the hold display for the special chart 1 game, and then go through a state in which neither hold display is displayed, before displaying the hold display for the special chart 2 game.

Furthermore, in addition to the hold standby out shift effect and the hold standby in shift effect, the gaming machine 10 performs a hold addition effect that adds a newly generated start memory as a hold display. When the execution timing of the hold standby in shift effect and the hold addition effect overlap, the gaming machine 10 may mislead the player into thinking that the number of hold displays has not increased despite the generation of a new start memory. Therefore, when the execution timing of the hold standby in shift effect and the hold addition effect overlap, the gaming machine 10 may perform an emphasis effect that emphasizes the hold standby in shift effect compared to the hold addition effect. For example,
In the case of 0, a shift effect within the reserved waiting state is executed in front of the reserved addition effect as an emphasis effect. Note that the emphasis effect may be a change in color, brightness, transparency, size, or the like.

Furthermore, even when the hold addition effect and the hold notice effect overlap and involve a change in the newly added hold display mode (for example, a color change from white to red, etc.), the gaming machine 10 emphasizes the hold waiting shift effect compared to the hold addition effect through an emphasis effect, thereby providing a hold display that is easy for the player to understand.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 may execute a hold notice effect other than the hold display effect (for example, a decorative light emitting unit, a sound output unit, an effect display outside the hold display, etc.) even when the hold addition effect and the hold notice effect overlap. In this way, the gaming machine 10 makes it easy for the player to recognize the occurrence of a new start memory and the change in the hold display mode even when the hold waiting shift effect and the hold notice effect overlap.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 can also perform an emphasis effect that emphasizes the shift effect outside of hold standby compared to the hold addition effect, similar to the emphasis effect that emphasizes the shift effect within hold standby compared to the hold addition effect.

The gaming machine 10 is not limited to emphasizing the shift within hold standby effect and the shift outside hold standby effect when a predetermined condition is satisfied, but may also be emphasizing the shift within hold standby effect and the shift outside hold standby effect relative to the hold addition effect by displaying the shift within hold standby effect and the shift outside hold standby effect in priority to the hold addition effect. For example, the gaming machine 10 can emphasize the shift within hold standby effect and the shift outside hold standby effect relative to the hold addition effect by displaying the shift within hold standby effect and the shift outside hold standby effect overlapping on the front side of the hold addition effect. The emphasis of the shift within hold standby effect and the shift outside hold standby effect relative to the hold addition effect can be realized by determining in advance the drawing order and the layer overlap order of the shift within hold standby effect, the shift outside hold standby effect, and the hold addition effect.

The gaming machine 10 of the seventh embodiment described above has the following feature in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a first hold display means (e.g., the gaming control device 100, the performance control device 300, the display device 41, and a hold waiting display 505), a second hold display means (e.g., the gaming control device 100, the performance control device 300, the display device 41, and a hold consumption display 506), a first shift display means (e.g., the gaming control device 100, the performance control device 300, the display device 41, and a hold waiting shift display), a second shift display means (e.g., the gaming control device 100, the performance control device 300, the display device 41, and a hold waiting outside shift display), and a first hold performance means (e.g., the gaming control device 100, the performance control device 300, the display device 41, and a hold dynamic performance). The first hold display means is capable of displaying two or more start memories indicating the right to play a game as a pre-execution hold display at a first position according to the execution order before the execution of the game corresponding to the start memory. The second hold display means is capable of displaying one start memory corresponding to the game at a second position as a play pending display during the execution of the game. The first shift display means shifts and displays a pre-execution pending display in a first position for a first period (e.g., period m2) as the game progresses. The second shift display means shifts and displays the pre-execution pending display displayed in the first position as the game progresses, for a second period (e.g.,
The first hold effect means dynamically and repeatedly displays the hold before execution display or the hold during execution display with a third period (for example, period a1) larger than the second period as one cycle (FIG. 93).

(2) The gaming machine 10 includes a first hold display means (e.g., the gaming control device 100, the performance control device 300, the display device 41, the hold waiting display 505), a second hold display means (e.g., the gaming control device 100, the performance control device 300, the display device 41, the hold consumption display 506), a first shift display means (e.g., the gaming control device 100, the performance control device 300, the display device 41, the hold waiting shift display), a second shift display means (e.g., the gaming control device 100, the performance control device 300, the display device 41, the hold waiting outside shift display), and a second hold performance means (e.g., the gaming control device 100, the performance control device 300, the display device 41, the hold static performance). The first hold display means is capable of displaying two or more start memories indicating the right to play a game as a pre-execution hold display at a first position according to the execution order before the execution of the game corresponding to the start memory. The second hold display means is capable of displaying one start memory corresponding to the game at a second position as a play-in hold display during the execution of the game. The first shift display means shifts and displays the pre-execution pending display in the first position for a first period (e.g., period m2) as the game progresses. The second shift display means shifts and displays the pre-execution pending display displayed at the first position as the game progresses as a pending display displayed at the second position for a second period (e.g., period m1) greater than the first period. The second pending performance means statically and repeatedly displays the pre-execution pending display (e.g., pending waiting display 505), the pending display in execution (e.g., pending consumption display 506), a display corresponding to the pre-execution pending display, or a display corresponding to the pending display in execution (e.g., special game variable display status display device 98) for a fourth period (e.g., period r1) shorter than the first period as one cycle (FIG. 93).

(3) The game described in (1) can be executed by selecting one execution period (for example, a specific variable display pattern) from two or more execution periods, and the first reserved performance means sets the third period so that an integer multiple of the third period is approximately the same as the frequently selected execution period (FIG. 99).
.

(4) The gaming machine 10 includes a first hold display means (e.g., the gaming control device 100, the presentation control device 300, the display device 41, a hold waiting display 505), a second hold display means (e.g., the gaming control device 100, the presentation control device 300, the display device 41, a hold consumption display 506), a first shift display means (e.g., the gaming control device 100, the presentation control device 300, the display device 41, a hold waiting shift presentation), a second shift display means (e.g., the gaming control device 100, the presentation control device 300, the display device 41, a hold waiting out shift presentation), and a hold presentation means (e.g., the gaming control device 100, the presentation control device 300, the display device 41, a hold dynamic presentation, a hold static presentation).
The first hold display means is capable of displaying a pre-execution hold display (e.g., hold wait icons 902, 903, 904) on the first display unit (e.g., hold wait display 505) before execution of a game corresponding to the start memory indicating the right to execute the game. The second hold display means is
A pending game display (e.g., pending game consumption icon 901) corresponding to the game being played is displayed in the second
The first shift display means can display the time on a display unit (for example, the pending transaction display 506).
As the game progresses, the pre-execution pending display is displayed in the first display unit for a first period (for example, period m2).
The second shift display means shifts the pre-execution pending display displayed on the first display unit as the execution pending display displayed on the second display unit as the game progresses, in a second period (e.g., period m1) different from the first period. The pending performance means repeatedly displays the pre-execution pending display or the execution pending display in a third period (e.g., period a1, period r1) different from the second period as one cycle.

(5) The gaming machine 10 includes a first hold display means (e.g., the gaming control device 100, the presentation control device 300, the display device 41, a hold waiting display 505), a second hold display means (e.g., the gaming control device 100, the presentation control device 300, the display device 41, a hold consumption display 506), a first shift display means (e.g., the gaming control device 100, the presentation control device 300, the display device 41, a hold waiting shift presentation), a second shift display means (e.g., the gaming control device 100, the presentation control device 300, the display device 41, a hold waiting out shift presentation), and a hold presentation means (e.g., the gaming control device 100, the presentation control device 300, the display device 41, a hold dynamic presentation, a hold static presentation).
The first hold display means is capable of displaying a pre-execution hold display (e.g., hold wait icons 902, 903, 904) on the first display unit (e.g., hold wait display 505) before execution of a game corresponding to the start memory indicating the right to execute the game. The second hold display means is
A pending game display (e.g., pending game consumption icon 901) corresponding to the game being played is displayed in the second
The first shift display means can display the time on a display unit (for example, the pending transaction display 506).
As the game progresses, the pre-execution pending display is displayed in the first display unit for a first period (for example, period m2).
The second shift display means shifts the pre-execution pending display displayed on the first display unit as the game progresses, and displays it on the second display unit as the execution pending display during a second period (e.g., period m1) that is the same as the first period. The pending performance means shifts the pre-execution pending display or the execution pending display during a third period (e.g., period a1, period r1) that is different from the first period and the second period.
) is displayed repeatedly as one period.

(6) The game described in (4) or (5) can be executed by selecting one execution period (for example, a specific variable display pattern) from two or more execution periods, and the reserved performance means sets the third period so that an integer multiple of the third period is approximately the same as the frequently selected execution period (
Figure 99).

The above processing functions can be realized by a computer. In that case, a program is provided that describes the processing contents of the functions that the gaming machine of the embodiment should have. By executing the program on a computer, the above processing functions are realized on the computer. The program that describes the processing contents can be recorded on a computer-readable recording medium. Examples of computer-readable recording media include magnetic storage devices,
Examples of magnetic storage devices include optical disks, magneto-optical recording media, and semiconductor memories. Examples of magnetic storage devices include hard disk drives (HDDs), flexible disks (FDs), and magnetic tapes. Examples of optical disks include DVDs (Digital Versatile Disks), DVD-RAMs, and CDs (Compact Disks)-ROs.
M/RW (ReWritable), etc. Magneto-optical recording media include MO (Magneto-Optical disk)
etc.

When distributing a program, for example, the DVD, C
Portable recording media such as D-ROMs are available for sale. Also, the program can be stored in a storage device of a server computer and transferred from the server computer to other computers via a network.

A computer that executes a program stores, for example, a program recorded on a portable recording medium or a program transferred from a server computer in its own storage device. The computer then reads the program from its own storage device and executes processing according to the program. The computer can also read the program directly from a portable recording medium and execute processing according to that program. The computer can also execute processing according to the received program each time a program is transferred from a server computer connected via a network.

In addition, at least a part of the above processing functions is implemented by a DSP (Digital Signal Processor), A
SIC (Application Specific Integrated Circuit), PLD (Programmable Logic Device
The above-mentioned can also be realized by an electronic circuit such as a gyroscope or a gyroscope.

It should be noted that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine as shown in the disclosed embodiment, but can be applied to, for example, all gaming machines that use gaming balls, such as other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, mahjong ball gaming machines, and slot machines, which are gaming machines that use medals.

In addition, the disclosed embodiments are illustrative in all respects and should not be considered as limiting. In addition, the configurations of the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications may be combined and applied. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, not by the above description, and
All changes that come within the meaning and range of equivalency of the claims are intended to be embraced.

10 Gaming machine 41, 830 Display device 100, 100a Gaming control device 300 Presentation control device

Claims (2)

a main control means for controlling the execution of a first game and a second game which can be alternatively executed;
A slave control means capable of receiving a command from the master control means and executing a predetermined performance;
Equipped with
the slave control means is capable of transitioning between a first presentation control state corresponding to execution of the first game and a second presentation control state corresponding to execution of the second game;
a first hold display means capable of displaying a pre-execution hold display on a first display unit before execution of the first game or the second game corresponding to a start memory indicating a right to execute the first game or the second game;
a second hold display means for displaying a hold display corresponding to the first game being executed or the second game being executed on a second display unit;
a first shift display means for shifting and displaying the pending display before execution in the first display unit for a first period in accordance with the progress of the first game or the second game;
a second shift display means for shifting and displaying the pre-execution pending display displayed on the first display unit as the execution pending display displayed on the second display unit in accordance with the progress of the first game or the second game during a second period different from the first period;
A hold effecting means for repeatedly displaying the hold before execution display or the hold during execution display with a third period as one cycle;
Equipped with
the hold performance means sets the third period in the first performance control state to a size different from the second period and sets the third period in the second performance control state to a size different from the second period, while setting the third period in the first performance control state to a size different from the second period in a relationship of two times ;
Amusement machine. a main control means for controlling the execution of a first game and a second game which can be alternatively executed;
A slave control means capable of receiving a command from the master control means and executing a predetermined performance;
Equipped with
the slave control means is capable of transitioning between a first presentation control state corresponding to execution of the first game and a second presentation control state corresponding to execution of the second game;
a first hold display means capable of displaying a pre-execution hold display on a first display unit before execution of the first game or the second game corresponding to a start memory indicating a right to execute the first game or the second game;
a second hold display means for displaying a hold display corresponding to the first game being executed or the second game being executed on a second display unit;
a first shift display means for shifting and displaying the pending display before execution in the first display unit for a first period in accordance with the progress of the first game or the second game;
a second shift display means for shifting and displaying the pre-execution pending display displayed on the first display unit as the execution pending display displayed on the second display unit in accordance with the progress of the first game or the second game, during a second period that is the same as the first period;
A hold effecting means for repeatedly displaying the hold before execution display or the hold during execution display with a third period as one cycle;
Equipped with
the hold performance means sets the third period in the first performance control state to a length different from the first period and the second period, and sets the third period in the second performance control state to a length different from the first period and the second period, while setting the third period in the first performance control state to a length different from the first period and the second period, and sets the third period in the first performance control state to a length different from the third period in the second performance control state in a relationship of two times ;
Amusement machine.

Images